Chapter 4 POS Hardware Setup

Chapter 4 POS Hardware Setup
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Aldelo® POS User Manual
PUBLISHED BY
Aldelo, LP
6800 Koll Center Parkway, Suite 310
Pleasanton, CA 94566
Copyright © 1997-2015 by Aldelo, LP.
All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means without the written permissions of the publisher.
This manual is available through Aldelo, LP and resellers worldwide. For further information about
other languages that the manual may be translated in, please contact Aldelo, LP or visit our website
at www.aldelo.com. Send comments about this manual to [email protected]
Aldelo is the registered trademark of Aldelo, LP. Other products or company names mentioned
herein are the trademarks of their respective owners.
The example companies, organizations, products, logos, people, places, and events depicted herein
are fictitious. No association with any real company, organization, product, logo, person, place or
event is intended or should be inferred.
For the sake of simplicity, all gender references are written only in the masculine. Any references to
the masculine gender should be interpreted to include the feminine gender as well and vice versa,
wherever applicable.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
IV
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Table of Contents
V
PART 1 GETTING STARTED ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1
CHAPTER 1 POS HARDWARE ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Server Computer ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
What Defines the Server? ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3
Minimum/Recommended Requirements ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3
Software on the Server ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Client Computer ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
What Defines the Client Computer? ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
Minimum/Recommended Requirements ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Software on the Client Computer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Touch Screens ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
All-In-One Terminals ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Touch Monitors ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5
Printers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 6
Interfaces ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Serial --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Parallel ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ethernet -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------USB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6
6
6
7
8
Printer Roles ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Receipt ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Kitchen ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Bar --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Label -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Report -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8
8
9
9
9
MSR Devices ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
Keyboard Interface -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 9
USB Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
Serial Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 10
Customer Pole Displays ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Command Set ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
Serial ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
Cash Drawers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10
Printer Driven ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
Serial ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
MICR Devices ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Keyboard Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
USB Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
Barcode Readers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------11
Keyboard Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 11
USB Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
Weight Scales ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Coin Changers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
Caller ID ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------12
CHAPTER 2 NETWORK HARDWARE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Physical Network -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------13
Cabling --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
Hardware ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 13
NIC Cards ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
VI
Table of Contents
Hubs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 14
Switches ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Routers --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Wireless Access Points -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
Assembling Your Network ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
Starting the Network ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
CHAPTER 3 NETWORK SOFTWARE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
Configuring Windows for Networking ----------------------------------------------------------------- 17
Windows 7 Professional ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
Testing Your Network ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 18
CHAPTER 4 POS HARDWARE SETUP ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
Setting Up the Terminal --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
Setting Up the POS Printers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
Windows 7 Professional ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
Sharing Printers in Windows 7 Professional ---------------------------------------------------------------- 20
Testing the POS Printers -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 20
Setting Up the Cash Drawer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
Printer Driven ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
Serial ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
Setting Up the Customer Pole Display ---------------------------------------------------------------- 21
Setting Up the MICR Device ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
Keyboard Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
USB Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
Setting Up the MSR Device ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
Keyboard Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
Serial Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 22
USB Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
Setting Up the Barcode Reader------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
Setting Up the Weight Scale ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
Installation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 23
Registry Settings---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
Weight Scale Decimals ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
Weight Scale Display Max Len ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
Weight Scale Hardware Refresh Interval -------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
Weight Scale Integrated ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
Weight Scale Query Interval ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 24
Weight Scale Unit Name --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
Weight Size [1-5] Items ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
Weight Size [1-5] Tare ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
Setting Up the Coin Changer --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
Setting Up Caller ID ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
Modem --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
Multi-Line Caller ID Device -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
PART 2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION ------------------------------ 29
CHAPTER 5 SOFTWARE SETUP--------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
Installing Aldelo® POS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
Adjusting Windows --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
Proper Screen Resolution ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 31
16 Bit Color Palette or Better ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Table of Contents
VII
Small Font 96 DPI -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
Setting the Windows Taskbar to Auto Hide -------------------------------------------------------------------- 33
Multiple Languages---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------34
Supported Languages and Special Multilingual Capabilities ------------------------------------------------- 34
Language Settings in Windows 7 Professional ----------------------------------------------------------------- 34
Spanish ALT Codes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 35
Adding a New Font to Windows 7 Professional ---------------------------------------------------------------- 35
Sharing the Database Folder ----------------------------------------------------------------------------35
Sharing in Windows 7 Professional ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 35
Selecting a Database -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------36
Creating a Database ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 37
Connecting to a Database over the Network -------------------------------------------------------------------- 38
Information Data Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------38
General Settings ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
Postal Codes ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
Delivery Streets -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
Cash Trays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40
Surcharges -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40
Discounts --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 41
Bank Card Files ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42
Bad Check Reasons --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42
Bad Check Penalties -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42
Custom Printer Types ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43
How To Convert Control Codes ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43
Code Conversion Chart -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 44
Tax Table Setup ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46
Setup Tax [1, 2, or 3] Tax Table ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 46
Table Setup ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47
Dine In Table Groups ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47
Table Group Editor---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47
Dine In Table Editor -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49
Employee Setup----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50
Job Titles --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 50
Employee Files > General Tab -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51
Employee Files > Payroll Tab --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 52
Employee Files > Driver Tab ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53
Employee Files > Notes Tab ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53
Employee Schedules -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
Menu Setup ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
Menu Categories ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 55
Pizza Builder Setup > Sizes Tab ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 55
Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts Tab ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts Tab > Add --------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings Tab ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings Tab > Add ----------------------------------------------------------------- 56
Pizza Builder Setup > Pizzas Tab ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 57
Pizza Builder Setup > Pizzas Tab > Add --------------------------------------------------------------------- 57
Modifier Builder Template Setup ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 58
Edit Category ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
Modifier Builder Editor ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 60
Menu Groups ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 61
Menu Group Editor --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
VIII
Table of Contents
Menu Group Schedule ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 63
Menu Group Schedule Editor --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64
Menu Items ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 64
Menu Item Editor ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 65
Menu Item Editor > Page 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 66
Menu Item Editor > Page 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 67
Menu Item Editor > Page 2 (Continued) --------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
Menu Item Auto Prices ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
Menu Item Price Editor ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 70
Menu Modifiers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 70
Forced Modifier Editor ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72
Forced Modifiers Editor ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73
Inventory Setup ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 74
Inventory Groups------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 74
Inventory Locations--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 74
Inventory Vendors ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 74
Inventory Items -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75
Inventory Items (Continued) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
Menu Recipe Editor -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
Menu Recipe Editor (cont.) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 78
Menu Recipe Editor (cont.) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 79
Menu Recipe Editor (Modifiers) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 80
Modifier Recipe Selector -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
Inventory UOM ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 82
PART 3 SOFTWARE OPERATION --------------------------------------------------------------------- 83
CHAPTER 6 OPENING PROCEDURES -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 85
Time Cards ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 85
Clocking In ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 85
Viewing Your Schedule ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 86
Earnings Report----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 86
Register a Pager ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 86
Starting Your Bank --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
Starting Staff Bank ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
Cashier In ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 88
CHAPTER 7 HOSTESS PROCEDURES--------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
Reservations ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
Creating a Reservation --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
Changing a Reservation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 92
Checking In a Reservation ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 92
Waiting List ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 92
Add a Customer to the Waiting List ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
Check In the Customer -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
Assigning a Table ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
CHAPTER 8 DINE IN ORDERS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 95
Order Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 95
Adding Items -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 97
Voiding Items ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 97
Re-Ordering Items-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
Holding Items ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
Releasing the Hold ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 101
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Table of Contents
Splitting an Order ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Combine Orders -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ordering a Half --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Item Details-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ordering Multiple Quantities ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Applying Discounts ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Applying Surcharges --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Applying Credits-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Changing the Order Type ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Adding a Customer Name to an Order -----------------------------------------------------------------------Assigning a Pager to a Customer ------------------------------------------------------------------------------Changing the Number of Guests on the Check --------------------------------------------------------------Changing the Table Number of the Check -------------------------------------------------------------------Recall Another Check on the Same Table -------------------------------------------------------------------Changing Seat Numbers in Order Entry -----------------------------------------------------------------------
IX
101
101
102
102
102
102
103
103
104
104
104
104
105
105
105
Misc Button ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106
Change Price -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Assign Seats ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Clear Order -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------No Sale ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Change Server ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Gratuity -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cust. Lookup -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Recall Order ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Create Labels -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Retail Screen -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Tax Exempt -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------No Kitchen/Bar --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Lock Screens -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Re-Print Pizza Labels -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------To Secondary Language/To Primary Language --------------------------------------------------------------
106
106
107
107
107
107
107
108
108
108
109
109
109
109
109
Modifier System ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 109
Modifiers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Manual Modifiers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Forced Modifiers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Modifier Builder Template --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
110
111
111
111
Pizza Builder System ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 112
CHAPTER 9 BAR TAB ORDERS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 115
Order Entry for Bar Tab ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 115
Create a New Bar Tab ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 115
Setting Up Bar Tab Efficiency ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 116
CHAPTER 10 TAKE OUT ORDERS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 117
Order Entry for Take Out ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 117
Creating a New Take Out Order -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 118
CHAPTER 11 DRIVE THRU ORDERS ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 119
Order Entry for Drive Thru---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 119
Creating a New Drive Thru Order------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 119
Marking a Drive Thru Order as Complete -------------------------------------------------------------------- 120
CHAPTER 12 DELIVERY ORDERS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 121
Order Entry for Delivery ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 121
Creating a Delivery Order --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 122
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
X
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 13 DELIVERY PROCEDURES ----------------------------------------------------------------------123
Assigning a Delivery Order ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 123
Using the Default Delivery Assignment Procedures --------------------------------------------------------- 123
Driver Dispatch Screen Assignment Procedures -------------------------------------------------------------- 123
Using Delivery Directions and Route Planning ----------------------------------------------------- 124
MapPoint Integration Setup -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 124
Using MapPoint Integration ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 124
Viewing Delivery Order Status ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 124
Using the Delivery Status Screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 125
CHAPTER 14 QUICK SERVICE ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------127
Using the Quick Service Screen ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 127
CHAPTER 15 RECALL PROCEDURES -------------------------------------------------------------------------129
Recall Operations --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 129
Batch Transfer ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 129
CHAPTER 16 VOID PROCEDURES ----------------------------------------------------------------------------131
Void Operations ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 131
CHAPTER 17 CASHIER OPERATIONS -------------------------------------------------------------------------133
No Sale --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 133
Pay Out --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 133
General Payout----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 133
Wage Advance ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 133
Manager Cash Out ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 134
Issuing Refunds ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 134
CHAPTER 18 GIFT CARD PROCEDURES ---------------------------------------------------------------------135
Issuing Gift Cards --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 135
Recharging Gift Cards --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 136
Checking Balances -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 136
CHAPTER 19 ORDER SETTLEMENT PROCEDURES ---------------------------------------------------------137
Cashier Settle Operations ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 137
Settling in the Main POS Screen -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 137
Cash -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 138
Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 138
Credit Card ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 138
ATM/Debit Card ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 139
Gift Certificate -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 139
House Account ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 140
Complimentary ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 140
Settling in the Order Entry Screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 140
Settling Using Staff Bank ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 140
Settling Using Driver Money Drop ------------------------------------------------------------------- 141
CHAPTER 20 CLOSING PROCEDURES ------------------------------------------------------------------------143
Closing the Cash Drawer ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 143
Quick Sign Out ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 143
Closing Your Staff Bank ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 144
Clocking Out --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 144
Running a Closing Report------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 145
CHAPTER 21 MANAGER OPERATIONS -----------------------------------------------------------------------147
Time Cards ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 147
Editing Time Cards ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 147
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Table of Contents
XI
Orders ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 147
Reverting or Re-Opening an Order ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 147
Cash Drawers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 148
Reverting or Re-Opening a Cash Drawer --------------------------------------------------------------------- 148
Operations Center -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 148
Receive Payments Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pay In House Charges ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pay Bad Checks ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Auto Pay All Open Deliveries ------------------------------------------------------------------------------Revenue Center Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Closing Report ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Z Report -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Bank Report ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Register Report -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Bank Deposit--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Gift Certificate List ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cust. Credit List ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Order Pmt List ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Bad Check List -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Daily Receipt Summary -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Re-Open Cashier ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Re-Open Deposit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Next Day Transfer--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Break Missed Report-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Close EDC Batch ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Frequent Diners Section ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------New Freq. Diner ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Track Order ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Redemption ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Freq. Diner Acct. List ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------In House Charge Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Maintain In House Accounts -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Create In House Statements ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------In House Account List ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Customer Files ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Inventory Activities Section -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Phy. Count Sheet ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Phy. Inv. Count -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Inv. Prep. Forecast -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Hourly Inventory Usage -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Inventory Items -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Menu Recipe --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Qty Count Down Setup --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Shopping List -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------New PO (Purchase Order) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Review PO ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Receive Items -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Other Tools Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Caller ID Log -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Caller ID Switch ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculator------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------To Training Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
148
149
149
149
150
150
150
150
151
151
151
151
151
152
152
152
152
152
152
153
153
153
153
153
154
154
154
154
155
155
155
155
155
156
156
156
156
156
157
157
157
158
158
158
159
159
159
XII
Table of Contents
Assign Table ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 159
Add Cash To Bank --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 159
Customer Incidents -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 159
Driver Summary------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 160
Emp. Still Working -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 160
Edit Work Schedule ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 160
Open Order Report --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 160
Media Open ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 160
Media Clear ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 160
Media Options -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 160
Media Close----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 161
Media Exit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 161
Menu Item Sales By Category ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 161
Sales By Menu Item Report ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 161
Sales By Category Report------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 161
Server Gratuity Report ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 161
CHAPTER 22 MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES -------------------------------------------------------------------163
General Activities --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 163
Pay Employees (Payroll) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 163
New Local E-Mail ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 164
Review Local E-Mail --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 164
Video Surveillance Control Center ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 164
Camera Settings ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 164
Disable Camera------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 165
Maintenance ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 165
Snapshot --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 165
Close ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 165
Video Surveillance Review Browser --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 165
Create Menu Item Labels----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 165
Maintain Pay Outs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 166
Maintain Manager Cash Outs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 166
Global Menu Item Price Change -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 166
Export Menu Item Sales ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 167
Customer Activities ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 168
Maintain Customer Records ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 168
Create Customer Address Labels-------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 168
Maintain In House Charge Accounts --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 168
Create In House Charge Statements ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 169
Maintain Frequent Diner Accounts ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 169
Maintain Frequent Diner Tracking ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 169
Maintain Customer Credits -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 170
Maintain Gift Certificates ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 170
New Bad Check --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 170
Follow Up Bad Checks ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 170
Inventory Activities ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 171
New Purchase Order ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 171
Review Purchase Order ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 171
Create PO from Shopping List ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 171
Create Inventory Item Labels ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 171
Receive Inventory Items ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 172
Physical Inventory Count ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 172
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Table of Contents
XIII
Maintenance Activities --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 172
Monitor Client Connections ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Remove All Access Denied Logs -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Remove All Caller ID Logs ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Remove All Customer Names from Orders ------------------------------------------------------------------Remove All Redeemed Gift Certificate MSR Card Information ------------------------------------------Remove Prior Manager Cash Outs ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Remove Prior Reservations ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Delete Master Data ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Refresh Cumulative Grand Total -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
172
172
173
173
173
173
173
173
174
Third Party Add Ins------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 174
New ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 174
Calculator ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 175
Notepad ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 175
CHAPTER 23 DATABASE MAINTENANCE ------------------------------------------------------------------- 177
Database & Support Files ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 177
adResSettings.dat ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------adResISV.dat -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------adResHostess.dat ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------adRes.lang ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
177
177
177
177
Database Engine Used --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 177
Database Recommended Limits ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 178
Compact Database-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 178
Jet Compact Utility ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 178
Backup Database --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 178
CHAPTER 24 IMPORT/EXPORT DATA ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 181
Export Data ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 181
Import Data ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 181
Import New Resource Database ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 181
Export Reports ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 182
CHAPTER 25 REPORTS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 183
Generating Reports ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 183
Sample Reports ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 183
PART 4 APPENDIX ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 267
APPENDIX A STORE SETTINGS ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 269
General---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Taxes > Tax 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Taxes > Tax 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Taxes > Tax 3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Taxes > Other Options---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Services > Dine In--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Services > Dine In > Hostess/Paging Setup > General --------------------------------------------------Services > Dine In > Hostess/Paging Setup > Reservations --------------------------------------------Services > Dine In > Hostess/Paging Setup > Waiting List --------------------------------------------Services > Dine In > Hostess/Paging Setup > Manager Alerts ----------------------------------------Services > Dine In > Hostess/Paging Setup > Pagers ---------------------------------------------------Services > Take Out -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Services > Drive Thru ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Services > Delivery -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
270
272
272
273
273
274
275
276
276
277
278
279
280
280
XIV
Table of Contents
Revenue > Payments ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 282
Revenue > Payments > Configure EDC Integration Settings > Store Level --------------------------- 283
Revenue > Payments > Configure EDC Integration Settings > This Station -------------------------- 284
Revenue > Gratuity -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 285
Revenue > Cashier --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 286
Revenue > Other Options ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 287
Receipts > Guest Check --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 288
Receipts > Kitchen/Bar ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 289
Receipts > Other Options ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 290
Print > Guest Check ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 291
Print > Kitchen/Bar -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 292
Print > Multilingual -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 293
Print > Packager Receipt -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 294
Print > Customer Receipt ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 294
Print > Other Options ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 295
Staff/CRM ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 295
Products > Modifiers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 298
Products > Pizza ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 299
Products > Inventory ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 299
Products > Other Options ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 300
Order Entry ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 300
Other ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 301
APPENDIX B SECURITY SETTINGS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------307
Security Settings ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 308
APPENDIX C STATION SETTINGS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------317
Station Settings > General ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 318
Station Settings > Cashier------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 319
Station Settings > Quick Service ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 320
Station Settings > Other Options----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 321
Station Settings > Printer > Receipt Printer---------------------------------------------------------------- 322
Station Settings > Printer > Packager Printer -------------------------------------------------------------- 323
Station Settings > Printer > Kitchen/Bar > Kitchen ------------------------------------------------------ 323
Station Settings > Printer > Kitchen/Bar > Bar ------------------------------------------------------------ 323
Station Settings > Printer > Label Printer ------------------------------------------------------------------ 324
Station Settings > Printer > Report Printer ---------------------------------------------------------------- 324
Station Settings > Printer > Other --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 324
Station Settings > Port Settings ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 325
APPENDIX D ADVANCED SETTINGS -------------------------------------------------------------------------327
Advanced Settings --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 328
NOTES ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------347
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Introduction
XV
Introduction
The Aldelo® POS software solution covers your restaurant operations with a full array of features.
Whether you are looking to automate your order entry and cash register procedures, prevent
employee mistakes, prevent cash drawer shortages, improve inventory tracking, start offering in
house charge accounts, start offering a frequent diner program, or to start tracking customer sales
history, you have chosen the right solution for the job!
The Aldelo® POS software solution is affordable and feature rich. Besides the capability as a fullfeatured restaurant point of sale system, the following features are also included at no additional
cost:
Inventory Management Module with Auto Depletion By Sales Capability
Gift Certificate Sales, Tracking, and Redemption Module
Customer Credit Voucher, Tracking, and Redemption Module
In House Charge Account and Billing Statement Creation Module
Frequent Diner Module with Customized Automatic Reward Creation
Microsoft® MapPoint 2010™ Mapping Software Integration
Up to 8 line Caller ID Monitoring
Full featured Reservation and Waiting List Module
Staff and Customer Paging
Video Surveillance Snapshot Feature
Localization Manager with Multilingual Support
Quick Service Screen for Fast Food Operations
Remote Support Feature for Quick Problem Resolution
These modules would normally cost hundreds or even thousands of dollars more with our
competitors’ packages. However, at Aldelo, we believe in providing a complete package at an
affordable price, enabling you with the technology to propel your restaurant business to new levels!
The Aldelo® POS software solution is extremely user friendly and very simple to learn. However,
we still feel that a complete manual that covers every feature in the software is necessary. In order to
take full advantage of our software system, we strongly recommend that you take the time to read
this manual in its entirety before diving into our software solution.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
XVI
Introduction
The Structure of the Manual
This manual is divided into parts and chapters in order to help you better focus on the key topics.
You are not required to have prior knowledge of any restaurant point of sale software to use this
manual. We are assuming that you are venturing into the world of automated POS solutions for the
first time. This manual attempts to teach you everything that you need to know about using the
Aldelo® POS software solution.
We strongly recommend that you install Aldelo® POS on a computer and try the procedures defined
in the manual.
To help you read this manual faster, we have introduced some standard conventions to help you
distinguish actions, names, and other topics from the normal content. The following are the
conventions used in the manual:
Element
Meaning
“Quotes”
Any reference to a button name or other control name that is
clicked by the user appears in “quotes” (e.g. click the “Enter”
button).
Location Path
The shorthand notation used to navigate through the software
takes the following form: Name > Name > Name where Name
can be a button, menu item, tab, etc. For example Back Office >
Setup > General Settings > Cash Trays represents directions to
the window used to define your cash trays.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
1
Part 1
Getting Started
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
2
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
POS Hardware
3
Chapter 1
POS Hardware
Congratulations on purchasing your new POS system! You have taken another step toward
becoming a successful restaurant entrepreneur. In this chapter, we introduce you to the different
types of hardware that may be present in your restaurant. We also discuss the pros and cons of each
type of hardware to help minimize mistakes when performing the system setup.
Server Computer
In a POS environment, one computer is responsible for maintaining the software database. This
computer is usually faster than the other computers in the network. In situations where there is only
one computer in the POS network, that computer acts as the server. Servers come in many shapes
and sizes. They are not necessarily computers with enterprise level software and hardware. Most of
the time, the server is simply the central location for the stored database information and
management functions.
What Defines the Server?
In Aldelo® POS, the server holds the database that all other terminals connect to when performing
transactions. It does not require any special operating system or hardware to be considered the
server computer. Once a database is created on the computer and other terminals connect to that
database, the computer is considered the database server. When calling Aldelo for technical support,
our staff will ask which computer is the database server when dealing with database related issues.
The server is also responsible for maintaining time synchronization between the client stations and
the server. If one of your client machines has a different time than the server time, the server
changes the client time to match. This is an important function, since all reports are based on the
date/time stamp of each transaction.
Note: Time Synchronization requires that the TCP settings in the Back Office be setup properly.
Minimum/Recommended Requirements
The requirements for computer software and operating systems change as fast as new hardware and
software is released. Most of the time, minimum requirements for software are determined by the
operating system. Obviously, we cannot run Aldelo® POS on any system with less than the
minimum requirements listed for the operating system since the operating system needs AT LEAST
this minimum amount of system resources. This is considered a baseline when determining
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
4
POS Hardware
your system’s speed requirements. These minimum requirements are meant to give you an
understanding of what is required for the system to run. They are not meant as a guideline for
purchasing a system. The minimum requirements for Aldelo® POS can be found on the Aldelo
website at www.aldelo.com.
When purchasing a system, use the hardware recommendations to find the right hardware for your
system. These specifications are Aldelo’s recommendations for the system to perform to the
standards needed in the environment for which they were designed. Anything less than the
recommendation and the customer may experience performance that is slower than expected. The
recommended system requirements for Aldelo® POS may also be found at www.aldelo.com.
Tech Tip: When running several applications at once, monitor your RAM use.
When using Windows 7 Professional, there are two things to watch under the
Task Manager > Performance Tab: Physical Memory (MB) Total and
Commit (MB). If your Commit (MB) value is ever greater than your Physical
Memory (MB) Total value, install more RAM. To access the Task Manager,
press CTRL+ALT+DELETE on your keyboard and then click the “Start Task
Manager” button.
Software on the Server
In any network environment, the server computer is responsible for many different tasks. So far, the
server computer in our POS network is responsible for holding the database and allowing other
systems to connect to it. Along with these tasks, the server can also be used to run programs that
complement Aldelo® POS. These programs include, but are not limited to: Aldelo ® Database
Manager, Aldelo® Gift Card Server, Aldelo® Polling Server, Aldelo® Localization Manager,
Aldelo® POS Wireless, Aldelo® Fingerprint Server, Aldelo® Kitchen Display Server, Aldelo® EDC
(Electronic Data Capture), and other third party applications.
Each of these programs has its own system requirements. The most common system requirement is
an internet connection on the server. This is required for many of the programs mentioned above.
Tech Tip: Troubleshooting is easier if all network systems are connected to the
internet. This allows technicians at Aldelo to connect to the customer’s system
remotely while on the phone with them. It also dramatically shortens call length.
Client Computer
We have talked about the computer responsible for maintaining the database and performing other
tasks related to the POS system. In this section we cover the computers that are responsible for
sending transactions to the server computer. These systems are usually visible to the public and get
the most use. Since they are not processing transactions from other systems, their hardware does not
need to be as robust as that of the server computer. In addition, receipt printers are usually found
connected to the client computers, since they are placed where the customers are being served.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
POS Hardware
5
What Defines the Client Computer?
Any computer on the network on which the database does not reside is defined as a client computer.
This system is only responsible for sending transactions to the server computer to be processed. If
this system is removed from the network, normal operations still occur since the database resides on
the server computer.
Minimum/Recommended Requirements
The requirements for the server are higher than the requirements for the client computer. Since the
client does not perform as much processing as the server, the hardware does not need to be as fast.
The minimum requirements are still the same, but the recommended requirements change slightly.
As before, the recommendations are guidelines when purchasing a system. Use these
recommendations rather than the minimum requirements. If your restaurant is very busy, the
recommended hardware may be insufficient. As always, consult with your reseller or call the Aldelo
Sales Department with any questions you may have when purchasing your hardware.
Software on the Client Computer
The most common configuration for client systems is to run Aldelo® POS exclusively. The more
software that is running on the system, the slower the response time may be when using the system.
When a restaurant gets busy, this is not acceptable. Dell, HP, and other vendors may install software
that is not used and may slow the system down. Go through the system and remove any such
software. Software that affects performance shows up in the lower right hand corner of the Windows
Desktop. These programs use small portions of system memory and processor time to run
continuously. If you see one that you do not use, uninstall it.
Touch Screens
All-In-One Terminals
All-in-one terminals contain everything needed in a POS environment, and are designed to make
installation easy. These units come standard with many more ports than a standard PC. There are
many advantages to these units including a smaller footprint, more ports for devices, built-in
accessories like MSRs and customer displays, and one manufacturer to contact for technical support.
Normally you would have a manufacturer for the system, one for the touch screen, one for the MSR,
and one for the customer display. That’s potentially 4 manufacturers to call if there is a hardware
problem. With an all-in-one terminal, you make one phone call for all issues related to the terminal.
Touch Monitors
Touch monitors are just like normal monitors, except that they are touch enabled. They support the
typical POS screen resolutions found in the market. They require a VGA cable to be connected to
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
6
POS Hardware
the computer as well as a serial or USB cable connected to the appropriate port on the computer.
The serial or USB connection is responsible for the touch features of the monitor.
Printers
Printers play a vital role in the POS environment. Restaurants and customers rely on printers to print
receipts, reports, labels, and other forms of hardcopy transactions. Printers are necessary in a POS
installation. Since there are many different kinds of printers, this section covers the different uses
and types of printers that are found in many POS installations.
Interfaces
Currently, there are four main interfaces for POS printers: Serial, Parallel, Ethernet, and USB. All
are supported by Aldelo® POS. Each has its advantages and disadvantages. These are covered in the
following section. Most printers come with interfaces built-in, but others come with slots to
accommodate switching interfaces if necessary. These are handy if your business needs change and
you want to avoid having to buy a new printer.
Serial
This is the most common interface found in restaurant POS printers since they are very inexpensive.
Serial printers have also been around longer than any other interface type and should continue to
find their way into installations for many years to come.
Serial printers have a maximum distance of 50 feet. Some serial printers can go even farther, but
require a special serial port on the computer that sends the signal farther without errors. They are
frequently used in kitchen applications where cables can be run from the front of the restaurant to
the kitchen area.
The downside to serial printers is the setup. Drivers must be installed, but there is also second step.
Since serial printers rely on the computer’s COM port, the port settings must be configured correctly
for the printer to operate. If the serial printer came with a manual, the settings should be listed. If the
printer did not come with a manual, the manual can usually be downloaded from the printer
manufacturer’s website. These settings include the baud rate, data bits, parity, stop bits, and flow
control. The two most common mistakes in the settings are the baud rate and the flow control. The
printer needs to be opened or an internal test print performed, usually by holding down the “Feed”
button while turning the printer on to find the current settings. Every printer is different, so check
the manual to find out how to do a test print.
Parallel
The parallel printer costs approximately the same as a serial printer, cannot go as far, but has less
setup. The parallel printer is the second most installed interface type and is mostly used in receipt
type applications where the printer is not far from the computer to which it is connected.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
POS Hardware
7
The main advantage of the parallel printer is the ease of setup. With parallel printers, you need only
install the drivers provided by the manufacturer to get the printer up and running. Once installed,
you should be able to print a Windows test page to verify that the printer is working properly.
The disadvantage of a parallel printer is the distance. The parallel interface can only support a cable
up to 25 feet from the computer. Since it has limited distance and is easier to setup, the parallel
printer is usually used for receipt, bar, and label applications where distance is not a factor.
Special devices can extend the range possible between the printer and the computer. The High
Speed Parallel Line Extender from ATEN-USA connects to your printer and computer parallel
ports. It uses a straight through phone cable to connect the devices together and can reach distances
up to 1,000 feet. Since the device is relatively inexpensive, it is a good way to overcome the
distance problem.
Another way to extend the distance is to use a print server. Print servers use TCP/IP for
communications and therefore are not bound by the 25-foot limitation. Print servers come in many
different types; from single port models to models with three or more ports. An example of a single
port print server is the Netgear PS101. This allows your parallel printer to extend its distance up to
300 feet away from the network hub or switch. Since they connect to the network, the print servers
must be configured with an IP address as well as any other settings used in the network.
Ethernet
Ethernet printers are becoming more and more popular in POS installations since they can go farther
than serial and are not reliant on the computer to stay operational. They require more setup than
parallel and about the same amount as serial. Setup for an Ethernet printer closely resembles setting
up your computer to communicate on the network. Both use an IP address, subnet mask, and device
name. The utility used to configure these settings varies from manufacturer to manufacturer, but
they all have ways to configure the printer to communicate on the network.
There are two main advantages to Ethernet printers. The first is the distance. Ethernet printers can be
installed up to 300 feet away from the hub or switch to which they are connected. This distance is
enough to cover the needs of almost any application the restaurant may need. They use normal
network cables. It is much easier to run these cables through walls and ceilings due to their smaller
connector type. They use a normal RJ-45 connector, which fits through any nickel-sized hole.
The second advantage is that it does not rely on the computer to continue to operate normally. Since
serial and parallel printers connect to the computer, if the computer ever fails, the printers also fail.
Ethernet printers connect directly to the network and are not affected by computer related issues.
The disadvantage of Ethernet printers is the cost. They are more expensive than serial or parallel
printers since the technology is relatively new. As the technology matures, the costs should come
down and eventually compete with serial and parallel. Until then, these printers are considered
luxury items and are often passed up in favor of the cheaper serial and parallel models.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
8
POS Hardware
USB
USB stands for Universal Serial Bus. It is becoming the de facto standard for connecting any
peripheral to a computer. Since they are extremely easy to install, these printers are becoming more
popular for customers who do not want the hassle of settings or complex cabling. With USB, the
drivers are installed and the printer is plugged into any USB interface on the computer. The USB
interface is designed to be connected or disconnected while the computer is operational (“hot
swapping”).
The advantage of USB printers is that almost all computers today have several USB ports. USB
ports can be found on mini-computers that save valuable space in a restaurant environment. They
are easy to install and the cables are very small, allowing for very clean installations.
The disadvantages of USB are cost and distance. The cost of a USB printer is slightly more than a
serial or parallel printer but not as much as an Ethernet printer. The downside to USB is the distance
that the printer can be from the computer. The maximum distance is only about 14 feet. This limits
the use of USB printers to roles that require or allow the printer to be close to its host computer.
Printer Roles
Receipt
One of the most important reasons for owning a POS system is to generate readable, error free
receipts. Mistakes are made when things are hand-written. Computer generated and printed receipts
help to eliminate these mistakes. There are several different types of printers as discussed
previously. Within each of the different interface types, there are still more options to choose from
when purchasing a printer. For receipt printers, it is usually a good idea to use a thermal transfer
printer due to its speed. Fast receipts are necessary when customers are waiting to pay their bills.
The other option, dot matrix, is much slower and noisier, and often passed over in favor of the
quicker and quieter thermal.
Kitchen
Along with error free customer receipts, you also need error free tickets to the kitchen to make the
most of your POS investment. To accomplish this, a kitchen printer is used. With a kitchen printer,
tickets are generated in a consistent and reliable manner, allowing the cooks to concentrate on what
they do best. Since the kitchen is hot and susceptible to grease, oil, and steam, thermal tickets are
not recommended. When a thermal receipt is subjected to high heat, it turns completely black. The
option to thermal receipts is normal paper receipts printed by a dot matrix printer. These are not
easily affected by heat and are much more durable in a kitchen environment.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
POS Hardware
9
Bar
Since there are usually not too many hot items in a bar, thermal printers work well. A thermal is also
a good choice if you have an extremely busy bar and ticket speed is important. Dot matrix printers
may also be used in bars. They are usually less expensive than thermal printers and work just as
well. The one advantage of a dot matrix printer for bartenders is the fact that they can hear the ticket
printing. Sometimes this is a benefit when a bartender is working the shift alone and needs to attend
to customers as well as a server drink station.
Label
Label printers are often used in pizza restaurants and places where takeout or delivery is common.
These printers create labels for weighed food items, delivery addresses, barcode labels, and
customer mailings. Currently, Aldelo® POS supports two labels sizes: 1” x 3” and 4” x 1.5.” Check
www.aldelo.com for a list of label printers that have been tested to work with Aldelo® POS.
Report
Most reports in Aldelo® POS can be printed to a report printer. A report printer in the software can
be any desktop printer that prints on 8.5” x 11” paper. These can be inkjet printers, laser printers, or
dot matrix printers. Laser printers are recommended since the price of laser printers has become
competitive with ink jet printers. Laser printers are much faster and do not require expensive and
messy ink cartridges. They do require toner, but the amount of time between replacements is usually
much longer than with ink cartridges.
MSR Devices
MSR (Magnetic Stripe Reader) devices allow your employees to input information into the POS
system quickly by using a plastic card with a magnetic stripe on the back. These devices can read
one, two, or three tracks of data programmed on the card’s magnetic stripe. Aldelo® POS only
supports readers that read two tracks of data. The reader must be programmed to tell it how many
tracks it should read and where the end of each track is. A common configuration is track one starts
with a percentage sign (%) and ends with a question mark (?). Track two track starts with a semicolon (;) and ends with a question mark (?). MSR devices are connected to the system by a variety
of interface types.
Keyboard Interface
The keyboard interface uses the keyboard port on your computer. The cable used for this device has
a splitter on it so that you can also connect your keyboard to the computer. If you do not plan to
have a keyboard connected to the system, it is important that you connect a keyboard terminator on
the end of the splitter to simulate the presence of a keyboard on the system.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
10
POS Hardware
USB Interface
The USB interface is becoming a popular interface for the same reason all USB devices are
becoming popular; ease of installation and availability of ports. Many systems today come with two
or more USB ports, which in theory can be expanded to allow as many as 127 devices connected to
them through USB hubs and “daisy chaining.” The USB MSR device drivers must be installed
before connecting the device.
Serial Interface
The last type of MSR reader interface is serial. Like any serial device, there are settings that must be
checked before the device can work properly. The correct COM port must also be selected or the
device will not function in Aldelo® POS. Again, the device drivers must be installed (if there are
any) before the device is installed. Serial devices require the system to be restarted so the operating
system has a chance to detect that the device has been installed.
Tech Tip: A good way to test this device is to open up Notepad and swipe an
MSR card through the device. If you see the contents of the card show up on the
screen, then the device is working correctly.
Customer Pole Displays
Command Set
The current command set supported by Aldelo® POS is the UTC, or Ultimate Command Set. This is
the only command set supported by Aldelo® POS at this time. When ordering a customer pole
display, be sure to request that documentation be included regarding control codes.
Serial
This is the most common type in use today. Some manufacturers design the customer pole display to
work only on certain COM ports. Read the documentation carefully before attempting to install any
customer pole display. There are usually no drivers to install with customer pole displays but again,
always refer to the documentation before proceeding.
Cash Drawers
Printer Driven
A printer driven cash drawer receives commands from the printer at specified times, allowing the
cash drawer to open. Many different companies make printers and cash drawers, so it is important to
verify that the two pieces of hardware can work together. Most manufacturers have documentation
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
POS Hardware
11
on what cash drawers and printers are compatible. When in doubt, contact the manufacturer for
information on specific hardware combinations and cable requirements.
Serial
The serial cash drawer plugs into the COM port of the computer and acts like a normal serial device.
Check the port settings against the documentation to make sure they are correct. There are control
codes that must be set when setting up the cash drawer in Aldelo® POS, so have the manual or guide
that lists these control codes available for reference.
MICR Devices
A Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) device is used to quickly enter the checking account
number and bank routing number from a customer’s check. It is useful if you plan to use the
Aldelo® POS Bad Check Tracking feature. Rather than having to key in your customer’s routing
number and account number from the check, you just slide the check through the reader.
Keyboard Interface
These devices work much like the MSR reader. The MICR reader comes with a splitter cable to
allow connection of a keyboard to the computer along with the MICR device. Just as with the MSR
Reader, if you do not want a keyboard connected to the computer, install a keyboard terminator on
the end of the splitter cable to simulate the presence of a keyboard on the system.
USB Interface
Some MICR devices that use a USB interface work with Aldelo® POS. Check with your hardware
vendor for setup instructions.
Tech Tip: A good way to test this device is to open up Notepad and run a check
through the reader. If you see the account information show up on the screen,
then the device is working properly.
Barcode Readers
A barcode reader reads the information encoded into the various types of barcodes in use today and
inputs it into the system. The most common type of barcode reader is the gun type.
Keyboard Interface
Again, this device plugs directly into a splitter cable to allow a keyboard to be connected at the same
time. If you do not have a keyboard, connect a keyboard terminator to the splitter cable.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
12
POS Hardware
USB Interface
Install the drivers for the barcode reader, if necessary, and plug it into any available USB port.
Tech Tip: A good way to test this device is to open up Notepad and scan a
barcode on any item you find. If you see the barcode information show up on the
screen, then the device is working properly.
Weight Scales
The only weight scales currently supported by Aldelo® POS are the Avery Berkel NCI 6720 and the
Avery Berkel NCI 6712 models. These scales have serial interfaces. The 6720 scale displays the
weight in pounds and the 6712 scale displays the weight in ounces. Weight scales are found mostly
in deli, produce, meat, and grocery operations.
Coin Changers
If you run a small retail shop in your restaurant or use Aldelo® POS to run a retail store, you may
need some way of quickly making change for your customer. Coin changers are very efficient at
dispensing correct change quickly and accurately. These devices are simple to operate and reliable.
Simply plug the unit in according to the manufacturer’s instruction manual.
Caller ID
Caller ID devices read information from the telephone company and send it to a software program to
display to the user. Aldelo® POS can display this information. The caller telephone number and
name, as provided by the telephone company, display in the software. Please note that if the caller
ID phone number is not currently being provided by the telephone company, then the phone number
displays in Aldelo® POS as a string of zeros.
Caller ID devices are available in two, four, and eight port models. Once installed, Caller ID
information is available to all POS terminals on the network. If you use a single line Caller ID
modem, only that station to which it is connected will have Caller ID information, as Aldelo® POS
does not support sending information to the other terminals using single line Caller ID devices.
If Caller ID works in HyperTerminal, it should work in Aldelo® POS. HyperTerminal comes with
Windows and can be used to troubleshoot your modem. If the modem does not work, there are ways
of getting the information Aldelo needs to add the modem to the list of supported modems. Please
contact Aldelo Technical Support for further information.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Network Hardware
13
Chapter 2
Network Hardware
Physical Network
With the need for more than one terminal comes the need to setup a network. This section describes
different network devices and how they relate to a successful POS installation.
Cabling
One of the most underestimated pieces of the network is the physical cabling. If not done properly,
the entire network becomes unusable.
Aldelo recommends having your cabling installed professionally. This is especially important if
there are walls or other obstacles to contend with. Air conditioners and fluorescent lights are
common culprits that can interfere with the signal, possibly causing network outages.
If you prefer to do the cabling yourself, it is best to refer to the EIA/TIA 568 specifications. These
can be found by searching Google for “EIA TIA 568.” Some places charge for the full document but
enough free information can be gathered from various websites to get the job done.
The current standard for network cables is CAT5e or better. This allows you to grow to Gigabit
Ethernet if you decide to upgrade in the future. Use this cable in conjunction with RJ-45 connectors
to wire your restaurant.
In order to have enough places to connect your devices, imagine where you want your terminals and
where you might want terminals in the future. This gives you a good idea of where you need to
install your cable runs. Leave extra spots to plug in devices, since you never know what devices you
may need in the future. Common practice is to use a two-plug receptacle allowing two connections
to one wall jack. This gives you more flexibility in the future.
You also need to figure out where you want all your cables to terminate at the other end. If this is in
a back office or closet, make sure it is clean and well ventilated for the hub/switch/router operation.
Hardware
When installing your network, connect the network cables from the individual devices to one central
location so that everything can communicate. This job is accomplished through the use of several
different types of devices. These are NIC cards, hubs, switches, and routers. Routers can be used but
are more common in larger networks that require more complex setup.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
14
Network Hardware
NIC Cards
The Network Interface Card (NIC) takes information passed to it by the other parts of the computer
and translates it to a format that the network can use. This format is used to pass it to other nodes on
the network. The most common type of NIC card is the 10/100 type, which means it can
communicate with either a 10Mbps (megabits per second) network or a 100Mbps network. Some
systems recently have begun to ship with 10/100/1000 type cards which enable you to transfer data
up to 1000Mbps, or 1Gbps, assuming the rest of your network supports it. For most applications,
10/100 is acceptable.
Hubs
A hub is the simplest device on a network. Its purpose is to relay information to other systems on
the network. It does not perform any kind of data processing or intelligent routing of data. If
information is received on one port of the hub, it is sent out to every other port in a shotgun fashion
on the device, hoping that the data gets to the right place. These devices have lights on them that
indicate if the hub is able to communicate with the device on the other end. The lights blink when
data is present.
As with NIC Cards, hubs come in different speeds. The most common type today (10/100) is
capable of switching between 10Mbps and 100Mbps depending on the NIC card speed at the other
end. They also have Half/Full duplex capabilities. Full duplex is recommended to increase speed.
Hubs are generally acceptable for networks that do not pass much information.
Switches
A switch is the intelligent cousin of a hub. It performs the same work as a hub, but in a way that
eliminates collisions. Collisions occur when two devices try to communicate at the same time on the
network. Since hubs do not prevent collisions, this becomes an issue when you have a busy network
with several systems.
Hubs have no information about who is where on the network, whereas switches maintain a table of
who sent what on the network. This allows the switch to send the data only between the ports that
are communicating. Combined with Full Duplex communication, collisions are eliminated. As with
the hub, there are lights that indicate the status of each port on the device. Refer to the product’s
manual for an explanation of the operation of the lights.
Since switches are priced very competitively with hubs, switches really are the best choices for
simple networking.
Routers
A router is used to communicate with separate networks that do not share the same subnet. This
topic can get very advanced and is beyond the scope of this manual.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Network Hardware
15
The most common application for a basic router is on a DSL or cable connection to the internet. The
device has simple, built in routing functions to connect you to the rest of the world. Some of
Aldelo’s other applications require knowledge of these devices. This is covered in each application’s
respective manual.
Wireless Access Points
If you use the wireless edition of Aldelo® POS software, you need wireless access points to allow
your wireless devices to connect to the network.
The main wireless protocols in use today are 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11n. You must make sure
that your all of your pieces of wireless equipment are compatible (running the same protocol) so that
they can communicate with each other. The best solution is to purchase devices that support all three
protocols. These devices are widely available and are relatively inexpensive. They may be found at
computer hardware retailers or stores such as Wal-Mart, Staples, Best Buy, Fry’s Electronics, etc.
Assembling Your Network
Once you have installed your cabling and purchased all your hardware components, you can start
connecting them to build your network. This section assumes you have already installed Windows 7
Professional on your terminals with the default configuration.
Since you already planned where you want your terminals, just place the terminals and connect
them with patch cables to the wall jacks you installed previously. Short runs of Cat 5e cable are used
to connect devices to wall jacks or hubs/switches/routers. They can also be built to custom lengths
by a cable installer.
Once the terminals are connected to the network, connect the other ends of the connections to the
hub/switch/router. Place the hub/switch/router in an office or other secure location so that the cables
cannot be accidentally disconnected by employees or through normal restaurant operations.
Maintaining a clean environment around the hub/switch/router helps prevent dust or debris from
causing problems with the device. Also, try to keep the amount of movement of the device to a
minimum. Many times people place the device in a high traffic area, such as on a desk or a
bookshelf, where other objects are coming and going, moving the device around. This could damage
the cable connection to the device. It is good practice to mount the device with screws to prevent
movement.
Starting the Network
When all the devices are connected to the network, turn everything on to begin testing. Most devices
have lights to indicate that the device is connected and operating properly. Once the systems are
running and Windows is fully booted up, configure your systems to participate on the same network.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
16
Network Hardware
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Network Software
17
Chapter 3
Network Software
Configuring Windows for Networking
This manual covers installation in Windows 7 Professional. Aldelo recommends that the operating
system of the POS terminals be upgraded, if necessary, to Windows 7 Professional.
Windows 7 Professional
Windows 7 comes in four versions: Windows 7 Home Premium, Windows 7 Professional, Windows
7 Enterprise, and Windows 7 Ultimate. In a business environment, Windows 7 Professional is
recommended. There are many features in Windows 7 Professional that make setting up a network
and configuring network settings much easier. Windows 7 Home Premium lacks some of the tools
necessary to do a clean installation of Aldelo® POS.
To change the workgroup name:
1. From your desktop, click the “Start” button.
2. Navigate to the “Computer” icon and right click on it.
3. Navigate to and click on the “Properties” option at the bottom of the list.
4. On the left side of the following window, click on “Advanced System Settings.” This
displays the System Properties window.
5. Click on the “Computer Name” tab. This displays the page where your network settings
may be changed.
6. Click the “Change” button. Here you can change the computer name and workgroup name.
If necessary, click the “Workgroup:” radio button to enable the Workgroup field.
7. Change the workgroup name to your desired name. Click the “OK” button when finished.
8. When the system prompts you to restart your computer, accept and allow the system to be
restarted.
To change the computer name:
1. Follow the steps above but change the “Computer Name” field in steps 6 and 7.
To change the IP address in Windows 7 Professional:
1. Click the “Start” button on your computer desktop.
2. Navigate to and click on the “Control Panel” icon in the menu.
3. Click on “Network and Sharing Center.”
4. On the right side of the screen, click on “Local Area Connection.” This displays the Local
Area Connection Status window.
5. Click on the “Properties” button. This displays the Local Area Connection Properties
window.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
18
Network Software
Highlight the “Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)” item. The properties button
becomes active.
7. Click on the “Properties” button. This displays the Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)
Properties window.
8. Click on the “Use the Following IP Address:” radio button. This activates the fields below
the setting, enabling you to edit them.
9. In the IP address field, enter the IP address you wish to use for this system, for example,
127.168.0.1.
10. Press the “Tab” key on the keyboard and the “Subnet Mask” field populates automatically
with the proper subnet mask. This value is usually correct.
11. Click the “OK” button when finished.
6.
Testing Your Network
Now that you have configured the network, you are ready to test to see if the network is operational.
To do so, you use the Ping command in MS-DOS. From your computer desktop, Click the “Start”
button, and then navigate to All Programs > Accessories. From the Accessories menu, select the
“Command Prompt” menu item. When the MS-DOS screen appears, enter “Ping w.x.y.z” where
w.x.y.z is the IP address of another computer that you specified earlier in the setup. For example, if
you want to test the server computer from one of the other POS stations, use “Ping 192.168.0.1”
then press the Return key on the keyboard to issue the command. Wait and see if there are any
replies. In addition, check out the Packet Loss information. This value should be zero to denote that
your network is successfully configured. If your Ping results returned failures, check your cabling
and settings. If the problem persists, consult with a qualified network technician to check out your
problem.
Although the network setup and configuration procedures are quite simple, an experienced computer
technician may be able to help you set up the network faster. Therefore, if you have any doubts as to
the installation of the network, then it may be beneficial to have a qualified technician assist you or
complete the job for you.
In addition, the Windows network installation help information should be referenced during your
network configuration, should you have any questions. Windows 7 Professional also has a Network
Installation Wizard that might be helpful in assisting with the network configuration portion.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
POS Hardware Setup
19
Chapter 4
POS Hardware Setup
Setting Up the Terminal
With All-In-One terminals, the setup should be very straightforward. Terminal manufacturers
usually install everything for you before they ship the product. This includes the touch screen
drivers, MSR drivers, customer display drivers, etc. If you need assistance with installing drivers for
the terminal, the manufacturer should be able to assist with the installation.
If you use a touch screen separate from the computer, you must install the touch screen drivers. For
instructions on how to do this, refer to the touch screen manufacturer’s documentation.
Setting Up the POS Printers
Before you can print receipts from Aldelo® POS, you must set up the printers in the Windows
Printer Folder. As with most other Windows based programs, Aldelo® POS communicates with the
Windows Print Spooler for management of the print jobs. This allows a print job to be redirected to
another available printer if the selected printer is out of paper or cannot print for any reason. When
this happens, you receive a message indicating that the selected printer is unavailable, allowing you
to print to different a printer.
You must setup each of the printers that you wish to access from this current computer station. This
includes a network printer resource or a locally attached printer. Follow the steps below to add your
printer to the Windows Printer Folder.
Windows 7 Professional
1. Click the “Start” button on your computer desktop.
2. Navigate to and click on “Control Panel.”
3. Navigate to and click on “Devices and Printers.” This displays the window where all of
your installed printers and other devices are listed.
4. Click on “Add Printer” near the top of the window. This displays the Add Printer Wizard.
5. Follow the wizard to install the printer. Local Printers are physically attached to the station.
Network printers are printers attached to the network through a computer that is on the
network. Have the correct driver from the manufacturer available in case the wizard
prompts you for it.
6. Near the completion of the wizard, you are prompted to print a test page. Be sure to print
the test page to make sure that you have successfully installed the printer.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
20
POS Hardware Setup
Tech Tip: If you absolutely cannot get the drivers from the printer manufacturer,
you can use the Generic Text Printer Drivers in Windows as a temporary
replacement, but it is recommended that the correct drivers be installed as soon as
possible. The functionality of your computer should be the same, although there
is no guarantee that the printer will function as it would with the proper driver
installed.
Sharing Printers in Windows 7 Professional
1. Click on the “Start” button on the Windows desktop.
2. Navigate to and click on “Control Panel.”
3. Navigate to and click on “Devices and Printers.” This displays the window where all of
your installed printers and other devices are listed.
4. Right click on the printer you wish to share. This displays a menu of options.
5. Click on “Printer Properties” in the middle of the menu. This displays the properties of the
selected printer.
6. Click on the “Sharing” tab. This displays the page where you can change the sharing
settings as well as install additional drivers for other operating systems that use this printer
over the network.
7. Select the “Share this Printer” checkbox. This enables the Share Name field where you
may enter an identifying name for the printer.
8. Change the share name to something meaningful such as “Kitchen1” or “Bar1.”
9. Click the “Apply” button.
10. Click the “OK” button.
Testing the POS Printers
Once you have installed all your printers in Windows 7 Professional, test to make sure that all
computers can print to all printers attached to the network. Remember that each system in the
network must have all the printers installed in its Printers folder. For example, if you have three
systems, each with a printer attached, make sure those three printers show up in each of the three
systems’ Printers folders; one for the local printer connected directly to the machine and two that are
installed as network printers.
To test the printers on all the stations:
1. In Windows 7 Professional, navigate to the Printers folder.
2. Right click on the printer you wish to test. This displays a menu with a set of options.
3. Click on “Printer Properties” in the middle of the menu. This displays the properties of the
selected printer.
4. Select the “General” tab.
5. Click on the “Print Test Page” button. This sends a print job to the printer with which you
are currently working.
6. Repeat steps 2 thru 5 for each printer. Make sure each of the test pages prints correctly.
If you cannot print a test page, contact the printer manufacturer for assistance.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
POS Hardware Setup
21
Setting Up the Cash Drawer
Printer Driven
Most cash drawers are connected to the printer by a four-wire cable resembling a phone cable. Make
sure you have the correct cable for the drawer and that the drawer is compatible with the printer you
connect to it. Call the manufacturer of the cash drawer if you are not sure. If the cable is
permanently connected to the cash drawer, connect the other end of the cable to the cash drawer port
of the printer. The cash drawer port is easily identified by the shape of the port.
Once you have the drawer connected to the printer, there should be instructions on how to open the
cash drawer through a DOS command. If you do not have these instructions, contact the
manufacturer.
Serial
If you have a serial cash drawer, the setup is similar to that of other serial devices. The cash drawer
has a power cable and a serial cable to connect to the computer. Make sure to turn off your system
before installing any serial device.
1. Connect the serial cable to the cash drawer and the computer.
2. Connect the power cable to the cash drawer.
3. Turn on the computer.
4. Once the system is up and running, you should be able to open a DOS command box and
issue commands to open the drawer. Refer to the manufacturer’s documentation for
instructions.
Setting Up the Customer Pole Display
Installing customer pole displays is similar to installing serial cash drawers. A power cable and a
serial cable connect the customer pole display to the computer. Once connected, run some tests
through DOS to ensure the device is working properly. One setting to make note of is the command
set in use. The default command set for Aldelo® POS is the UTC command set.
If your customer pole display does not support this command set, make sure you have all the
commands for the command set that the customer pole display supports. With this information, it is
possible to configure Aldelo® POS to use an alternate command set.
Tech Tip: Some customer pole displays only allow you to install them on
powered COM ports (some COM ports are powered and some are non-powered).
Check with the manufacturer to see if this may apply to your customer pole
display.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
22
POS Hardware Setup
Setting Up the MICR Device
Keyboard Interface
To install the MICR (Magnetic Ink Character Recognition) device on the keyboard interface, the
MICR device comes with a “Y” splitter that allows you to connect the keyboard and MICR device
to the keyboard port at the same time. If you do not want to install a keyboard at the station, you
may need to install a keyboard terminator. This device connects to a keyboard interface and
simulates the presence of a keyboard. Certain MICR devices that do not have a keyboard or a
keyboard terminator installed do not work. Please contact your hardware vendor for additional
information about the hardware configuration.
USB Interface
Some MICR devices that use a USB interface work with Aldelo® POS. Check with your hardware
vendor for setup instructions.
Setting Up the MSR Device
Keyboard Interface
To install a keyboard interface MSR (Magnetic Stripe Reader) device, follow the same steps as
described in the MICR device setup, above. Connect the splitter to the computer or terminal,
connect the MSR device to the splitter, and connect either a keyboard or keyboard terminator to the
splitter (if necessary). To test it, open Notepad in Windows and swipe a card through the MSR
device. If you see data written in Notepad, the device is working properly.
Serial Interface
To install a serial interface MSR device, follow the same general steps as with any other serial
device.
1. Turn off the system.
2. Connect the serial cable from the MSR device to a COM port on the computer or terminal.
3. Make sure that the device’s power cord is plugged in.
4. Start the computer or terminal.
To test the device, install the drivers that came with the MSR device. Refer to the manufacturer for
instructions on how to test the device in Windows.
USB Interface
Some MSR devices that use a USB interface work with Aldelo® POS. Check with your hardware
vendor for setup instructions.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
POS Hardware Setup
23
Setting Up the Barcode Reader
Currently, the keyboard interface barcode scanner is supported by Aldelo® POS. To install this
device, follow the same instructions as those for many other keyboard interface devices. Install a
splitter cable and then connect the barcode scanner as well as the keyboard or keyboard terminator
to the splitter.
Setting Up the Weight Scale
Installation
To install the serial interface weight scale, follow the same general steps as with any other serial
device.
1. Turn off the system.
2. Connect the serial cable from the Weight scale to a COM port on the computer or terminal.
3. Make sure that the scale’s power cord is plugged in.
4. Start the computer or terminal.
5. Open Aldelo® POS and navigate to Back Office > Station Settings > Port Settings.
6. Select the Weight Scale COM Port (the port number to which you connected the scale) and
the Weight Scale Type from the corresponding drop-down lists.
7. The settings under the “Advanced” button next to the Weight Scale COM Port drop-down
list should not need adjustment unless the scale fails to operate properly. If you find that
these settings do need adjustment, contact the scale manufacturer for information on how to
adjust these settings.
In the United States of America, the scale must be installed by a technician certified by the National
Council of Weights and Measures (NCWM) and then it must pass a certification test by the local
weights and measures authority before the scale may be used. In locations outside of the United
States, it is the responsibility of the software user to comply with any applicable national, regional,
or local weights and measures laws before the scale is used. The scales certified for this integration
are the Avery Berkel NCI model 6720 and the Avery Berkel NCI model 6712.
Once the scale integration has been setup, manual entry of the weight of an item into Aldelo® POS
is no longer possible. All weighed items must be entered by use of the scale exclusively.
In the United States, the order entry terminal must have a customer-facing display that shows the
weight and the name of the weighed item. The weight displayed must be exclusive of the tare
weight for the packaging. The scale itself must have two displays; one that faces the customer and
one that faces the operator. Each of these displays must show the weight in decimal form (e.g.
“12.36”). The units in which the weight is measured are not required to be displayed.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
24
POS Hardware Setup
Registry Settings
There are several registry settings pertaining to the weight scale. The Registry Settings screen may
be reached in Aldelo® POS by navigating to Back Office > Station Settings > Other Options >
Extra Settings. Double-click on the setting or highlight the setting and then click on the “Edit”
button at the bottom of the screen to change any of these registry settings.
Weight Scale Decimals
Enter the number of decimal places you wish to capture from your weight scale. This is the same as
the capacity of the scale. For example, if your scale reads in pounds and it can display two decimal
places (e.g. 1.57 pounds), enter “2” for this setting. If your scale can display up to three decimal
places (e.g. 1.574 pounds), enter “3.” Please note that entering a value greater than the capacity of
your scale does not make the value in Aldelo® POS more accurate: the limit of accuracy cannot
exceed that of the scale. Conversely, entering a value that is less than the capacity of the scale
causes the values to be rounded to the nearest decimal to the left. This could be illegal in some
jurisdictions, as when the value is rounded up, the customer is paying for a small amount of product
not received. For this setting, always enter the same number as the decimal capacity of the weight
scale.
Weight Scale Display Max Len
This setting is where you enter the scale display capacity value. The default value is five, meaning
that there is a maximum of two digits for the whole portion of the number, two digits for the
decimal portion of the number, and a decimal point (e.g. 25.20 or 10.00) If the weighed item
exceeds this capacity, then the system returns an error and the item is not ordered. Check the
documentation for your weight scale and enter its maximum display length in this field.
Weight Scale Hardware Refresh Interval
Enter the number of milliseconds that you wish to allow to elapse between the times that the weight
scale updates its current weight reading. For example, if you enter ‘25’ in this setting, then every 25
milliseconds, the scale updates its current reading. The industry standard for this setting is ‘25.’
Weight Scale Integrated
Set the key value of the Weight Scale Integrated registry setting to “YES.” This turns on weight
scale integration. If the Weight Scale Integrated registry key is not enabled and the Weight Scale
Unit Name (see below) is not set, then weight scale integration does not function.
Weight Scale Query Interval
Enter the number of milliseconds that you wish to allow to elapse between the times that Aldelo®
POS queries the weight scale for its current weight reading. For example, if you enter ‘75’ in this
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
POS Hardware Setup
25
setting, then every 75 milliseconds, the software checks the weight scale for its current reading. The
industry standard for this setting is ‘75.’
Weight Scale Unit Name
In this setting, enter the abbreviation for the units of weight that the weight scale uses (lb, oz, or kg).
The entry of the abbreviation must be in lower case letters. This information is tracked for each
weighed item that is ordered.
Weight Size [1-5] Items
Up to five different tare weights may be entered in the registry settings. For each different tare
weight you must enter the menu items that use that particular tare weight in the Weight Size [1-5]
Items settings.
For example, if you run a deli and you sell meats and cheeses by the pound, you slice the product
and place it on a sheet of wax paper before putting it on the scale. The weight of one sheet of wax
paper may be 0.03 pounds, which you previously setup as Weight Size 1 Tare in your registry
settings. For each and every item that you sell in this manner, enter its Menu Item ID number in the
Weight Size [1-5] Items registry setting for that particular tare weight. The Menu Item ID number of
each item may be found by navigating to Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items.
Select a Menu group from the list on the left side of the screen, and then select the weighed menu
item from the grid on the right. The menu Item ID appears at the top of the Menu Item Editor
screen.
Enter the Menu Item ID for each, separating each item number by a comma. For example, if all of
your meat and cheese items that are sold in the above manner are numbered 11- 15, then you enter
“11, 12, 13, 14, 15” (excluding the quotation marks) in the respective Weight Size [1-5] Items
registry setting.
If you also sell potato salad in plastic containers with lids, repeat the above process, but this time
enter the weight of the container and lid in the Weight Size [1-5] Tare setting. In the corresponding
Weight Size [1-5] Items setting, enter all of the Menu Item ID numbers of the items sold in that
same container.
The tare information for each item that is sold by weight must be accessible to the operator at all
times. This may be setup by navigating to Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items and
selecting a menu item that is sold by weight from the Menu Items window. This reveals the Menu
Item Editor. Next, select the Page 2 tab and, in a freehand manner, add the tare information to the
large “Menu Item Description” field. Repeat the procedure for each item that is sold by weight.
When finished, click the “Save” and “Done” buttons on the Menu Item Editor screen, and then exit
the Menu Items screen.
Now whenever the operator is in the order entry window, the tare information for any item that is
sold by weight is accessible by clicking on the “Details” button at the bottom of the screen, and then
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
26
POS Hardware Setup
selecting the menu item from the order entry screen. The large “Menu Item Description” field that
displays contains the tare information that was entered previously.
Weight Size [1-5] Tare
You can enter up to five different values for tare weights in Aldelo® POS. Tare weight is the weight
of the packaging material of the weighed product. Most jurisdictions require that the weight of this
packaging be deducted from the weight of the product before the calculation of the price, thereby
assuring that the customer is only paying for the weight of the product, not the additional packaging.
In this setting, enter the weight of the packaging for the weighed item. For example, if you run a deli
and you sell meats and cheeses by the pound, enter the weight of one sheet of the wax paper on
which you place the item before putting it on the scale. If you also put the product in a bag before
placing it on the scale, include the weight of one bag. The value in this setting must be the total
weight of all packaging material in which the product is wrapped before it is weighed. This value is
deducted from the value sent to Aldelo® POS from the scale. This value must be entered in the same
units as you sell the product. For example, if you sell by the pound, enter the weight, in
pounds, of the packaging material (e.g. 0.03 pound of packaging material). If the scale sends a value
of 1.57 pounds to Aldelo® POS, the customer is only charged for 1.54 pounds. If you
sometimes sell larger amounts of product in multiple containers, you must setup a tare weight for
each of these options.
Setting Up the Coin Changer
Currently the USB version of the coin changer is supported. If you are using Aldelo® POS, just plug
the coin changer into any available USB port on the computer or terminal. There is also a power
plug that must be attached to the coin changer.
Setting Up Caller ID
Modem
Many modems have integrated Caller ID functions. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions on how
to install the modem. Internal modems require a card to be installed inside the computer and
external modems require an open serial port. USB modems have not been tested with Aldelo® POS
and should not be used unless they can map to a COM port on the computer and work in
HyperTerminal mode.
Multi-Line Caller ID Device
If you need more than one line for incoming calls, install a multi-line Caller ID box. Aldelo® POS
supports many models. Follow the instructions below to install these devices.
1. Turn off the computer or terminal.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
POS Hardware Setup
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect the serial cable to the Caller ID device and to any COM port on the computer.
Connect the power cable to the device and turn on the device.
Connect any phone lines that you want to monitor. Label the lines for reference.
Turn on the computer.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
27
28
POS Hardware Setup
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
29
Part 2
Software Installation and
Configuration
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
30
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
31
Chapter 5
Software Setup
Installing Aldelo® POS
Once you have your network and hardware setup, install the Aldelo® POS software. Make sure you
have your CD handy and are able to install using a CD-ROM drive on each system; or you can
transfer the files from the CD onto a USB drive to take with you to each system in the event that the
systems do not have a CD-ROM drive.
1. If you are using the CD method of installation, place the CD into the CD-ROM drive. If
necessary, select the “Run default.htm” option when prompted by your system. The
installation screen launches automatically.
2. Under the Aldelo For Restaurants Suite of Products section, select “Click Here to Install,”
and then follow the on-screen instructions.
3. When the License Agreement screen appears, read the End User Licensing Agreement
(EULA) carefully. By accepting the terms of the agreement, you create a legal agreement
between you and Aldelo, LP. If you agree with the terms, click the “I Accept the Terms in
the License Agreement” radio button and then click the “Next” button to continue (if you
do not accept the terms of the agreement, you cannot install the software).
4. Following the License Agreement screen, the Customer Information screen displays. Enter
your user name and organization name in the appropriate fields. and then click the “Next”
button to continue.
5. When the Setup Type screen displays, select the “Typical” setup type and then click the
“Next” button to continue.
6. Continue following the on-screen instructions through the completion of the installation.
7. Congratulations! You have successfully installed Aldelo® POS.
Adjusting Windows
Proper Screen Resolution
To operate Aldelo® POS software efficiently, we strongly recommend that you change your
Windows display settings to the suggestions mentioned below. You can still use Aldelo® POS with
a different display configuration, but use the suggested settings below for best results.
In order for all of the screen components in Aldelo® POS to fit properly, you must change the screen
resolution to 800 x 600 pixels. To do this:
1. Right-click your mouse anywhere on the desktop (where there isn’t an icon) and then, with
the left mouse button, select “Screen Resolution.”
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
32
Software Setup
2.
3.
Click the “Down Arrow” button on the right side of the dropdown list of the Resolution
field and change the Screen Resolution to 800 x 600 pixels.
Click the “Apply” button.
16 Bit Color Palette or Better
Although not required, we recommend that you set your color depth to 16 bit or higher for better
graphics display on your computer. To do this:
1. Right-click your mouse anywhere on the desktop (where there isn’t an icon) and then, with
the left mouse button, select “Screen Resolution.”
2. Click on “Advanced Settings.”
3. Select the “Monitor” tab.
4. Click the “Down Arrow” button on the right side of the dropdown list of the Colors field
and change the color depth to 16 bit or higher.
5. Click the “Apply” button.
Small Font 96 DPI
You should also change the computer’s font size to Normal Size 96 DPI (dots per inch). To do this:
1. Right-click anywhere on the desktop and select “Screen Resolution.”
2. Click on “Make Text and Other Items Larger or Smaller.”
3. On the left side of the screen, click on “Set Custom Text Size (DPI).”
4. With your mouse, position the cursor over the center of the ruler control and hold down the
left mouse button. Drag the ruler to the left or right until the text below it indicates that the
setting will display 96 pixels per inch.
5. Click the “OK” button.
6. Click the “Apply” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
33
Setting the Windows Taskbar to Auto Hide
For the best display, set your Windows Taskbar to Auto-hide. This prevents users from launching
other programs while using Aldelo® POS. By doing this, the taskbar is hidden whenever the cursor
is NOT on the taskbar. Keep in mind that if the user has access to a mouse, he can still open
Windows. To do this:
1. Right-click on the Windows Taskbar, then select “Properties.”
2. Select the “Auto-hide the taskbar” checkbox.
3. Click the “Apply” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
34
Software Setup
Multiple Languages
Supported Languages and Special Multilingual Capabilities
When using Microsoft Windows 7 Professional, Aldelo® POS has multilingual features that can be
configured with ease.
Aldelo® POS software currently supports the English, Spanish, and Chinese languages for the screen
interfaces, both in the POS and Back Office sections. However, you can still translate the software
yourself. Aldelo supplies a utility to assist you in translating the software to whatever language you
desire. This is the Localization Manager Utility. It installed with Aldelo® POS. The use of this
utility is discussed later in this manual.
In addition to supporting multiple languages, Aldelo® POS can specify primary and secondary menu
item and modifier names. You can use the English equivalent of the menu or modifier name in the
primary language field, and another language equivalent in the secondary language field.
A setting in system options (explained in later chapters) allows the guest receipt and screen output
to show the primary language names while the kitchen receipt print out receives the secondary
language (e.g. Spanish). Kitchen staff and wait staff speaking different languages is no longer a
barrier, as the POS software allows the wait staff to enter the order in one language, while the
kitchen staff receives the order in another language (of course, you must program the menu first for
it to work).
Another feature of the multilingual system, “Follow-Me,” displays the screen interface in your
preferred language, as specified in your employee settings (explained in later chapters). The entire
screen interface language changes to accommodate your preference.
Additionally, “Follow-Me” lets you define your menu and modifier name viewing options so that
the employee can view both the menu items and modifiers in either the primary or secondary
language. This way, when you have English as the primary language field of the menu items and
another language as the secondary language field, an employee who has specified to view menu
items in the secondary language sees all the menu items or modifiers displayed in the secondary
language. Remember, if you use a language other than English, Spanish, or Chinese, you must use
the Localization Manager Utility to translate the software. The secondary language field mentioned
above can be used with any language, but any other part of the software will be in English, Spanish,
or Chinese. “Follow-Me” technology enables employees of different ethnicities to work together
and use the system with the language of their choice. If you use Windows 7 Professional, you have
native Chinese support without the need for translation software. For help in setting this up, please
refer to the Windows help system.
Language Settings in Windows 7 Professional
Some languages require that the language symbols or characters be entered into the software.
Windows 7 Professional has native support for Asian languages when symbols are needed. These
settings may require changing to view the software in the language of your choice.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
35
Software Setup
Spanish ALT Codes
To enter Spanish characters, use the codes provided by Windows. Simply hold down the ALT key
on the keyboard, type the number listed, and then release the ALT key.
Á
É
Í
Ó
Ú
Ñ
Ü
Uppercase
ALT+0193
ALT+0201
ALT+0205
ALT+0211
ALT+0218
ALT+0209
ALT+0220
á
é
í
ó
ú
ñ
ü
Lowercase
ALT+0225
ALT+0233
ALT+0237
ALT+0243
ALT+0250
ALT+0241
ALT+0252
¿
¡
«
»
€
Punctuation
ALT+0191
ALT+0161
ALT+0171 (Left
Angle Quote)
ALT+0187 (Right
Angle Quote)
ALT+0128
Adding a New Font to Windows 7 Professional
To display in a language other than what is listed in Windows, or if you have trouble displaying
your language, try installing a font that supports your language. Search the internet for a font that
best suits your needs. There are hundreds of different fonts to choose from. Once you find an
acceptable font, install it in Windows under “Fonts” in the Windows Control Panel.
Sharing the Database Folder
In order for all stations to connect to the database, you need to share the folder where the database is
located.
Sharing in Windows 7 Professional
To share a folder in Windows 7 Professional, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are
the administrator on the machine.
1. From your desktop, open the Network and Sharing Center by clicking the “Start” button,
clicking “Control Panel,” clicking “Network and Internet,” and then clicking “Network and
Sharing Center.”
2. On the left side of the screen, click on “Change Advanced Sharing Settings.”
3. Click the “Down Arrow” button to expand the Home or Work option.
4. If network discovery is off, select the “Turn On Network Discovery” radio button and then
click the “Save Changes” button at the bottom of the screen. If you are prompted for an
administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide the confirmation.
5.
If file and printer sharing is off, select the “Turn On File and Printer Sharing” radio button
and then click the “Save changes” button at the bottom of the screen. If you are prompted
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
36
Software Setup
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
for an administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide the
confirmation.
If Public folder sharing is off, select the “Turn On Sharing So Anyone with Network
Access Can Read and Write Files in the Public Folders” radio button and then click the
“Save Changes” button at the bottom of the screen. If you are prompted for an
administrator password or confirmation, type the password or provide the confirmation.
Next, open Windows Explorer and navigate to the C:\ ProgramData \ Aldelo \ Aldelo For
Restaurants \ Databases directory. Within this directory, right-click the Live folder and
then select Properties from the displayed menu.
On the Live Properties window, select the Sharing Tab.
Click the “Advanced Sharing…” button to display the Advanced Sharing window.
Select the Share this Folder checkbox.
Click the “Permissions” button.
Select the group or user name for which you wish to setup sharing and then select the
“Allow” checkbox to the right of the Full Control permission.
Click “Apply.”
Click “OK.”
Return to the Live Properties window and click the Security Tab. This shows the folder
security permissions. These are different from share permissions, and must also be set. In
the Group or User Names list, select “Everyone.”
Click the “Edit” button.
For the “Everyone” group, set the permissions under Allow to “Full Control.”
Click on “Apply” and “OK.”
Selecting a Database
Go to the Back Office and under the File menu, select “Data Source…” Three options appear. The
first is “Start with the Demo Database.” Select this choice if you would like to start using the preprogrammed demonstration database. It is a good idea to check this box if you are not yet familiar
with configuring or using Aldelo® POS. Do not use the demo database to build your menu. This
database is for demonstration purposes only and is removed when the software is uninstalled.
The second option is to “Create a New Blank Database.” Select this choice if you want to begin
creating your own database, specific to your restaurant. When you select this option, you are
prompted to enter the name of your restaurant. This is also used as the name of the folder and
database file kept on your computer. Remember what you use for the name, as it may be needed in
the future for troubleshooting purposes. Do not build your database on top of the demo database; if
you do and you uninstall your application, your database is deleted.
The last choice is “I Will Select My Own Database.” Select this choice if you have already created a
database and you wish to link to it.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
37
Another option on this screen is “Always Connect To This Database.” Click this box if the database
you wish to select is the database you want to use every time you start Aldelo® POS. Check this box
unless you are just using a database temporarily.
If the software cannot find the database defined in the registry, it asks if you want to clear the
registry so that you can select the database manually.
To manually edit the database location in the registry, follow the instructions below.
1. Click the “Start” button on the Windows desktop. In the Search programs and files textbox,
type “regedit” and then press the “Enter” key on your keyboard.
2. This displays the Registry Editor screen. Navigate to HKEY_CURRENT_USER >
Software > VB and VBA Program Settings > Aldelo For Restaurants > Version 3.
3. In the list on the right side of the screen, find the registry key named “Data Source” and
double-click on the name.
4. In the Edit String window, change the path to the actual location of the database file and
click the “OK” button.
5. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the registry key named “Forced Data Source.”
Creating a Database
When you start the software for the first time, you may want to play with the demo database. Once
you have a good feel for how to use the software, start creating your own database. Do not use the
demo database as a starting point. If you want to use items from the demo database, export them and
import them into your new database. Please note that demo databases are deleted when the
software is uninstalled or re-installed.
To create a new database, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the database
selection screen. This screen has three options: “Start with the Demo Database,” “Create a New
Blank Database,” and “I Will Select My Own Database.”
1. Select “Create a New Blank Database” and then click the large button on the right side of
the screen with the green check mark on it.
2. In the textbox of the following window, enter your restaurant name as the name of your
new database.
a. Enter only the database name. Do not enter the .mdb extension.
3. Click the “OK” button and enter the rest of the information as requested.
4. Once complete, you see the Store Settings and the Station Settings. Do not set anything yet.
Click “Done” to skip past these pages.
5.
6.
7.
8.
In the Back Office, click on the Setup menu.
Navigate to and click on “Employee Setup.”
Navigate to and click on “Employee Files…”
Create an Employee File for yourself and make sure to fill in and remember your access
code. Give yourself a security level of five to ensure you can navigate throughout the
system without restrictions.
This database is created in the directory: C:\ ProgramData \ Aldelo \ Aldelo For Restaurants \
Databases \ Live \ [database name as folder name] \ [database name].mdb.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
38
Software Setup
Connecting to a Database over the Network
When your database is ready for other machines to connect to it, make sure you have already setup
the sharing permissions discussed earlier. This covers connecting to the database over the network
in Windows 7 Professional.
To connect to a database on another computer, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
completed the folder sharing successfully and have tested to make sure you have access to the
database.
On a client machine, go to the Back Office of Aldelo® POS.
Click on “Data Source.” This displays the warning about switching data Sources.
Click on the “Yes” button after reading the warning. The Database Selection screen
displays.
4. Click on “I Will Select My Own Database.”
5. Click on “Always Connect To This Database.”
6. Click on the large button on the right side of the screen with the green check mark on it to
display the Open File dialog box.
7. In the left column, click on the small arrow to the left of the “Network” node of the
directory tree to display the names of the computers that are in your network.
8. Click on the name of the computer on which the database is stored.
9. Double-click the “Databases” folder. This displays a list of folders in this shared folder
(this assumes you have followed the naming convention recommended in the folder sharing
section of this manual).
10. Double-click on the “Live” folder.
11. Double-click on the folder that has your database name as the folder name.
12. Double-click on the file with the database name.
1.
2.
3.
This starts the process of setting this system up on the database. You are prompted with the Station
Settings screen. Click “Done” to skip this and come back to it later. Check to make sure that the
selected database is correct and that all of the displayed information is correct.
Information Data Entry
This section covers data entry and must be completed before using the software for the first time.
This data consists of information unique to your restaurant such as your table groups, menu items,
employee information, etc. The easiest way to complete this section is to follow along in the
software and fill in each field after reading the explanation. If you need to find a screen in the
software while you are following along, directions to the screen being explained are provided in the
format of Screen 1 > Screen 2 > Screen 3 > Screen 4. After completing the entry of the
information in this section, complete the Store Settings, Security Settings, and Station Settings
(accessible under the Setup menu item), and also the Advanced Settings found in the Appendix of
this manual.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
39
General Settings
Postal Codes
Description: The purpose of this screen is to enter and maintain all the postal codes that your
restaurant services.
Screen location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Postal Codes
City:
Enter the city associated with this postal code.
State (Province):
Enter the state or province associated with this postal code.
Postal Code:
Enter the postal code associated with the city and state (or province)
entered above.
Delivery Charge:
Enter the delivery charge to be applied when this postal code is used.
Delivery
Compensation:
Enter the driver compensation for delivering to this postal code.
Delivery Streets
Description: The purpose of this screen is to enter and maintain the streets to which your restaurant
delivers (or does not deliver).
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Delivery Streets
Street Name:
Enter the name of the street.
Address From:
Enter the first address on this street to which delivery is offered.
Address To:
Enter the last address on this street to which delivery is offered.
Map Code:
Enter a map code for the street that you are defining (the code is user-created).
The map code defines a map location. For example, street maps usually have
codes on them defining the vertical and horizontal coordinates on the map,
such as B3 or D2. Enter these codes into the software for each street, so that
when the user calls up an address, the map code displays, allowing him or her
to find it quickly on the map.
Delivery Charge: Enter the charge for deliveries made to this street.
Delivery
Compensation:
Enter the driver compensation for deliveries made to this street.
Postal Code:
Enter the postal code for this street.
No Delivery:
Select this option when you do not wish to offer delivery to this street.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
40
Software Setup
Cash Trays
Description: The purpose of this screen is to create and maintain the cash trays (drawers) for your
restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Cash Trays
Cash Tray ID:
The ID number assigned to this cash tray by the software.
Cash Tray
Name:
This field allows you to name your cash trays (for example, AM Bar for the Bar
working the morning shift). This name does not appear when selecting the cash
tray in the Main POS screen.
Hide Cash
Tray:
This option hides the cash tray from users in the Main POS screen.
Surcharges
Description: The purpose of this screen is to create and maintain the surcharges applicable in your
restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Surcharges
Surcharge ID:
The ID number the software assigns the Surcharge.
Surcharge Name:
Assign a name to this surcharge. This may be any name you wish.
Surcharge Amount:
Enter the amount of the surcharge. This number can be a dollar amount
or percentage.
Amount Basis:
Select a type for this surcharge. The type can be currency (a dollar
amount) or percentage.
Waiver Min. Check:
Specify the minimum ticket dollar amount required to waive the
surcharge.
Surcharge Description:
Enter a description for the surcharge.
Hide Surcharge:
This option hides the surcharge when it is no longer in use.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
41
Discounts
Description: The purpose of this screen is to create and maintain the discounts used in your
restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Discounts
Discount ID:
Discount Name:
Discount
Amount:
Amount Basis:
Discount Expire
Date:
Min Ticket For
Discount:
Discount Group
Definition:
Hide Discount:
Exclude Bar
Drinks:
Discount
Barcode:
Menu Item To
Discount:
The ID the software assigns this discount.
Assign a name to this discount. This may be any name you wish.
Enter the amount of the discount (a dollar amount or percentage).
Select the basis on which this discount is used. This can be Percent, Currency,
or Maximum Amount Charged. Maximum Amount Charged only works with
individual menu items, not the entire order.
This field allows you to specify a date on which this discount expires.
Specify the minimum ticket amount before this discount may be applied.
This feature is used for discounting grouped menu items. To enable this
feature you must have created this discount using the Maximum Amount
Charged amount basis. For example, if you have a hamburger, fries, and a
Coke, you can discount the group as a whole. To set this up you must first
assign a Menu Group Number to each item in your menu (this is on page two
of the menu item editor). Assign a 1 to all hamburgers, a 2 to all fries, and a 3
to all your drinks. Now return to the Discount that was setup and find the
three dots under this field. Click on the three dots to bring up three
consecutive keypads. On the first, define the group number of the item in this
Discount Group. The next is the number of items that are allowed when
applying this discount. The last is the maximum amount that the discount
allows on this item before adding additional charges. Repeat this for every
menu item for which this Discount is used.
This option hides this discount if it is no longer in use.
This option prevents discounts on menu items marked as bar drinks.
Enter a barcode number for this discount. If you have already created the
barcode for the discount, simply place the cursor in this field and scan the
barcode.
This option allows you to define which menu item the discount is applied to
when the discount is scanned using the barcode feature. For example, if you
have 9 items on a ticket and you scan the discount for cheese pizza, it
searches for the cheese pizza on the ticket and discounts every instance of that
item. This saves time when you have specials on certain items.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
42
Software Setup
Bank Card Files
Description: This dialog box lets you create and maintain a list of bankcard files that you may
associate with the bad checks you receive during operation of your restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Bank Card Files
Bank Name:
Phone Number:
Verify Funds By Phone:
Hide Bank Card File:
Enter the bank name.
Enter the phone number for the bank.
This option is reserved for future use.
This option hides this bank card file when it is no longer in use.
Bad Check Reasons
Description: This dialog box allows you to create and maintain a list of bad check reasons for
association with the bad checks you receive during the operation of your restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Bad Check Reasons
Enter the reason that the check received from the customer was bad.
This option hides this bad check reason when it is no longer in use.
Bad Check Reason:
Hide Reason:
Bad Check Penalties
Description: This dialog window allows you to create and maintain a list of bad check penalties
that you may associate with the bad checks you receive during the operation of your restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Bad Check Penalties
Bad Check Penalties:
Penalty Amount:
Hide Penalty:
Enter a name for the bad check penalty.
Enter the amount charged for this penalty.
This option hides the penalty when it is no longer in use.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
43
Custom Printer Types
Description: This feature allows you to define your own custom printer types if they are not
supported in the software. This gives you the capability of supporting any POS receipt printer, as
long as you can find the Escape Control Codes for it. Refer to your printer’s user manual for the
Escape Control Codes and convert them into Aldelo’s coding method (see below).
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Custom Printer Type
Based on This Printer:
Choose the type of printer upon which this custom printer is based.
Printer Type Name:
Bold Font Code:
Non-Bold Font Code:
Large Font Code:
Small Font Code:
Red Font Code:
Enter a name for this printer. This name may be anything you wish.
Enter your printer’s code for bold font.
Enter your printer’s code for the font that is not bold.
Enter your printer’s code for large font.
Enter your printer’s code for small font.
Enter your printer’s code for red font.
Non-Red Font Code:
Cash Drawer Code:
Enter your printer’s code for the font that is not red.
Enter your printer’s code for opening the Printer Driven Cash Drawer
(if supported).
Enter your printer’s code for Line Feed.
Enter your printer’s code for automatic cutting of the paper when the
printer is finished printing (if supported).
Enter your printer’s code for the buzzer that activates when the printer
is finished printing (if supported).
Enter the maximum number of small font characters that can print per
line.
Enter the maximum number of large font characters that can print per
line.
Line Feed Code:
Auto Cut Code:
Buzzer Code:
Small Font Columns:
Large Font Columns:
How To Convert Control Codes
The fields in the custom printer types are coded in a different method than the actual codes you find
in your printer’s user manual. Convert your control codes to the software’s method of coding.
Below is an explanation of how to convert these codes.
The fields in the Custom Printer Types are coded in decimal values. If your printer control code for
line feed is LF, which is 10 in decimal value, format it to three digits, and then precede it with an
upper-case C character. For example, LF is actually entered in the Line Feed field as C010. The
same applies to printer control codes that have multiple word combinations, such as ESC p. Simply
figure out the converted code for ESC, then figure out the converted code for p, and put them
together in the appropriate field. This converts to C027C112.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
44
Software Setup
Code Conversion Chart
Below is a chart that makes converting the codes easier.
Character
HEXADECIMAL DECIMAL
Character
HEXADECIMAL DECIMAL
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
SP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
45
Software Setup
(continued)
Character
HEXADECIMAL DECIMAL
Character
HEXADECIMAL DECIMAL
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
_
`
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
~
del
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
096
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
46
Software Setup
Tax Table Setup
Setup Tax [1, 2, or 3] Tax Table
Description: The purpose of this screen is to allow the creation of tax tables to be used where your
taxing authority requires the calculation of sales tax by using the tax table method rather than the
percentage method. The taxable amount of the check is determined by the software and the tax
associated with the range within which the taxable amount falls is automatically added to the check.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > General Settings > Setup Tax [1, 2, or 3] Tax Table
Add Bracket:
Delete Last Bracket:
Export Tax Table:
Import Tax Table:
Delete Tax Table:
Click this button to enter a new tax bracket. In the first window, enter
the beginning amount of the tax bracket. In the second window, enter
the ending amount of the tax bracket. In the third window, enter the
tax associated with this new tax bracket. Click the “” button on
each window after entering the proper values. The new bracket
appears in the large text field on the left side of the screen.
Click this button to remove the last tax bracket entered. Only the last
bracket entered may be removed. To remove additional brackets in
this manner, they must be removed in reverse order.
Click this button to export a copy of your tax table to your local
machine. The file is automatically created and stored in the C: >
Program Data > Aldelo > Aldelo POS > Export folder. From there
it may be copied to removable media to be imported on another
computer.
To import a tax table, insert the removable media containing the
desired tax table into the target computer, click the “Import Tax
Table” button, and then navigate to the location of the file on the
removable media. Click the “Open” button on the Select Tax Table
Export File window to complete the import.
Click this button to delete the entire tax table at once. This feature
should be used with caution.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
47
Table Setup
Dine In Table Groups
Description: The purpose of this screen is to create and maintain the sections or table groups of
your restaurant. Up to 10 groups may be added. If a group is not added, it does not show up on the
table selection screen. This step must be completed before any tables may be created.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Table Setup > Dine In Table Groups
Table Group No. [1-10]:
Add:
Edit:
Delete:
In this field, enter a name for this table group.
Adds a table group if one has not already been specified for this
number.
Edits a table group that has already been created.
Deletes a table group that has already been created. You cannot delete
a table group that has tables assigned to it. Assign these tables to
another group before deleting the target table group.
Table Group Editor
Description: The purpose of this screen is to edit a table group you have already created.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Table Setup > Dine In Table Groups > Edit
This field specifies the name of the table group.
Table Group
Name:
Group 1 Name:
Group 1 Percent:
Group 2 Name:
Group 2 Percent:
This field specifies the name of the first tip sharing group, for example
“Hostess.”
This field specifies the percent of tips shared with this group.
This field specifies the name of the second tip sharing group, for example
“Bus Person.”
This field specifies the percent of tips shared with this group.
Tech Tip: In order to see the Table Group Tip Sharing fields, enable the option
in Back Office > Store Settings > Other Tab > Enable Table Group Tip
Sharing.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
48
Software Setup
Dine In Tables
Description: The purpose of this screen is to create, edit, assign, and arrange tables in each of the
table groups defined.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Table Setup > Dine In Tables
Assign Table:
Table Groups:
Assign Table
[Name], [Job Title]:
Clear Table:
Table Grid
Buttons:
This drop-down list specifies the employee to whom you wish to assign
tables. If no tables are assigned to this employee, no green or red tables
display on the screen. Green means the table is assigned to this person; red
means the table is assigned to someone else and is not available for
assignment.
This drop-down list specifies the current table group on which you are
working. The list is generated from the table groups already defined.
This button assigns tables that have been selected. Tables must be selected
before clicking this button.
This button clears all table assignments.
These buttons represent tables that can be created or tables that have been
created. Tables that have been created have a name associated with them.
New tables are blank.
Tech Tip: To move tables around quickly, right click, drag, and drop the table
into a new position.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
49
Dine In Table Editor
Description: The purpose of this screen is to create and edit specific properties of a table.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Table Setup > Dine In Tables > (Select Table from
Grid)
Dine In Table Name:
This field specifies the table name.
Total Seats (12 Max For
Visual Seating):
This field specifies the number of people that can sit at this table.
Reservations cannot be made for more people than this number
specifies.
Average Table Usage
Minutes:
This field specifies the average number of minutes a table is usually
occupied. This is used when creating reservations.
Picture:
This field specifies the location of the optional picture file of the table.
Smoking Section:
This checkbox indicates that smoking is allowed at this table.
Near Windows:
This checkbox indicates that this table is near a window.
Booth Seating:
This checkbox indicates that this table is a booth.
Private Seating:
This checkbox indicates that this table is in a private seating area.
Hibachi Table:
This checkbox indicates that this table is a Japanese-style hibachi
table.
Hibachi Table Style:
This drop-down list specifies which direction the hibachi table faces.
This drop-down list specifies how many people can sit on each side of
Hibachi Left, Top,
Bottom, Right Side Seats: this hibachi table.
Hibachi Can Bridge To:
This field specifies which table(s) can be connected to this hibachi
table.
Hibachi Bridge Seats:
This drop-down list specifies how many seats are created as a result of
bridging this hibachi table.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
50
Software Setup
Employee Setup
Job Titles
Description: This screen lets you define your restaurant’s job titles. Be sure to create as many job
titles as necessary, since you are assigning them to your employees.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Job Titles
Job Title:
Default
Security Level:
Default Pay
Basis:
Default Pay
Rate:
Default
Receive Tips:
Hide Job Title:
Enter a Job Title name, for example, “Manager.”
The system assigns this default security level when a new employee is created
with this job title. This may be changed later in the employee’s file, if necessary.
The system assigns this default pay basis when a new employee is created with
this job title. This may be changed later in the employee’s file, if necessary.
The system assigns this default pay rate when a new employee is created with
this job title. This may be changed later in the employee’s file, if necessary.
This option assigns tips to this job title by default. This may be changed later in
the employee’s file, if necessary.
This option hides this job title when it is no longer in use.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
51
Employee Files > General Tab
Description: This tab allows you to enter general information about an employee.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > General
First Name:
Middle Initial:
Last Name:
Tax Account #:
Area Code + Phone#:
Enter the first name of your employee.
Enter the middle initial of your employee.
Enter the last name of your employee.
Enter the employee’s identification number used for tax purposes.
Enter the area code and phone number of your employee.
Mailing Address:
Postal Code:
Job Title:
Enter the mailing address of your employee (street address only).
Enter the mailing postal code of your employee.
Select a job title for this employee. If you have not created job titles
previously, click the icon to the right of the drop-down menu.
Enter the access code this employee uses to identify himself to the system.
This cannot be changed if the employee has an open staff bank. If using
MSR cards for system access, employees should not have access to this
number.
Assign a security level to this employee. A typical setup is:
1: Cooks, Janitors, Dishwashers (those who do not use system often).
2: Hostesses (use system but do not enter orders or handle money).
3: Wait Staff (take orders and exchange money with customers).
4: Managers, Senior Wait Staff, and Cashiers.
5: Owners and General Managers.
Swipe an MSR card and have the card associated with this employee. To
use magnetic cards, put the cursor in the MSR Card field and swipe the
card through the card reader. This sets up the scan code for the employee.
Select the language this employee prefers when working with the system.
This option allows you to enable a secondary language. When enabled,
the user sees the secondary language in the menu item editor’s secondary
language field, and any other secondary language fields in the software.
Select this checkbox if this employee is a driver for delivery orders.
This setting allows this employee to use a cash drawer instead of the
standard operations for Staff Bank. This feature relies on two other
features to work. The registry setting “Staff Cash Drawer Use Serial Port”
must be enabled and the Cash Drawer installed on the correct serial port.
When this employee starts his staff bank, he is asked to select use a Cash
Drawer or use Staff Bank. Select “Cash Drawer” to use the local serial
driven cash drawer.
This drop-down list specifies the employee’s holiday rate of pay.
This option allows the user to enter a percentage amount of the
employee’s gratuities to be withheld to offset all of or a portion of the
employer’s bank charges.
This button allows quick access to the employee schedules screen.
Access Code:
Security Level:
MSR Card:
Preferred Language:
Order Entry Sec.
Lang:
Employee is Driver:
Staff Bank Use Staff
Cash Drawer:
Holiday Pay Scale:
Bank Surcharge
Percent:
Work Schedules:
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
52
Software Setup
Employee Files > Payroll Tab
Description: This tab allows you to set a host of options related to payroll, as well as other
functions of the software.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > Payroll
Hired Date:
Terminated Date:
Pay Basis:
Pay Rate:
Tips Received:
Use Staff Bank:
Use Hostess Features:
Schedule Not
Enforced:
Is a Server:
Cannot Finalize
Cashier Out:
Allow Create/Reply
Emails:
Disallow Create/Edit
Dine In Orders:
Disallow Create/Edit
Bar Tab Orders:
Disallow Create/Edit
Take Out Orders:
Disallow Create/Edit
Drive Thru Orders:
Disallow Create/Edit
Delivery Orders:
Hide Employee:
Enter the employee hire date in the MM/DD/YYYY format.
Enter the date employee was terminated or released from employment (if
applicable).
Choose the pay basis for this employee. If you choose salaried, the
employee’s schedule is not automatically enforced.
Enter the rate of pay the employee receives, based on the pay basis.
This option enables the pop-up window to ask the employee how much
he/she earned in tips upon clock out. This information is recorded in the
Server Gratuity Report.
This option enables this employee to use Staff Bank as the means of
taking and settling orders. If enabled, this employee ALWAYS pays to
their staff bank when settling their orders. Use this option if your
employees carry money collected from customers until the end of their
shifts.
This option enables this employee to assign tables, assign tabs, perform
reservations, add customers to a waiting list, and use paging features. It
also enables the “Hostess” button in the table selection screen.
This option disables the prompt for the manager’s access code when
clocking in and the employee is not on the schedule.
This option includes this employee as a server in the reports section and
in the lists that the hostess uses to assign tables.
This option disallows the employee from finalizing a cashier out
operation. It disables the “Done” button in the cashier’s money count
screen.
This option allows this employee to participate in using the internal
Aldelo® POS e-mail system.
This option disallows the employee from creating or editing Dine In
Orders.
This option disallows the employee from creating or editing Bar Tab
Orders.
This option disallows the employee from creating or editing Take Out
Orders.
This option disallows the employee from creating or editing Drive Thru
Orders.
This option disallows the employee from creating or editing Delivery
Orders.
This option hides the employee from the system.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
53
Employee Files > Driver Tab
Description: This tab allows you to enter information about the employee that pertains to his or her
ability to make deliveries.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > Driver
Driver License
Number:
Driver License
Expires:
Car Insurance
Carrier:
Insurance Policy
No:
Insurance Policy
Expires:
Insurance Policy
Notes:
Clock Button:
Enter the employee’s driver license number.
Enter the date that the employee’s driver license expires.
Enter the name of the employee’s car insurance company.
Enter the policy number the insurance company has provided to the driver for
coverage.
Enter the date that the employee’s car insurance policy expires.
Enter any notes you may want to record for this insurance policy. Below this
option is a time stamp icon that enters the date and time the note was recorded.
This button time-stamps an entry in the Notes field.
Employee Files > Notes Tab
Description: This tab allows the manager to enter additional miscellaneous information that is not
already tracked by Aldelo® POS. Enter this information in a freehand manner.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > Driver
Employee Notes:
Clock Button:
Printer Button:
Enter any notes about this employee that you may want to keep on record.
This button time-stamps an entry in the Notes field.
This prints the contents of the Employee Notes field to the report printer.
The time stamp icon enters the date and time the note was recorded.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
54
Software Setup
Employee Schedules
Description: This screen allows you to create employee work schedules. You may create schedules
for as many weeks as necessary.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Schedules
This filters employees
by job title.
This is the current list
of employees.
This shows This copies an
hidden
already created
employees. schedule to this
employee
schedule.
This includes
this day in the
next “Add”
operation
performed.
You can add or This deletes the currently
edit weeks here. selected workweek.
This edits the
currently
selected
schedule time
for this day.
This shows the total number of
hours of each type when creating
the schedule. This is updated as
soon as the hours are adjusted, to
give a live representation of the
employee’s schedule.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
55
Menu Setup
Menu Categories
Description: Menu categories are used for reporting purposes only. They have nothing to do with
the visual display of the menu in the Order Entry screen. Assign each menu item to a specific menu
category, which is shown when you create a sales report to find out how much of each menu
category has been sold. For example, if you put all of your Beer and Wine in a category called
Beverages, then a Sales By Category Report shows the summary total of the Beverages category
sales information.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Categories
Enter a name for this category.
Menu Category:
This option hides this menu category when it is no longer in use.
Hide Menu Category:
Pizza Builder Setup > Sizes Tab
Description: This screen allows you to define the pizza sizes your restaurant offers.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Sizes
Available Pizza Sizes: This option automatically checks the selected sizes when you create
toppings and pizzas in the toppings and pizza screens.
This field defines the name the kitchen sees when the chit prints. If this
Output Name:
field is left blank, the normal pizza size name is used.
Secondary Language: This field defines the secondary language name of the pizza size.
Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts Tab
Description: This screen allows you to define the pizza crusts that you offer. You may Add and
Edit crusts from this screen. Click “Add” or “Edit,” or double-click on the item you wish to edit.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts
Add: This button allows you to add a new crust type.
Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts Tab > Add
Description: This screen allows you to enter the information for a new crust type.
Edit:
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup >
Crusts > Add
Enter the crust name.
Pizza Crust:
Enter the secondary language name of this crust.
Secondary
Language:
Enter any additional charge for this crust (this field may be left
Crust Price:
blank).
Select a crust from the list and then click the “Edit” button to display the Menu Modifiers
screen with this item selected. You may edit the crust from here.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
56
Software Setup
Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings Tab
Description: This screen allows you to define the pizza toppings offered by your restaurant. Click
“Add” or “Edit,” or double-click on the item you wish to edit.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings
Add:
This button allows you to add a new topping.
Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings Tab > Add
Description: This screen allows you to enter the information to use for a new topping.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup >
Topping > Add
Enter the name of the topping.
Pizza Topping:
Enter the secondary language name of the topping.
Secondary
Language:
This option automatically creates toppings of the selected sizes
Sizes:
when you click “OK.”
Enter the price of the topping for the selected size.
Topping Price:
Edit:
Select a topping from the list and then click the “Edit” button to display the Menu Modifiers
screen with this item selected. You may edit the topping from here.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
57
Pizza Builder Setup > Pizzas Tab
Description: This screen displays the pizzas that your restaurant offers. Click “Add” or “Edit,” or
double click on the item you wish to edit.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup > Pizzas
Add:
This button adds a new pizza menu item.
Pizza Builder Setup > Pizzas Tab > Add
Description: This screen allows you to enter the information for a new pizza type.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup >
Pizzas > Add
Enter the name of the pizza.
Pizza Name:
Enter the secondary language name of this pizza.
Secondary
Language:
From the dropdown list, select the Menu Category to which
Menu
these pizzas belongs.
Category:
From the dropdown list, select the Menu Group to which these
Menu Group:
pizzas belong.
This option automatically creates pizzas of the selected sizes
Sizes:
when you click “OK.”
This field defines the name the kitchen sees when the chit prints.
Output Name:
If this field is left blank, the normal pizza size name is used.
This field defines the secondary language name for this pizza.
Secondary
Language:
Enter the price of the pizza for this size.
Pizza Price:
Edit:
Menu
Items:
Select a pizza from the list and then click the “Edit” button to display the Menu Item
Editor screen with this item selected. You may edit the pizza from here.
This button displays the Menu Item Editor so that you may edit any menu item in the
system. This is a shortcut to this screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
58
Software Setup
Modifier Builder Template Setup
Description: This screen is used to create templates of modifiers to assign to menu items. Unlimited
templates may be created with custom categories and modifiers for each template.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Modifier Builder Setup
This is the name of the
This creates a new
template. You can create template and allows a
as many templates as
name to be entered.
needed.
This saves the new
template once you
enter a name.
This creates a new
template based on
the currently
selected template.
These categories
organize your modifiers
into groups.
This is a modifier in
the currently selected
category.
This deletes the
currently selected
template.
Click this button to edit
the category.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
59
Edit Category
Description: This screen is used to create templates of modifiers to assign to menu items. Unlimited
templates may be created with custom categories and modifiers for each template.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Modifier Builder Setup > Template
Name
Button Icon
This specifies the name of the category.
This specifies the default modifier type when
this category is selected.
This specifies the minimum number of
selections that must be made from this category
before the user is allowed to select another
category.
This specifies the maximum number of
modifiers that the customer may select from
this category.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
60
Software Setup
Modifier Builder Editor
Description: This screen allows you to edit the modifier you selected on the template while editing
the template.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Modifier Builder Template Setup >
Template > Modifier
This is the name of the template to which this modifier is currently assigned.
Template
Name:
This is the category to which this modifier is currently assigned.
Type Name:
This field specifies the name of the modifier.
Modifier
Name:
This field specifies the additional cost of the base modifier. The base modifier is
Additional
the normal modifier without No, Add, Extra, Light, etc.
Cost:
Excluded from This option defines whether this modifier is included in the template or not. If
not, only the No, Add, Extra, etc. version of the modifier is shown. This option is
Builder:
used when the base modifier does not make sense to include in the template.
This option automatically selects this modifier when the category to which it is
Selected As
assigned is selected.
Default:
These options specify which types of the base modifier are shown when the
No, Add,
template is displayed on the order entry screen.
Extra, Light,
etc:
These fields specify the additional cost of the corresponding type. This additional
Additional
cost overrides the additional cost of the base modifier.
Cost:
Select this button to hide this modifier.
Hide:
Select this button to delete this modifier.
Delete:
This button edits the corresponding modifier recipe.
Edit Icon:
This drop-down list selects a hidden modifier and fills in the details of that
Select Hidden
modifier. The drop-down list only displays if you have hidden modifiers.
Entry:
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
Menu Groups
Description: This screen allows you to arrange your menu groups.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Groups
These are the menu groups available in your
restaurant. Click on a menu group to edit it.
This displays the schedule for the menu
groups.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
61
62
Software Setup
Menu Group Editor
Description: This screen allows you to edit menu groups.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Groups > [Any Menu Group]
Group Name:
Sec. Language:
Picture:
Enter a name for this menu group.
Enter the secondary language name for this menu group.
Select the picture file to be used with this menu group.
Show Caption:
Not Available For Dine
In Orders:
Not Available For Bar
Tab Orders:
Not Available For Take
Out Orders:
Not Available For Drive
Thru Orders:
Not Available For
Delivery Orders:
Default Group For Dine
In Orders:
Default Group For Bar
Tab Orders:
Default Group For Other
Orders:
When enabled, this option displays the group name.
This option determines if this menu group is available for Dine In
orders.
This option determines if this menu group is available for Bar Tab
orders.
This option determines if this menu group is available for Take Out
orders.
This option determines if this menu group is available for Drive Thru
orders.
This option determines if this menu group is available for Delivery
orders.
This option determines if this menu group is the default group when
taking Dine In orders.
This option determines if this menu group is the default group when
taking Bar Tab orders.
This option determines if this menu group is the default group when
taking Take Out, Drive Thru, and Delivery orders.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
63
Software Setup
Menu Group Schedule
Description: This screen is used to create menu group schedules. The groups are shown in the order
entry screen according to the schedule defined. If no schedule is defined for the day, the menu group
shows in the order entry screen by default.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Groups > Menu Group Schedule
This is the current list of menu
groups.
This shows hidden
menu groups.
This adds a schedule to this day
of the week.
This drop-down list
copies a schedule to the
schedule currently
being worked on.
This Deletes the currently
selected schedule for this
day.
This includes this
day in the next
“Add” operation you
perform.
This edits the
currently selected
schedule time for
this day.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
64
Software Setup
Menu Group Schedule Editor
Description: This screen allows you to edit the schedule for this menu group.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Groups > Menu Group
Schedule > [Add or Edit for any day while the group is selected]
Avail From Time: Enter the start time when this menu group shows in the order entry screen.
Enter the end time when this menu group is no longer available.
Avail To Time:
Menu Items
Description: This screen allows you to edit the menu items that are available in your restaurant.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items
This specifies the group you wish to view.
Menu items that may be
edited.
Quick button to the
menu groups screen.
Quick button to the
Pizza Builder Setup
screen.
Quick button to the
Menu Item Auto Prices
screen.
Quick button to the
Menu Recipe Editor
screen.
Quick button to the
Forced Modifiers
editor screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
65
Menu Item Editor
Description: This screen allows you to edit the menu item selected in the menu items page.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items > [Any Menu Group] >
[Any Menu Item]
This field holds the number the database has assigned to the menu item.
Menu Item ID:
This copies the attributes of another menu item. This saves time when you
Item Has Same
have several items that have the same properties.
Attribute As:
Enter the full name for this menu item. The maximum number of characters in
Menu Item Full
this field is 22.
Name:
Enter a name for this menu item in the secondary language which is the
Secondary
Language Name: equivalent of the Menu Item Full Name (above).
Select the category to which this menu item is assigned for reporting purposes.
Menu Category:
Use the icon to the right of the dropdown list to create or edit a menu category
while in this screen.
Select the picture to be used with this menu item. These should be files with
Button Picture
the file extension of .bmp and should be no more than 42 x 42 Pixels with a
Name:
caption and 51 x 103 without a caption. These values can vary, so test the
picture before using it in your final menu.
Select this checkbox to display the text on the button in the Order Entry screen
Show Caption:
when a picture is used.
Select a picture to use when the “Details” button is used in the Order Entry
Large Picture
screen.
Name:
This option allows you to make this item a Top Level Item. Then you can
This is a Top
create Sub-Level Items below this Top Level Item. For example, if your
Level Item:
restaurant offers several types of soda, create a Top Level Menu Item called
“Soda.” Under this Top Level Item, create the different brand names for each
of the sodas you offer. A Top Level Menu Item may also be referred to as the
second tier in the menu structure.
Jump To Group: This field allows you to select the menu group you want this Top Level Menu
Item to Jump To when the button is pressed in the Order Entry screen. This is
very useful if you want one button in the order entry screen to take you to
another menu group without backtracking. Think of this as creating a
Hyperlink in your Order Entry screen.
This option allows you to select the color for this button.
Pick Color:
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
66
Software Setup
Menu Item Editor > Page 1
Description: This screen allows you to edit the menu item selected in the menu items page.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items > [Any Menu Group] >
[Any Menu Item] > Page 1
Default Item
Price:
Enter a default price for the menu item. To make this item open priced, enter
1234.56. A dialog box displays, allowing you to enter the price for this menu
item when it is ordered. This is useful for items ordered infrequently.
Dine In Item
Price – Delivery
Item Price:
Enter prices for the individual order types. The price defined is the price
charged to the customer. If using Auto Pricing, the Auto Price overrides the
price used here.
Send To Printer
At:
This drop-down menu allows you to select which printer to send this item to
when the Settle, Cash Tender, or Done buttons are pressed in Order Entry.
Show Modifier
Type:
This drop-down menu allows you to select the default modifier type that is
shown when the Modifier button is selected in the Order Entry screen.
Barcode:
Enter the barcode assigned to this menu item. This may be alphanumeric input
or you may place the cursor in this field and scan the barcode to enter it.
Menu Item is
Available:
This option makes the menu item button selectable in the Order Entry screen.
If unchecked, the button is still visible but does not activate when pressed.
Show Pizza
Builder Screen:
This option determines if the Pizza Builder Screen displays when this item is
selected in Order Entry. When this option is enabled, a dialog box appears
asking you to select a size.
Print Pizza
Label:
This option enables the printing of a pizza label to attach to the pizza box when
this menu item is ordered.
Tax 1-3 Will
Apply:
This option applies Tax 1, 2, and/or 3 to this item.
Off Premise Tax
Free:
Select this option if tax is not required to be applied to items that are purchased
and removal from the premises (i.e., take-out).
Menu Item Can
Be Discounted:
This option allows you to specify if this item may be discounted.
This is a Bar
Drink Item:
This option indicates that this item is a Bar Drink Item.
Order Item By
Weight:
Select this option to sell this menu item by weight. When using this option, a
dialog box appears, allowing you to specify a weight when the item is ordered.
If a scale is used, the weight appears in the dialog box.
Kitchen Sort
Number:
Enter a number to use to determine the sort order of the menu items on the
kitchen chit. For example, all Appetizers have the number 1, all Salads have
the number 2, etc. Use this with the Sort Kitchen Items Automatically On
Kitchen Receipt option in Store Settings > Print > Kitchen/Bar.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
67
Sub Level Item Details:


Item Short Name: If this item is a Sub Level Item, you can specify an item short name.
This name is displayed in the Order Entry screen and may be the same as another item
short name. Sub Level Items are created when a menu item is created below a Top Level
Item.
Sec Lang: This field allows you to enter the secondary language equivalent of the Menu
Short Name.
Menu Item Editor > Page 2
Description: This screen allows you to edit the menu item selected in the menu items page.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items > [Any Menu Group] >
[Any Menu Item] > Page 2
Menu Item Description:
Enter a detailed description for this menu item.
Print Item To Additional
Printers:
Choose additional printers to send this menu item to when the
item is printed in the kitchen or bar.
Special Pizza Topping Charges: This option allows you to choose whether to charge for the first
specified number of toppings. For example, to not charge for the
first 4 toppings, enter “4” in the text field and select “No
Charge.”
Item Delivery Charge:
Enter the amount to charge if this item is ordered for Delivery.
Item Delivery Comp:
Enter the driver’s compensation when delivering this item.
Discount Group #:
This field allows the user to assign a menu item to a specific
Discount Group. For example, all hamburgers are assigned to
group # 1, all fries are assigned to group # 2, all soft drinks are
assigned to group # 3, etc.
Maximum Price:
This sets a maximum price for the menu item. The price may
increase up to this maximum when adding extra-cost modifiers to
the item.
Min. Recipe Profit %:
This specifies the minimum profit percentage to make on this
item.
Lot Max Qty (Wings or Bagels
Bucket):
Enter the maximum quantity of child items that comprise the
parent item.
Lot Child (Wings or Bagels
Selection Option):
Check this box if this is a child item of a parent item.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
68
Software Setup
Menu Item Editor > Page 2 (Continued)
Show Qty Input Dialog in Table
Service Screen:
Max Qty Input Per Item:
Tag Along Menu Item:
Drink Enforcement Qualifier:
Use Modifier Builder Template:
Menu Item Type:
Check to display the Quantity Input Dialog screen when a child
item is selected from the menu item entry screen. This allows the
user to choose how many of this child item to use in building the
parent item.
Enter the maximum quantity that may be ordered per each order.
Enter the Menu Item ID of the tag along menu item that is
ordered along with the selected menu item.
Qualifies the menu item as a drink when using Enforce Drink Per
Guest feature.
Choose the Modifier Builder Template (created previously in the
Modifier Builder Template Setup) to use for this menu item. This
must be selected to enable the Modifier Builder Template
feature. To create or edit one, click the icon to the right of the
dropdown menu.
This drop-down list specifies if this menu item is prepared food,
a soft drink, or bakery pastry. This only applies for Canada and is
rarely used. Refer to Store Settings > Other for more details on
this feature.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
69
Software Setup
Menu Item Auto Prices
Description: The purpose of this dialog box is to let you specify your menu item’s automatic price
adjustment based upon the day of the week and the time of day.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Item Auto Prices
This filters the menu
items list by group.
This shows the menu
items currently
available.
This adds a new price
schedule for this day.
This deletes the
currently selected
price schedule.
This shows hidden
menu items.
This drop-down
copies a schedule to
the schedule currently
being worked on.
This includes this day
in the next “Add”
operation you
perform.
This edits the
currently selected
schedule for this
day.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
70
Software Setup
Menu Item Price Editor
Description: This screen allows you to edit the menu item selected in the menu items page.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items Auto Prices > Add or Edit
Price Start Time:
This field specifies the time of day that this price schedule starts.
Price End Time:
This field specifies the time of day that this price schedule ends.
Price Note:
This field specifies any notes about this price schedule.
Item Price:
This field specifies the price to charge for this item during the scheduled time.
Menu Modifiers
Description: This screen lets you specify your menu modifiers. Modifiers are adjustments to the
main menu item, and therefore they cannot be setup to track inventory depletion by sales events.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Modifiers
Search Field:
This field automatically searches as you enter a modifier name.
Menu Modifier List:
This is the list of current modifiers.
Show All:
Select this checkbox to display any hidden menu modifiers.
Menu Modifier:
This field allows you to enter a name for this modifier.
Secondary Language:
Enter the secondary language equivalent of the name in the Menu
Modifier field (above).
Additional Cost:
Enter the additional cost when this modifier is selected.
Picture:
Select a picture for use with this modifier button (42 x 42 pixels).
Show Button Caption:
Select this option to display the caption on a button that uses a picture.
Hide Modifier:
This option allows you to hide the modifier when it is no longer in use.
Pizza Crust:
This option allows you to specify if this modifier is a pizza crust.
Pizza Topping:
This option allows you to specify if this modifier is a pizza topping.
When selected, the modifier appears in the Pizza Builder screen. When
you select a Pizza Topping, you are prompted to assign it to a pizza size.
To skip the assignment of the modifier to a specific size, click “Cancel.”
Bar Mixer:
This option specifies that this modifier is a bar mixer.
Bar Drink:
This option specifies that this modifier is a bar drink.
Select Modifier
Recipe:
This is a shortcut button to the Modifier Recipe Selector screen where
you select which recipe is assigned to this modifier. This automatically
selects the modifier currently being edited when you enter this screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
71
Tech Tip: Use these naming conventions to add these modifiers to a specific type.
1) The Add modifier group: ‘+’, ‘Add’, ‘With’ (i.e. + Salt, Add Cheese, With
Pepper)
2) The Extra modifier group: ‘Extra’, ‘More’, ‘Heavy’ (i.e., Extra Lemon,
More Sauce, Heavy Chili)
3) The No modifier group: ‘-‘, (i.e. – Chicken, No Beef)
4) The Light modifier group: ‘Light’, ‘Lite’, ‘Little’, ‘Easy’ (i.e. Light Sauce,
Little Pepper, Easy Salt)
5) The Exchange modifier group: ‘Exchange’, ‘Trade’, ‘Switch’, ‘Subs’, ‘To’,
‘->’
6) The Half modifier group: ‘= = =’ (i.e. = = = 1 st Half = = =)
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
72
Software Setup
Forced Modifier Editor
Description: The purpose of this screen is to allow maintenance of forced modifier links. Forced
modifiers are used to prompt your servers when they order an item that has choices that must be
selected. For example, it is customary to select the meat preparation style and the side dishes with a
steak dinner.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Forced Modifiers
This filters the This is the list of
menu items by menu items
group.
currently available.
This shows the
hidden menu
items.
This shows the current list of
modifiers for this level popup.
This dropdown list copies an
existing modifier to the modifier
setup currently being worked on.
This edits the list of
modifiers that show on
this level popup.
This includes this in the This deletes the list
next “Add” operation
of modifiers for
you perform.
this level popup.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
73
Forced Modifiers Editor
Description: This screen allows the editing of the forced modifiers that popup for this level.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Menu Setup > Forced Modifiers > [Any Menu Item] >
Edit
This filters the menu modifiers
as you type the name of the
modifier you wish to edit.
This is the list of menu This shows the current list of modifiers
modifiers currently
for this level popup.
available.
This dropdown list filters the
modifiers by type.
This button takes you
to the menu modifier
screen where you can
create a new modifier.
This is a shortcut button to the Modifier
Recipe Selector screen where you select
which recipe to assign to this modifier.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
74
Software Setup
Inventory Setup
Inventory Groups
Description: This screen allows you to maintain your list of inventory groups for grouping your
inventory items into a logical order. You assign inventory items to the inventory groups so that you
may review your inventory items in a better and more understandable way.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory Groups
Inventory Group Name:
Enter a name for this inventory group.
Hide Inventory Group:
Select this checkbox to hide the inventory group if it is no longer in
use.
Inventory Locations
Description: This screen allows you to maintain your list of inventory locations for grouping your
inventory items into logical areas.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory Locations
Inventory Location Name: Enter a name for this inventory location.
Sort Order:
This field allows you to assign a sort order number. This determines
the order in which the inventory locations display in a list. Leaving
wide gaps in the numbering sequence allows for new items to be
inserted in the future without the necessity to renumber everything.
Hide Location:
Select this checkbox to hide this inventory location if it is no longer
in use.
Inventory Vendors
Description: : This screen allows you to maintain your list of inventory vendors. Inventory vendors
are linked to the inventory items to show the preferred vendor for each particular item.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory Vendors
Inventory Vendor Name:
Enter a name for this Inventory Vendor.
Hide Inventory Vendor:
Select this checkbox to hide this inventory vendor if it is no longer in
use.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
75
Inventory Items
Description: This screen allows you to maintain your list of inventory items that the restaurant uses.
The items defined in this dialog window are used in the menu recipe definition. The following is an
explanation of each of the fields of this important screen in detail.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory Items
Inventory Item Name:
This field specifies the name of the inventory item.
Item Secondary Language:
This field specifies the secondary language name of the inventory
item.
Pack Size Description:
Enter the total pack-size in descriptive words for this inventory
item. For example, if you have an inventory item called “CocaCola,” the pack-size may be “24/12 oz. cans.” The Pack Size
Description is used for descriptive purposes and is not used in the
calculation of inventory quantities.
Pack Size Barcode:
Enter the pack-size quantity barcode, either from the box’s UPC or
from your own barcode data. Place the cursor in this field and use
the scanner to scan the barcode into the field.
Each Item Barcode:
Enter a barcode for each individual item in the pack-size. For
example, each can of Coca-Cola in a case also has a barcode that is
needed to calculate the inventory totals.
Total Items Per Pack Size:
If you have specified the Each Item Barcode, specify the total items
per pack-size in this field. You are telling the computer how many
individually packed items there are per each pack-size description.
For example, in the case of 24 cans, the Total Items Per Pack Size
should be “24” since there are 24 cans in a case.
Recipe Units/Pack Size:
This field allows you to specify how much each of the pack-size
quantity yields for the menu item recipe. For example, if the packsize quantity is a case of beef weighing 60 lbs. and your recipes call
for 8 ounces, enter “120” to signify that there are 120 recipe units
per pack-size (60 pounds x 16 ounces per pound ÷ 8 ounces per
serving = 120 recipe units per pack size).
Inventory Group:
This dropdown list allows you to select the inventory item’s group.
Inventory Location:
This dropdown list allows you to select the inventory item’s
location.
Inventory Vendor:
This dropdown list allows you to select the inventory item’s
vendor.
Sort Order:
Enter an arbitrary number by which the inventory items shall be
sorted in ascending numerical order. Leaving wide gaps in the
numbering sequence allows for new items to be inserted in the
future without the necessity to renumber everything.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
76
Software Setup
Inventory Items (Continued)
Pack Size Re-Order
Point
Enter the number of Pack Size units at which point when the inventory
level of that item falls to or below that number, the system automatically
places the item on the Shopping List for reorder.
Enter the number of Pack Size units to re-order automatically when the
Pack Size
Replenishment Level: inventory level reaches or falls below the Pack Size Re-Order Point value.
Inventory
Description:
Enter a description for this inventory item. This may be anything you wish.
This field is optional.
Pack Size Qty On
Hand:
This field is normally populated automatically when you use the inventory
features of Aldelo® POS and you enter the information from a purchase
order.
Pack Size Cost Per
Qty:
This field is normally populated automatically when you use the inventory
features of Aldelo® POS and you enter the information from a purchase
order.
Total Pack Size
Value:
This field displays the monetary value of the inventory item on hand by
multiplying the Pack Size Qty On Hand value (above) by the Pack Size
Cost Per Qty value (above). This field is calculated automatically and is not
editable by the user.
Inventory Last
Updated:
This field displays the most recent date that the inventory was last updated.
Hide Inventory Item:
Select this checkbox to hide this inventory item if it is no longer in use.
Tech Tip: The most important field to pay attention to is the recipe units per packsize field. The recipe units per pack-size is used to calculate how many units this
inventory item produces when being used in creating menu items. For example, if
you have a package of cheese and there are 24 slices of cheese in the package,
there are 24 recipe units in this package, since you use the cheese by the slice. If
you buy the packages of cheese in cases and there are 12 packages of cheese in the
case, enter 288 recipe units per pack-size. For things like liquids or ground beef
that have more than one method of measurement, choose the least common
denominator when picking how to calculate the recipe units. For example, if you
receive your ground beef in 10 lb. cases and you need to enter the recipe units per
pack-size, think about how you would measure the ground beef when cooking the
food. Most restaurants use ounces when weighing ground beef, so convert 10 lbs.
to 160 oz. and enter that number in the recipe units per pack-size field. Use similar
conversions for liquids: if you receive liquor in 750 ml bottles but you serve
ounces, how many ounces are in the bottle? (25.35) This is the number you enter
into the Recipe Units/Pack Size field.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
77
Software Setup
Menu Recipe Editor
Description: The purpose of this dialog box is to let you configure your menu item recipe so that
your estimated inventory usage may be reviewed according to the sales activities.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Menu Recipe Editor
This dropdown list
filters the menu items
by group.
These are the
This field specifies the
menu items
inventory item you wish
currently available. to add to this recipe.
This field specifies the
number of units of this
inventory item to add
to this recipe.
This is the recipe for
the currently selected
menu item.
This is the
information about
the recipe cost of
the menu item.
This button updates the
Current Retail to match
the Minimum Retail.
This button saves this
recipe for the currently
selected menu item.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
78
Software Setup
Menu Recipe Editor (cont.)
Description: The purpose of this dialog box is to let you configure your menu item recipe so that
your estimated inventory usage may be reviewed according to the sales activities.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Menu Recipe Editor
This button adds the inventory item and the units used to the recipe.
This button takes you to the Global Replace Inventory Items screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Software Setup
79
Menu Recipe Editor (cont.)
Description: The purpose of this screen is to replace your recipe inventory items that you no longer
use with new items that are now in use. Replacing the item here replaces it everywhere it is used in
Aldelo® POS.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Menu Recipe Editor > Global
Replace Inventory Items
This is the inventory item to search for.
This is the inventory item you use to replace the previous inventory item.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
80
Software Setup
Menu Recipe Editor (Modifiers)
Description: The purpose of this screen is to let you configure your menu modifier recipe so that
your estimated inventory usage may be reviewed according to the sales activities. To get to this
screen you must open the dropdown the list in the top left corner of the screen and select “Modifier
Recipes.”
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Menu Recipe Editor
This field specifies the
inventory item used in this
modifier recipe.
This button changes
the name of the
modifier recipe.
This field specifies the number
of inventory item units used in
this modifier recipe.
This takes you to
the Global Replace
Inventory Items
screen.
This adds the inventory item
and the units used to the
modifier recipe.
This button creates a new modifier recipe. A new
recipe should be created for every modifier you have.
To avoid conflicts with other menu items in the
system, you should create names such as
“Mod:Oil/Vinegar.”
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
81
Software Setup
Modifier Recipe Selector
Description: The purpose of this screen is to assign a recipe to a modifier.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Modifier Recipe Selector
This field searches for the
modifier as you type.
This list displays the modifiers that
are currently available.
This window contains all the modifier recipes
currently available.
This field searches for
the modifier recipe as
you type.
This edits the recipe currently selected in
the window below the button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
82
Software Setup
Inventory UOM
Description: The purpose of this screen is to keep track of all the Units of Measure you use in your
inventory.
Screen Location: Back Office > Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory UOM
UOM Name:
Enter the Unit of Measure name.
Recipe Units: This field specifies the actual units in this unit of measure. For example, there are
16 ounces (Recipe Units) in a Pound (UOM Name).
Hide UOM:
Select this checkbox to hide this UOM if it is no longer in use.
Tech Tip: The values on this screen are not used in any calculations. They are
created only for reference purposes.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
83
Part 3
Software Operation
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
84
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Opening Procedures
85
Chapter 6
Opening Procedures
Note: The procedures described in Part 3 of this manual assume that the setup has been completed
as required for your restaurant. See Chapter 5 – Software Setup, on page 31 of this manual for
details.
Time Cards
Before starting your day, you may want to check a few things about your employment. You may
also want to clock in, start your staff bank, and perhaps have a pager assigned to you. This section
covers many of the things you do when you first come to work.
Clocking In
The first thing to do before anything else is clock in. If you are a salaried employee, you may be
able to clock in any time you wish. If you are an hourly employee, you might not be allowed to
clock in until your scheduled time. To disable this behavior and allow employees to clock in
anytime, navigate to Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > Payroll Tab and
then select the Schedule Not Enforced option.
You also have the option to allow your employees a grace period before their scheduled clock in
time. This feature is found by navigating to Back Office > Station Settings > Other Options Tab
> Extra Settings > Time Card Clock In Grace Minutes. Highlight the line and click the “Edit”
button to change the value of the setting. This allows employees to clock in early, before their
scheduled start time. This time is added for payroll purposes. If you do not wish to pay employees
for grace minutes, you can round the time to the nearest quarter hour. This feature is called Time
Card Clock Rounding Minutes and is also found in the Extra Settings section.
To clock in, follow the steps below.
1. Click on the “Time Card” button in the Main POS screen and enter your access code (you
should have already created an employee file for each of your employees).
2. Click on the “Clock In” button. Clicking this button clocks you in and simultaneously
displays your clock in time.
a. If you have multiple jobs, the system asks which job you are working. There are
two requirements to enable multiple jobs.
i. The employee must have two separate employee files with the exact
same information except the job title and the pay rate.
ii. The option called Employee with Multi Job Selection must be checked.
This option may be found in the Back Office under the Store Settings >
Staff/CRM Tab.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
86
Opening Procedures
Tech Tip: This screen closes after you clock in. Click the “Stay” button before
clicking the “Clock In” button to remain in this screen until you are finished with
everything you need to do.
Viewing Your Schedule
While in the Time Card screen, you may want to see what your schedule looks like for a particular
week. To view your schedule, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are already in the
Time Card screen.
1. Click on the “View Schedule” button. This displays the date picker where you may enter
the week you would like to see.
2. Enter any date that is within the week you would like to see. This displays the report
showing your scheduled time for the work week.
3. You may either print the report on the receipt printer or click “OK” to exit the screen.
Information on the schedule includes the employee name, job title, the date it was generated, the
employee’s scheduled hours including breaks, regular hours, overtime and double time hours, and
the total hours worked.
Earnings Report
While in the Time Card screen, you may also want to see how much you have earned up to this
point for the current pay period. To view your current earnings, follow the steps below. These steps
assume you are already in the Time Card screen.
1. Click on the “Earning Report” button. This displays the report with the information for the
current pay period.
2. You may either print the report on the receipt printer or click “OK” to exit the screen.
Information on this report includes the employee’s name, salary type, job title, date range of the
report, list of clock in and out times, total hours worked for each day, total wages earned, total tips
reported, total wage advances, total hours worked, and net wages earned.
Register a Pager
If your restaurant uses Staff Paging, a pager may be assigned to you. Two types of pagers can be
used; numeric and alphanumeric. If you are a regular employee, either type of pager may be used.
However, if you are a manager, you need an alphanumeric pager that supports text so that you can
receive updates on sales information. The pager assigned to the manager has a special number. This
number is specified in the option Manager Alert Pager Number. This option is found in the Back
Office under Store Settings > Other Tab.
There is also security that can be set to allow only authorized employees to assign pagers. This
setting is called Staff Paging Register Pager Security Level. It is found in Store Settings > Services
Tab > Hostess/Paging Setup > General Tab.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Opening Procedures
87
To have a pager assigned to you, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are already in the
Time Card screen.
1. Click the “Pager” button. This displays the Staff Paging screen. Here you assign pagers as
well as send pages to the manager or other employees.
2. Click “Register Pager.” This displays a keypad where you can enter the pager number.
3. Enter the number of the pager you wish to use. This sends a test page to verify that the
pager is operational.
Starting Your Bank
Starting Staff Bank
There are two options in Aldelo® POS for managing settlement transactions: Cash Drawer and Staff
Bank. Staff Bank is used when employees take care of their own money and a cash drawer is not
assigned to them. It is often considered as their own personal cash drawer without the physical
hardware. Money pouches are often used to carry the cash and change. The one limitation
employees encounter when using Staff Bank is that they may not also be a cashier. Only one option
may be used at any time.
To enable staff banking, two required options need to be checked.
1. Check the “Enable Staff Banking” checkbox located in the Back Office under Store
Settings > Revenue Tab > Cashier Tab.
2. Use Staff Bank must be enabled for every employee using it. This is located in the Back
Office under Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > [Any Employee] > Payroll
Tab.
Once Staff Bank is enabled for an employee, a “Start Staff Bank” button appears on the Time Card
screen. To start staff bank, follow the steps below. These steps assume staff banking has been
enabled, the employee is in the Time Card screen, and has already clocked in.
1. Click on “Start Staff Bank.” This displays a keypad where you enter your start amount.
2. The start amount can either be provided by the restaurant or provided by the employee.
Once you enter the amount, the system asks who provided the start amount.
You can also have Staff Bank start automatically when you clock in. This option is called Auto Start
Staff Bank When Clock In and may be found in the Back Office by navigating to Store Settings >
Revenue Tab > Cashier Tab. This feature always starts the staff bank with a start amount of $0.00.
Tech Tip: You can also use the registry setting Staff Cash Drawer User Serial
Port to allow an employee’s Staff Bank to use the local Serial Cash Drawer. This
works well for allowing two cash drawers on one system.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
88
Opening Procedures
Cashier In
The main way to settle transactions in a restaurant is to use a cash drawer. Most restaurants have at
least one cash drawer, if not a cash drawer for every station. Before taking payments from
customers, you must tell the system that a cash tray is available to receive money. Many features are
exclusive to cash drawers and are not available to Staff Bank. These are Gift Certificate, Pay Out,
Refund, and Settle. Staff Bank can still settle orders although not through the “Settle” button in the
Main POS screen.
To enable Cashiers, at least one cash tray must be created. Follow the steps below to create a cash
tray. These steps assume you are in the Back Office.
1. Click the “Setup” menu. This is located in the top left portion of the screen.
2. Navigate to and click on “General Settings.”
3. Navigate to and click on “Cash Trays.”
4. Enter a name for the cash tray. This name may be anything you wish. The name is only
used for reference purposes and does not show up when performing Cashier In or Cashier
Out.
5. Click the “Save” button.
To cashier in, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have clocked in.
1. Click the “Cashier In” button in the Main POS screen. This displays a keypad. Enter your
access code.
a. This step can be secured so that only authorized employees can cashier in. This
security feature is called Cashier Sign In/Cashier Sign Out and may be found in
the Back Office under Security Settings.
2. Click on the cash tray you wish to assign to yourself. This displays the Money Count
screen where you enter the start amount of the cash tray.
a. Twelve denominations are available. These denominations may be changed in the
Back Office under Store Settings > Revenue Tab > Other Options Tab. The
feature is called Custom Currency Denominations. This feature is used mainly by
customers in countries other than the United States.
3. Enter the total amount of currency and coin you start with. Make sure this information is
correct or the cash tray will show a discrepancy at the end of the shift.
4. Click “Finish.” The software prompts you to indicate if you are finished with your money
count.
5. When asked if you are finished with the money count, click “Yes” or “No.”
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
89
Opening Procedures
Money Count Screen
These are the
denominations
available.
These are the checks
received.
These buttons work
the same as the tab
button on the
keyboard and move
from one field to the
next.
This closes the cash
tray and assumes the
money in the cash tray
is correct.
These are the credit
card charges
received.
This is a quick way
to enter the amount
counted without
entering each
denomination
separately.
This is a built in number
pad so that a keyboard is
not required.
This saves checks and
charges you have
already accounted for
and do not want to
count at the end of the
shift.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
90
Opening Procedures
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Hostess Procedures
91
Chapter 7
Hostess Procedures
Reservations
If your restaurant accepts reservations, Aldelo® POS can help you accomplish the task. This is
usually handled by the hostess, but can be handled by any employee with access to the hostess
features.
The hostess features work when the Use Hostess Features option is enabled. This is located under
Back Office > Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > Payroll Tab. Once enabled, three
buttons appear in the Table Selection screen: “Hostess,” “Assign Table,” and “Assign Tab.”
To access the reservation system, click on the “Hostess” button in the Table Selection screen.
Follow the steps below to access the reservation system.
1. Click the “Dine In” button in the Main POS screen. This prompts you for your access code.
2. Enter your access code.
3. Click on the “Hostess” button.
4. The default tab is the Reservations Tab.
a. The Reservations Tab can be disabled (if it is not used in your restaurant) by
enabling the Disable Reservation Feature option . This option is found in Store
Settings > Services Tab > Dine In Tab > Hostess/Paging Setup > Reservations
Tab.
Creating a Reservation
To create a new reservation, follow the steps below. This assumes you are in the Hostess screen.
1. While in the Reservations Tab, click on “New.” This displays the new reservation screen
where you enter the reservation information.
2. If you already have the customer information stored in your database, ask for the customer
phone number. If the customer is not in the database, enter the name manually in the “Party
Name” field. If the customer is found, the “Party” field is automatically populated.
3. Click on the “Adults” button and enter the number of adults in the guest party. Repeat this
for the “Children,” “Highchairs,” and “Wheelchairs” buttons.
4. Click on the type of seating requested. These are the buttons below the customer type
buttons.
5. Click on the “Enter Reservation Time and Table…” button. This displays the Select
Reservation Time and Table screen.
6. Click on the date button at the top of the screen to display the date picker screen.
7. Choose the reservation date.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
92
Hostess Procedures
8.
9.
Select the time for the reservation in one of the two time columns. The left column is AM
and the right column is PM. Adjust the time to each quarter hour with the buttons below the
hour lists.
Select the table you wish to reserve. If the table is not available, it is either yellow, green,
or blue. If available, the table is gray or flashing.
Changing a Reservation
Once you have created a reservation, you may need to change it to accommodate a customer
request. Any information in the reservation can be changed, and the procedure to do so is exactly the
same as that for creating the reservation.
To change a reservation, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Reservations
Tab.
1. Click on and highlight the reservation you wish to edit.
2. Click “Edit.” This displays the screen where you may change any of the information
entered previously.
3. Once you have changed the information, click “Done.” This updates the reservation.
If a reservation must be changed after it has been marked as Checked In, Walked Out, No Show, or
Cancelled, double-click it and select the “Make Active” checkbox. To show the reservations that
have been marked with the various statuses, click on the filter buttons at the bottom of the list under
the Reservations Tab.
Other options in the Reservations Tab include:
 Date Picker to change the day being viewed.
 A “Today” button to quickly change to the current day.
 A print option to print the reservation list being viewed.
 Navigation arrows to scroll up and down in the list when no keyboard is present.
Checking In a Reservation
When customers arrive for their reservations, you must check them in. Simply highlight the
reservation and click the “Check In” button. If the customer arrives a bit early and must wait until
their table is ready, you can assign them a pager to notify them when the table is ready.
Waiting List
To keep track of customers waiting to be seated, use the waiting list feature. This feature is included
in the hostess features, along with reservations and paging. The waiting list works similarly to the
reservations window.
To disable the waiting list feature, enable the option called Disable Waiting List Feature. This
option is found in the Back Office under Store Settings > Services Tab > Dine In Tab >
Hostess/Paging Setup > Waiting List Tab.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Hostess Procedures
93
Add a Customer to the Waiting List
To create a waiting list entry, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Hostess
screen.
1. From the Waiting List Tab, click on the “New” button. This displays the new waiting list
entry screen where you enter the customer information.
2. If you already have the customer information stored in your database, ask for the customer
phone number. If the customer is not in the database, enter the name in the Party field
manually. If the customer is found, the Party field populates automatically.
3. Click on the “Adults” button to enter the number of adults in the party. Repeat this for the
“Children,” “Highchairs,” and “Wheelchairs” buttons.
4. Select the type of seating the customer requests. These are the buttons below the “Adults,”
“Children,” etc. buttons.
5. Assign a pager if the paging system is in use. A test page is sent to the pager to ensure that
it is operating correctly.
6. Click the “Done” button when finished.
Check In the Customer
When a table matches the customer specifications, the system recommends the table. This displays
in the Elapsed field of the Waiting List screen. The recommended table displays next to the elapsed
time. Once a table has been identified as ready, the customer can be notified by highlighting the
entry in the waiting list and clicking “Paging.”
Other options in the Waiting List Tab include:
 Date Picker to change the day being viewed.
 A “Today” button to quickly change to the current day.
 A print option to print the waiting list being viewed.
 Navigation arrows to scroll up and down in the list when no keyboard is present.
Assigning a Table
The hostess has the option to assign a table to an employee manually. These features are not
available unless the employee has access to the hostess features. When a hostess assigns a table, the
employee being assigned the table must be classified as a server. This setting is called Is a Server
and is located in the Back Office under Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Files > Payroll Tab.
To assign a table to a server, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Select Table
Number screen as the hostess.
1. Click on the “Assign Table” button. This displays the screen with a list of employees who
have the Is a Server option checked in their employee file and are currently clocked in.
2. Highlight the employee you wish to assign the table to and click the “Select” button.
3. Click the table number you wish to assign to the employee.
4. Enter the number of guests. This assigns the table to the employee.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
94
Hostess Procedures
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Dine In Orders
95
Chapter 8
Dine In Orders
Order Entry
Dine In orders are orders associated with a table. If you wish to call it something other than Dine In,
you may change this by using the feature called Alias Name. This may be found in the Back Office
under Store Setting > Services Tab > Dine In Tab. Enter your desired name in the field. Be sure to
save your changes.
To create a new order, follow the steps below.
1. Click the “Dine In” button on the Main POS screen. You are prompted for your access
code.
a. To skip being prompted for your access code, enable the option called Auto
Recognize This Station’s Cashier as the Default Employee without Login. This
option is located in the Back Office under Station Settings > Cashier Tab.
2. Enter your access code. This displays the Table Selection screen.
a. To skip the table selection screen and go directly into the order entry screen, use
the option called Skip Table Selection. This option is found in the Back Office
under Store Settings > Services Tab > Dine In Tab.
3. Click on the table group you wish to see. This displays all tables for this group.
a. If you only want employees to see tables assigned to them, use the table
assignment feature. This is different from the hostess feature as these are
permanent table assignments. This screen is located under Back Office > Setup >
Table Setup > Dine In Tables.
4. Click on the table you wish to work with. This displays a keypad asking how many guests
are in the party.
a. If there is already a ticket on this table, a screen displays the open ticket(s). Click
on the ticket you wish to work with.
5. Enter the number of guests and click “Enter.” This displays the Order Entry screen.
a. The default number of guests is pulled from the Total Seats field when creating
the table. This field is located in the Back Office under Setup > Table Setup >
Dine In Tables > [Any Table].
b. If you do not wish to enter the number of guests, uncheck the option called Track
Guest Count For Dine In Orders. This option may be found in the Back Office
under Store Settings > Services Tab.
Once in the Order Entry screen, you have many functions to choose from. The Order Entry screen is
arranged to provide the fastest operations possible. All commonly used buttons are located on this
screen for easy access. Menu groups are located on the left side and the menu items on the right. As
you click on each menu group, the menu items change to what is in the currently selected group.
Action buttons are located below the menu items and are used to perform various tasks with the
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
96
Dine In Orders
order. Order settlement information is located in the lower right corner of the screen and is used to
send the order to the kitchen.
Order Entry Screen
These are the Menu
Groups.
These are the Menu Items. These are action
buttons to change
various properties of
the order.
These are action
This is the payment
buttons that perform information.
various actions on
the order.
These are the payment
options. Use either
Cash Tender or Settle.
Here you may change
the seat you are
currently ordering
items for.
This is the on-screen
ticket. This shows all
ticket activity.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Dine In Orders
97
Adding Items
Once in the Order Entry screen and you want to add items to the ticket, just click on the menu group
where the item is located, then on the item you wish to order. The item is added to the ticket.
To add an item to the ticket, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Order Entry
screen.
1. Click on the Menu Group where the item is located. This shows all the menu items for this
group.
2. Click on the Menu Item you wish to add to the ticket.
a. If the menu item has Forced Modifiers or a Modifier Builder Template assigned to
it, these pop up after the menu item is clicked.
3. Click “Done” to send the items to the kitchen.
a. If you do not wish to send the items to the kitchen right away, you can disable the
send feature temporarily. The next time you recall the order the item is sent unless
you delay it again. This button is called “No Kitchen/Bar” and is found on the
Order Entry screen under the “Misc” button.
4. (Optional) If you wish to settle the order right away, use the settlement functions to do so.
a. The “Cash Tender” button assumes the customer is paying with cash and displays
a screen allowing you to enter the amount tendered.
b. The “Settle” button is used for all forms of payment and should be used when
cash is not the form of payment.
5. (Optional) To save this ticket and start another ticket for this table, use the “Chain” button.
This button sends the current order to the kitchen and starts a new order for this table. This
is useful if the guests have decided that they want separate checks among themselves.
Voiding Items
When entering items, you may make a mistake and need to clear the item. This may be done using
the “Void” button. This button is located on the Order Entry screen below the menu items. There is
security on this function and it may only be used by authorized employees. There is one exception
to this rule: if the order has not yet been sent to the kitchen, you may void the item without
authorization. The security for this function is called Security: Void Order or Items and it may be
found in the Back Office under Security Settings. Adjust the security level required to access this
feature to fit the needs of your business.
To void an item, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have a menu item ordered and are
in the Order Entry screen.
1. Click on the “Void” button in the Order Entry screen.
2. Highlight the item you wish to void.
a. When the item has been sent to the kitchen, an asterisk [*] appears next to the
item name.
b. You may also reduce the number items if there is more than one on the same line.
Use the “Reduce” button to do this.
c. To void the entire line, use the “Void Line” button.
3. Click the “ ” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
98
Dine In Orders
Re-Ordering Items
After you have sent the items to the kitchen or bar, the customer may want to order more of the
same item. If this item had many changes to it, it may be embarrassing if you have to ask the
customer for their preferences again.
To order the same item with the same modifiers, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are
in the order entry screen and have ordered items.
1. Click the “Re-Order” button. This displays a list of items that have been ordered previously
for this ticket.
2. Select the item that the customer would like to re-order.
a. Re-order as many items as necessary and click “.” This is useful for things like
beer, which usually comes in rounds.
3. When finished, click the “Done” button on the Order Entry screen.
Holding Items
If you need to delay sending the food to the kitchen, use the hold function. There are two forms of
hold in the Order Entry screen: Item Holds and Order Holds. If you hold the entire order, all of the
menu items are on the same timer. If you hold individual items, they can all have different hold
times.
To hold an item, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Order Entry screen.
1. Click on the item you wish to order.
2. Click the “Hold” button. This displays the screen that lists all the items on the current
ticket. Items that have been sent to the kitchen are marked with an asterisk [*].
3. Highlight the item(s) you wish to hold. You may hold items that have been sent to the
kitchen as well as items that have not yet been sent to the kitchen.
a. If you wish to hold the entire order, click the “Select All” button.
4. Click method you wish to use. There are three options:
a. Hold Until Notified holds the order or items until you remove the hold status.
b. Hold Time allows you to select how long you wish the hold status to be active.
i. The Hold Time screen has many options to allow you to adjust the time
to exactly how long you wish the hold status to be active.
c. Future Date Hold allows you to hold an order or items that are to be prepared on a
future date.
5. Click the “Done” button.
6. Click the “Done” button on the Order Entry screen to save the hold times to the order.
a. This prints a chit in the kitchen with the items and a “Hold” status.
i. If you do not want a ticket to print to the kitchen, use the feature called
Enable Delayed Send Order Feature. This is found in the Back Office
under Store Settings > Print Tab > Kitchen/Bar Tab.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
99
Dine In Orders
Hold Screen
These are the items
you can hold.
Use this button to
hold for a specified
amount of time.
Use this button to select all the items
or click it again to deselect all the items.
Use this button to
hold until you remove
the hold status.
Use this button to
clear the hold time
on the selected items.
Use this button to hold until a future date.
This button shows the “Date” button in
the Hold Time Screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
100
Dine In Orders
Hold Time Screen
These are the quick buttons for
the number of minutes.
These buttons allow the user
to adjust the time manually.
This shows the specified hold
release time.
This button cancels the
operation and returns to the
previous screen.
This button accepts the hold
time and applies it to the order
or item.
This button holds the
Order until you remove
the hold manually.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Dine In Orders
101
Releasing the Hold
Once an item or order is on hold, there are two ways the status can be removed. The first is if the
hold time on the item or order expires. Once the time expires, the item or order is sent to the kitchen
with a fire command. The second way is if the item or order has the hold status removed manually.
To remove the hold status from the order manually, follow the steps below. These steps assume you
are in the Order Entry screen with menu items on hold.
1. Click the “Hold” button in the Order Entry screen.
2. Highlight the item(s) from which you wish to remove the hold status.
3. Click the “Clear Hold Time” button. This sets the field Hold Until Time to the current time.
4. Click the “Done” button.
a. Once you click “Done,” the order is sent to the kitchen with a >>>Fire<<<
command listing all the items that have been released.
Splitting an Order
Customers sometimes want to split their tickets. This could happen at any time during the
customer’s visit. They may tell you before ordering, in which case the “Chain” button should be
used in Order Entry to create multiple orders. If the guests mention that they would like to split the
check after items have already been ordered, you can still split the items into separate checks by
using the “Split” button in the Order Entry screen.
To split items onto separate checks, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have items
ordered on the ticket and are in the Order Entry screen.
1. Click the “Split” button on the Order Entry screen.
2. Enter the number of additional checks to create by clicking the “Add” button. This is the
number of checks you wish to create in addition to the check you already have open. For
example, if you wish to create two additional checks, click the “Add” button twice.
3. Select the items to remove from the original check by clicking on them. Multiple items
may be selected.
4. Click on one of the blank checks. The items are removed from the original check and
added to the blank check.
a. If you make a mistake, click the “Cancel” button and start over.
5. (Optional) Click on the “Guests” button and enter the number of guests for this check.
6. Repeat steps 3-5 until you have assigned the items to split from the main check. The
remaining items are left on the original check.
7. Click the “Finish” button. This displays the window allowing you to select which checks to
print.
8. Highlight the checks to print and click “Print Selected,” “Print All,” or “Print None.”
Combine Orders
Customers sometimes may want to pick up a tab for a friend or change their minds on having
separate checks. When this happens, use the Combine function in the Order Entry screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
102
Dine In Orders
To combine checks, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have multiple orders created
and are in the Order Entry screen.
1. Click “Combine” on the Order Entry screen.
2. Select the order you wish to combine with the original order that is open in the Order Entry
screen. The order displays, allowing you to review it before accepting it.
3. Click “Accept.” The order is combined with the current order.
4. If you have another order to combine, repeat steps two and three.
5. Click the “” button when you are finished combining all of the orders.
Ordering a Half
A customer may only wish to order a half order of a menu item. This may be for a child or because
they do not want the full dish. To do this, click the “Half” button on the Order Entry screen before
clicking on the menu item. Half of the item is ordered and the price for the item is cut in half as
well.
Item Details
Before ordering an item, the customer may want to see what the item looks like, or a description of
the item ingredients and what comes with it. Do this by clicking on the “Details” button before you
click on the menu item. This displays a screen that shows a picture of the menu item and a
description. There are also options to print the description and to add the item to the customer’s
order. The “Add” button places the order.
Ordering Multiple Quantities
The customer may wish to order several of a particular item. Instead of clicking on the menu item
button as many times as needed, click on the “Quantity” button and specify the number of items to
order at once. This adds a line to the ticket that indicates the item along with the number specified.
Applying Discounts
Discounts are a big part of a restaurant operation. Specials are going on at various times, customers
may have a coupon, managers may give out discounts to frequent customers, and employees may
have special pricing on food from the restaurant. All these scenarios are covered by discounts.
Discounts may be applied either to the entire order or to individual menu items on the order. Only
one discount type may be applied to an order, however an additional cash discount may also be
applied to an already discounted order. Items can only be discounted once and cannot have multiple
discounts applied. You may however, have five items on a check and discount two of them, as well
as discount the entire order. This applies the order discount to the remaining items that have not had
an item discount applied to them.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Dine In Orders
103
To discount a menu item, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have ordered items and
are in the Order Entry screen.
1. Click on the “Discounts” button in the Order Entry screen. This displays a screen that
allows you to choose the type of discount to use. There are three options: “Discount
Order,” “Discount Item,” and “Cash Discount.”
a. “Discount Order” applies the selected discount to all items in the order that do not
already have discounts applied to them.
b. “Discount Item” applies the selected discount to the selected menu item. You
cannot apply more than one discount to a menu item.
c. “Cash Discount” allows you to specify the discount amount manually. You may
have a Cash Discount and an Order Discount on the same check.
2. Click on the desired discount type. If you choose “Discount Order,” you are taken directly
to the discounts screen. If you choose “Discount Item,” you must select which item to
apply the discount to. If you choose “Cash Discount,” you must specify the amount of the
discount.
3. Click the “” button.
Applying Surcharges
Surcharges must sometimes be applied for various reasons and can be for anything you deem
necessary. Surcharges can be a percentage or dollar amount, and may be waived if a check is over a
certain amount. Surcharges can be automatically applied to specific order types. If taxes apply to
surcharges, select the “Apply Tax on Surcharge” checkbox located in the Back Office under Store
Settings > Taxes Tab > [Any Tax Tab].
To add a surcharge to an order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Order
Entry screen.
1. Click the “Surcharge” button.
2. Select the surcharge to add to the check. You may only apply one surcharge to an order.
3. Click the “” button.
Applying Credits
There are two ways to generate a credit in Aldelo® POS: the credit may be earned by participating in
the frequent diner program or the credit may be issued manually.
To apply a credit, follow to steps below. These steps assume a credit has been created for the
customer and you are in the Order Entry screen.
1. Click on the “Credit” button in the Order Entry screen.
2. Choose the search method for the customer. There are five search methods.
a. “Phone” – This method is used to search by the customer telephone number.
b. “Account Code” – This method is used to search by the account code, which is
defined in the customer account information.
c. “MSR Card” – This method is used to search by an MSR card. These can be
issued by the restaurant as a membership card.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
104
Dine In Orders
“Customer Name” – This method is used to search by the customer name. If you
search by customer name, a list of customers names displays that match along
with the telephone numbers so you can pick the right one.
e. “Delivery Address” – This method searches by the customer’s street address.
Provide the necessary information to search for the customer. Once found, a screen appears
showing all the credits currently assigned to this customer.
Choose a credit to apply to the order.
a. If the credit is not entirely used, a balance is kept for later use.
b. Click the “” button.
Click “Done” in the Order Entry screen to apply the credit to the customer’s order.
d.
3.
4.
5.
Changing the Order Type
To change the order type, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the Order Entry
screen and you are not using the Quick Service feature.
1. Click on the button with the current order type name. This button is located above the
menu items and to the right of the menu groups.
2. Choose the new order type.
3. Enter the appropriate information about the order to make the change.
4. Click the “” button.
5. Click “Done” in the Order Entry screen to save the changes to the check.
Adding a Customer Name to an Order
To add a customer’s name to the guest check, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in
the Order Entry screen and you are not using the Quick Service feature.
1. Click the “Customer Name” button.
2. On the on-screen keyboard, enter the customer’s name and click the “” button.
3. Click “Done” in the Order Entry screen to save the customer name to the guest check.
Assigning a Pager to a Customer
To assign a pager to your guest party, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the
Order Entry screen and you are not using the Quick Service feature.
1. Click the “Pager” button.
2. On the on-screen keypad, enter the number of the pager you are assigning to the guest party
and click the “” button. Give the pager to the guest party.
3. Click “Done” in the Order Entry screen when you finish entering the guest party’s order.
Changing the Number of Guests on the Check
Use the “Guests” button to change the number of guests on the check. The button is located above
the menu items in the Order Entry screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Dine In Orders
105
To change the number of guests at a table, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the
Order Entry screen and you are not using the Quick Service feature.
1. Click the “Guests” button on the Order Entry screen.
2. Enter the number of guests by using the displayed keypad and then click the “” button.
3. Click “Done” on the Order Entry screen to save the new number of guests to the check.
Changing the Table Number of the Check
Sometimes customers may ask to move to a different table. This can be done using the “Table”
button on the Order Entry screen. The button is located above the menu items in the Order Entry
screen.
To change the table number of the check, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the
Order Entry screen and you are not using the Quick Service feature.
1. Click the “Table” button in the Order Entry screen.
2. Select the table you wish to move this check to.
3. If prompted, enter the number of guests in the guest party.
4. Click “Done” on the Order Entry screen to save the changes to the check.
Recall Another Check on the Same Table
If you are working with multiple checks on the same table and need to switch between them
quickly, use the “Checks” button on the Order Entry screen.
To change the check you are working on for this table, follow the steps below. These steps assume
you are in the Order Entry screen and you are not using the Quick Service feature.
1. Click the “Checks” button in the Order Entry screen to display the Check Selector screen
where you can see your checks and choose the one desired.
2. Highlight the check you wish to change to and click “Edit.”
3. (Optional) To simply view the checks without selecting one of them, click the “” button.
Changing Seat Numbers in Order Entry
You may assign seats to the items ordered by using the seat icons as well as the seat indicator field.
Assigning seats to the order helps the server to remember which item goes to which guest and also
allows for more advanced features such as grouping the items on the guest check by seat number for
easier viewing. Several features are associated with the seats function.
1. Show Seat Assignment Reminder on Done For Dine In Orders.
2. Force Seat Assignment Reminder On Done
3. Prompt Seat Number on Startup
4. Prompt Seat Number on Each Item.
5. Smart Seat Handling
6. Show Total Per Seat
7. Hide Seat # from Printed Check
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
106
Dine In Orders
To create a seat number for a guest check, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are in the
Order Entry screen and you are not using the Quick Service feature.
1. Click on the seat icon with a plus sign next to it to increase the seat number you are
working with.
2. Click on the seat icon with a minus sign next to it to decrease the seat number you are
working with.
3. Click on the seat number to show the visual table layout so you can choose which seat you
want to work on without having to use the plus or minus buttons. The seat number field is
the blank button directly between the two seat icons, above the on-screen guest check.
Misc Button
On the Order Entry screen, the “Misc” button is used to reach options that are not commonly used in
Order Entry. These functions include:
 Change Price
 Assign Seats
 Clear Order
 No Sale
 Change Server
 Gratuity
 Cust. Lookup
 Recall Order
 Create Labels
 Retail Screen
 Tax Exempt
 No Kitchen/Bar
 Lock Screens
 Re-Print Pizza Labels
 To Secondary Language
Change Price
Only employees with sufficiently high security levels may change the prices of items. To use the
feature, click the “Change Price” button. A keypad appears and prompts you to enter a manager's
access code. Enter an access code with a sufficiently high security level to display the Change Price
window. Select the item to display the Enter New Unit Price dialog box. Enter the new price and
click the “” button.
Assign Seats
This feature is only available on Dine In type orders. It assigns ordered items to certain seats. Click
on the “Assign Seats” button. The Assign Seats window appears and displays the menu items. Click
the item you wish to assign to a seat to display the Seat Assignment window. Here you may choose
the seat that you want to assign that item to. Once you have selected the seat, you are returned to the
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Dine In Orders
107
Assign Seats window where you may pick another item to assign to a seat, or you may click the “”
button to exit the seat assignment feature and return to the order entry window.
Clear Order
This feature allows the user to clear all of the previously ordered menu items, as long as the item has
not yet been sent to the kitchen. Click on the “Clear Order” button. A confirmation window appears,
allowing you to verify the action.
No Sale
This feature opens the cash drawer for an employee with a sufficiently high security access level.
The security access level required for the use of this feature may be adjusted in the Back Office
under Security Settings > Security: Access No Sale Require Manager.
Change Server
This feature allows you to change the server assigned to an order. Click the “Change Server” button
in the Misc window. The Enter New Server Access Code keypad appears. Have the server who is
taking over this order enter his or her access code. Click the “” button to complete the change.
Gratuity
This feature allows the user to add a gratuity to the order. Click on the “Gratuity” button to display
the Gratuity screen. Select the “Percent,” “Amount,” or “Difference” gratuity type, as necessary.
1. If you select “Percent” as the gratuity type, the Enter Gratuity Percent keypad appears.
Enter the gratuity percentage and click the “” button to apply the gratuity to the order.
2. If you select “Amount” as the gratuity type, the Enter Cash Gratuity Amount keypad
appears. Enter the gratuity amount and click the “” button to apply the gratuity to the
order.
3. If you select “Difference” as the gratuity type, the Total Tendered keypad appears. Enter
the total amount you wish to pay for the order, including the gratuity, and then click the
“” button. This makes the gratuity amount the difference between the total amount paid
and the total amount of the ticket.
Cust. Lookup
This feature allows you to search for customers by Phone, Account Code, MSR Card, Customer
Name, or Delivery Address. This links the order you are creating to the customer’s account. Click
on the “Cust. Lookup” button in the Misc window to bring up the Customer Lookup Type window.
In this window, there are five buttons: “Phone,” “Account Code,” “MSR Card,” “Customer Name,”
and “Delivery Address.”
To use the Phone search method, click the “Phone” button, enter the customer phone number, and
then click the “” button on the keypad.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
108
Dine In Orders
To use the Account Code search method, click the “Account Code” button, enter the account code in
the on-screen keyboard, and click the “” button.
To use the MSR Card search method, click the “MSR Card” button and swipe the magnetic card
through the MSR device to display the account specified for this card. Alternatively, you may enter
the card information manually into the Swipe Magnetic Card keypad and then click the “” button.
To use the Customer Name search method, click the “Customer Name” button, enter the name of
the customer into the onscreen keyboard, and then click the “” button. After you have completed
this, the system displays another window with a list of all the names that match the search string you
entered. Choose the customer’s account to bring up the Review Customer Information screen. If the
customer’s information is correct, click the “Done” button.
To use the Delivery Address search method, click the “Delivery Address” button, enter the street
address of the customer, and click the “” button.
Any time you type in a phone number and no customer record is found with that number, you must
create the customer file before you may continue.
Recall Order
This feature is the same as when using the “Recall” button in the Main POS screen. It displays the
Recall Order screen, allowing you to recall an order.
Create Labels
This feature allows you to create labels for menu items that are ordered by weight. Click the “Create
Labels” button to display the Weighted Menu Item Label Generator. This screen allows you to
select the menu item and specify the Unit of Measure, along with the Expiration Date. Use the onscreen keyboard, if necessary, to enter this information. Once you have filled in the fields, enter the
total weight of the menu item. This calculates the price of the order and displays it on the screen.
Retail Screen
This feature allows you to order items by scanning their barcodes. Click the “Retail Screen” button
and scan the barcode to order the item. If the item has any forced modifiers, the system allows you
to select them. To void an item, click the “Void” button and void or reduce the item(s) as usual. For
more information on voiding items, refer to the section entitled “Voiding Items” on page 97 of this
manual.
You may also add menu modifiers, order by weight, or order by quantity by clicking the appropriate
buttons. When you are ready to exit the Retail screen, click the “Touch Screen” button to return to
the Order Entry screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Dine In Orders
109
Tax Exempt
This feature allows you to exempt the current order from taxes. Click the “Tax Exempt” button to
bring up the confirmation screen. Click the “Yes” button to make the order tax exempt. To remove a
tax exemption from an order, click the “Tax Exempt” button again. The system asks if you want to
remove the Tax Exemption. Click “Yes” to remove the tax exemption.
No Kitchen/Bar
This feature allows you to specify if you want this order sent to the kitchen/bar. To use this feature
simply click on the “No Kitchen/Bar” button and then click either “Yes” or “No.” This feature is
only active during this session of the order. To suppress or force the printing of the order to the
kitchen/bar the next time you recall this order, you must perform this action again.
Lock Screens
This feature allows an employee with a sufficiently high security access level to lock or disable all
of the features in the Misc window. Click on the “Lock Screens” button. A keypad pops up and
prompts the user to enter his access code. Enter the access code and click the “” button. If the
access code entered was sufficiently high, the screens lock and are unusable until the lock is
removed. Follow the same procedures to remove the lock.
Re-Print Pizza Labels
This feature allows the user to reprint the labels that are normally attached to the boxes in which
pizzas are packaged. This feature is typically used only for takeout and delivery orders, but may be
used with any type of order. Click the “Re-Print Pizza Labels” button to perform the re-print.
To Secondary Language/To Primary Language
This feature changes the menu item text on the screen to the secondary language. Click the button to
change the text language. Click the button again to reverse the change and again display the text on
the screen in the primary language.
Modifier System
Menu Items in a restaurant can have many options, such as side dishes and preparation instructions.
These options must be sent to the kitchen and presented to the cooks and the servers in a meaningful
way. This helps prevent mistakes. There are several ways to work with modifiers in Aldelo® POS:
Manual Modifiers, Forced Modifiers, and the Modifier Builder Templates.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
110
Dine In Orders
Modifiers
Click the “Modifiers” button at the bottom of the order entry screen to display the Modifiers screen.
This screen is used for manually changing modifiers that are associated with a menu item. This is
usually used when a mistake has been made during the initial assignment of modifiers using Forced
Modifiers or the Modifier Builder Template. This may also be used to add a modifier that is not
currently in the system. Use the “Split Qty” button to split a quantity of menu items into smaller
quantities. For example, if you have ten tacos and you want to modify only three of them, you may
highlight the ten tacos and click the “Split Qty” button to tell the system that you would like to split
three off the main group. When finished, the check now shows seven tacos and beneath that, three
tacos.
To use the Modifier screen, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have ordered an item in
the Order Entry screen.
1. Click on the “Modifiers” button in the Order Entry screen. This displays the Modifier
screen where you may manipulate modifiers for each menu item.
2. Select the menu item you wish to work with from the top right corner of the screen. Use the
arrow keys to navigate through the menu items.
a. The modifiers currently assigned to the menu item are shown in the space above
the menu items window.
3. Select the modifier type you wish to work with. These are the buttons below the menu
items window. There are eight modifier types.
a. No
b. Light
c. Extra
d. Add
e. Exchange
f. Half
g. Toppings
h. Bar Mixing
i. There is also a 9th “All” button that displays all modifiers at once.
ii. If you do not want to see all of the modifier types, you may disable the
“Half,” “Toppings,” “Bar Mixing,” and “All” buttons in the Back Office
under Store Settings > Products Tab > Modifiers Tab.
4. Select the first letter of the modifier with the buttons to the left of the modifiers. The button
ignores the modifier type and displays modifier names that begin with the selected letter.
5. Select the modifiers to add to this menu item. Modifiers already selected display in green
and may be deselected if desired (as long as the item has not yet been sent to the kitchen).
a. To change the price of the modifier before adding it to the menu item, click the
“Change Modifier Price” button before clicking the modifier.
b. To double or triple a modifier, use the “2x” or “3x” button before clicking the
modifier.
c. Use the “Note” button to add a Note to the menu item.
6. When you have selected all of the modifiers, click the “Finish” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Dine In Orders
111
Manual Modifiers
In the Modifiers screen, you may also create new modifiers on the fly. Use the “Manual Entry”
button to accomplish this.
To create a new modifier while in the modifiers screen, follow the steps below. These steps assume
items have been ordered but have not yet been sent to the kitchen.
1. Click the “Manual Entry” button.
2. Highlight the menu item for which you wish to create a modifier.
3. Type the name of the modifier in the Modifier Name field.
4. (Optional) Type the secondary language name of the modifier in the Sec. Language field.
5. (Optional) Fill in the additional cost of this modifier in the Additional Cost field.
6. Click the “Add” button.
7. Click the “” button.
Forced Modifiers
If you want your employees to have a limited list of modifiers to choose from and provide a path to
follow when selecting the modifiers, use the Forced Modifier system of Aldelo® POS.
To use the Forced Modifier system, you must first setup the forced modifiers in the Back Office
under Setup > Menu Setup > Forced Modifiers.
To use Forced Modifiers, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already created
forced modifiers for the menu items you are ordering and are in the Order Entry screen.
1. Select a menu item that has forced modifiers created for it. This displays the first level
popup of forced modifiers.
2. Select a modifier from the first level. This displays the second level of forced modifiers.
3. Repeat until there are no more levels, or when the seventh level is reached.
a. You may disable the “Finish” button in the Forced Modifier Level popup with the
feature called Disable FINISH Button in Forced Modifiers. This feature is found
in the Back Office under Store Settings > Products Tab > Modifiers Tab.
Modifier Builder Template
For maximum flexibility and ease of use, modifier builder templates are the way to go for most
restaurants. Modifier builder templates accomplish the work of forced modifiers, as well as create a
flexible way of presenting the modifiers to the user. Templates also cut down on the amount of work
necessary during setup because a template can be assigned to more than one menu item. To use the
Forced Modifier system, you must first set up the forced modifiers in the Back Office under Setup >
Menu Setup > Modifier Builder Setup.
To use a modifier builder template, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created a
builder template for the menu items you are ordering and are in the Order Entry screen.
1. Click on the menu item that has a modifier builder template assigned to it. This displays the
modifier builder template screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
112
Dine In Orders
2.
3.
4.
Click the group you wish to work with for this menu item. Work groups are on the right
side of the screen. Only the groups defined for the template assigned to this menu item are
shown.
Select the modifier type you wish to work with. These are the black buttons above the
actual modifiers, in the upper left corner of the screen.
a. To select a certain type by default, set it up in the Modifier Builder Template
Setup screen when you edit each category. Use the Default Action drop-down list
to choose the default modifier type. A default type is designated by a green button.
Select the modifier you want to add to this menu item.
a. To limit users to select only X modifiers, set this up in the builder template
category.
b. To force users to select at least X modifiers, set this up in the builder template
category.
c. To change the price of a modifier, click the “Change Modifier Price” button
before selecting the modifier.
d. To remove an already selected modifier, highlight the modifier and click the “X”
button. You may also click the modifier’s button again to deselect it.
Pizza Builder System
Pizza restaurants have special requirements when creating an order for a pizza. Since pizzas are so
flexible in their design, Aldelo® POS must also be flexible in the way they are ordered. With the
pizza builder screen, creating a custom pizza is simple. Toppings can be divided among halves,
thirds, or quarters. Crusts may be selected as well as how to charge topping prices. Many features
affect the pizza builder screen. These features include:
1. Show Pizza Builder Screen
a. This feature shows a menu item as a pizza item in the pizza builder template.
2. Special Pizza Topping Charges
a. This feature allows you to specify the number of toppings included with a pizza
for free before the normal pizza topping charges go into effect. This may also be
reversed, so that a number of toppings are charged and the rest are free.
3. Proportioned Pizza Topping Charge
a. This feature charges half-price on a topping that is on only half of the pizza, onethird price on a topping that is on only one-third of the pizza, etc.
4. Half Topping Half Price on EVEN Qty
a. This feature charges half price for toppings that are used on an evenly divided
pizza. If thirds is used, the normal price is charged.
5. Pizza Size Alias Name 1 – 10
a. This feature allows you to change the name of the pizza size to whatever you
choose.
6. Pizza Size Half Topping Price 1 – 10
a. This feature allows you to set the half-topping price for each pizza size.
In order to use the Pizza Builder screen, you must first setup the Pizza Builder feature in the Back
Office under Setup > Menu Setup > Pizza Builder Setup.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Dine In Orders
113
To use the pizza builder screen, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created a
pizza with at least one crust and a couple of toppings, and are in the Order Entry screen.
1. Click on a menu item that has been setup as a pizza item to display the pizza builder
screen.
2. Select the crust type for this pizza (these are the black buttons at the top of the pizza builder
screen).
3. Click on the portion of the pizza to which you would like to add toppings. These are the
areas on the right side of the screen labeled Entire Pizza, Half, Third, and Quarter. Once
you have clicked in the area, the selected area turns white to indicate it is the currently
active portion.
4. Click on the toppings you wish to add to this pizza.
5. Repeat steps 3 & 4 for each portion of the pizza, if necessary.
6. (Optional) Click the “Normal Charges” button to change the way pricing is handled for
toppings on pizza with multiple portions.
7. Click the “Done” button when finished.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
114
Dine In Orders
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Bar Tab Orders
115
Chapter 9
Bar Tab Orders
Order Entry for Bar Tab
To use the Bar Tab functions in Aldelo® POS, you must configure the station as a bar station instead
of a server station used for table service. These settings are found in the Back Office under Station
Settings > Other Options Tab. Several features are designed to make this switch:
1. Enable Bar Tab Services For This Station.
2. (Optional) Skip Table/Bar Tab Selection for Dine In.
3. (Optional) Bar Drink Items Will Not Charge Sales Tax (Applies to bar orders on this
station only).
4. (Optional) Bar Tab Caption.
Select the Enable Bar Tab Services For This Station checkbox. This shows the Bar Tab screen,
allowing you to create orders based on a customer’s name instead of a table number. Bar Tabs are
kept separately from the table orders and are considered their own order type, in most cases.
Create a New Bar Tab
To create a new order for a bar tab customer, follow the steps below.
1. Click on “Dine In” in the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code. On the Dine In Type screen, select either a “Table” or “Bar Tab”
order.
a. If you want this station to create bar tab orders exclusively, then in the Back
Office under Station Settings > Other Options Tab, select the Skip Table/Bar
Tab Selection for Dine In option.
3. Click the “Bar Tab” button. This displays the screen where you can see all your current bar
tabs as well as create new bar tabs.
a. If you wish to change the “Bar Tab” caption on the button to something different,
then in the Back Office under Station Settings > Other Options Tab, edit the
Bar Tab Caption option.
4. Enter a name for this bar tab (a table number, guest name, or perhaps a description of the
guests).
a. You may also use the button with the icon of a flag on it to enter descriptive
information about the customers when their names are unknown.
b. Alternatively, you may click the “Search” button (the button with the icon of a
magnifying glass on it) to find a bar tab. In the large text box that displays, enter
the first few letters of the bar tab name and then click the “” button. Every bar
tab containing the entered search string displays. Select the desired bar tab by
clicking on it.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
116
Bar Tab Orders
5.
Click the “Finish” button.
The guest check shows the Bar Tab Caption as well as the customer name instead of the table
number.
Setting Up Bar Tab Efficiency
Bartenders need to move quickly while serving customers and making drinks for other servers’
orders. The POS system is potentially the weakest link in the process if not setup properly. Several
options in Aldelo® POS make ordering items and editing orders very fast. These settings may be
found in the Back Office under Station Settings > [Other Options Tab, Cashier Tab, and Quick
Service Tab].
These features include:
1. Auto Recognize this Station’s Cashier as the Default Employee without Login.
a. Use this feature for bartenders working alone. You may also use this feature to
speed up operations with two people working out of the same cash drawer,
however you lose the ability to track which employee is responsible for cash
discrepancies.
2. Change Due Screen Time Out Seconds.
a. Use this feature to set the number of seconds the change due screen shows. This
eliminates the need to click on the “Done” button after giving the customer
change.
3. Stay in Order Entry Screen After Order is Finished.
a. Use this feature to remain in the order entry screen. This is useful if you do not
run bar tabs often and just need to quickly process transactions from customers
coming up to the bar.
4. Bar Tab Use Quick Service Order Screen.
a. This feature changes the look of the Order Entry screen and puts more options
directly on the Order Entry screen. The screen also has quick cash buttons for
processing cash transactions quickly.
5. Quick Service Screen Auto Log Out Seconds.
a. Use this feature to automatically log out an employee when finished with an order.
The system returns to the order entry screen automatically using the Stay in Order
Entry Screen After Order is Finished option. This allows the next employee to
enter his or her access code and immediately start the next order.
b. MSR cards are recommended with this feature so the employee can swipe a card
rather than enter a number.
c. This feature cannot be used with the Auto Recognize this Station’s Cashier as the
Default Employee without Login option.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Take Out Orders
117
Chapter 10
Take Out Orders
Order Entry for Take Out
The restaurant may offer food for Take Out or “to go.” For these orders, a customer phone number
is associated with the customer record so the order may be tracked in case of a no-show, or to track
the customer’s order history.
Several settings in the Back Office can affect the way Take Out orders behave. These settings
include:
1. Require Phone # For Take Out.
a. This feature requires a phone number to be entered before an order may be placed.
It may be found in the Back Office under Store Settings > Services Tab > Take
Out Tab.
i. To require the system to check the format of the phone number, use the
Enforce Exact Telephone Number Digits feature. This forces the
employee to enter a phone number that matches the Telephone Display
Format under Store Settings > General.
2. Take Out/Delivery Show Search Type.
a. This feature shows additional options for looking up customer information when
creating a new Take Out order. It may be found in the Back Office under Store
Settings > Staff/CRM Tab. These additional options include:
i. Phone Number
ii. Account Number
iii. MSR Card
iv. Customer Name
3. Do Not Prompt User to Enter Customer Phone Number for Take Out on this Station
a. This feature disables the prompt to search for a customer. A phone number is not
required. The user is taken directly to the order entry screen. This feature may be
found in the Back Office under Station Settings > Other Options Tab.
4. New Customer Take Out On Hold
a. This feature places the order on hold until the hold is manually removed for
customers not in the system. It may be found in the Back Office under Store
Settings > Services Tab > Take Out Tab.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
118
Take Out Orders
Creating a New Take Out Order
To create a new Take Out order, follow the steps below.
1. Click on the “Take Out” button on the Main POS screen. This displays either a keypad or
the Select Search Type screen, depending on whether the Take Out/Delivery Show Search
Type feature is enabled.
2. Enter the phone number or choose the search type and enter information for the customer.
This displays the Customer Information screen.
3. Enter the customer information on this screen.
a. If this customer is already in the system, the information is populated
automatically. If the customer has previous orders, you are able to view those
orders by clicking the “Order History” button.
4. Click the “Finish” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Drive Thru Orders
119
Chapter 11
Drive Thru Orders
Order Entry for Drive Thru
If your restaurant has a drive thru window, use the drive thru features of Aldelo® POS. There are
many unique functions for drive thru establishments, especially regarding timing and order
handling. Several settings affect the way drive thru orders behave. These settings may be found in
the Back Office and include:
1. Disable Drive Thru Timing Feature
a. This setting completely disables the drive thru functions in Aldelo® POS. It may
be found in the Back Office under Store Settings > Services Tab > Drive Thru
Tab. This feature is commonly used to allow the “Drive Thru” button to be used
for another order type. In this case, change the Alias Name of the Drive Thru
order type.
2. Drive Thru Orders Use Drive Thru Stations
a. This setting allows only stations marked as drive thru stations to edit or settle
drive thru orders. It may be found in the Back Office under Store Settings >
Services Tab > Take Out Tab. If the station is not a drive thru station, the user is
prompted to go to a drive thru station to perform the transaction.
b. To make a station a drive thru station, use the setting Mark This Station as a Drive
Thru Station (see below).
3. Mark This Station as a Drive Thru Station
a. This setting designates this station to be used for drive thru orders. It may be
found in the Back Office under Station Settings > Other Options.
Creating a New Drive Thru Order
To create a new drive thru order, follow the steps below.
1. Click on the “Drive Thru” button in the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code. This displays the Drive Thru timing screen.
a. This screen only appears if a drive thru order has been settled but not marked as
complete, meaning that the order has not yet been given to the customer at the
drive thru window. Once marked as complete, the order does not show up in the
Drive Thru timing screen.
3. Click the “New Order” button. This takes you to the Order Entry screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
120
Drive Thru Orders
Marking a Drive Thru Order as Complete
Once settled, the order shows up in the Drive Thru timing screen. Mark the order as complete only
after the customer has received it and driven away. Simply highlight the order in the Drive Thru
Timing screen and click the “Mark Complete” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Delivery Orders
121
Chapter 12
Delivery Orders
Order Entry for Delivery
If your restaurant makes deliveries, use the Delivery features of Aldelo® POS. These features
automate the assignment of orders to employees for delivery and the tracking of those deliveries.
Several settings affect how delivery orders behave. Unless otherwise noted, the features listed below
may be found by navigating to Back Office > Store Settings > Services Tab > Delivery Tab.
1. Show Driver Dispatch Screen
a. This screen shows a list of drivers while another list shows the orders that are
ready for delivery. By default, the employee must enter his or her access code,
click the “Departure” button, and then select the orders he wishes to deliver. With
the Driver Dispatch screen enabled, all this is located on a single screen.
2. Enable Driver Money Drop
a. This feature allows an employee to settle all cash orders in one transaction. To use
it, settle all credit cards and checks separately before performing the money drop.
3. Enable Popup Streets
a. This feature enables a screen to popup with a list of streets as a street name is
entered in the delivery address field. This list further filters the choices as more of
the street name is typed, reducing the length of the list to match what is already
entered.
4. Round Delivery Total To Next Quarter
a. This feature rounds the total of the guest check to the next 25¢, allowing the driver
to carry less small change.
5. Delivery Charge
a. The customer is charged this amount for the delivery. The Delivery Charge is
assigned in the following order and uses the first value it finds.
i. Customer Record
ii. Street
iii. Postal Code
iv. Global Setting in Store Settings > Services > Delivery.
v. (Optional) Menu Item level delivery charge overrides all of the above.
6. Delivery Comp
a. This amount is earned by the employee for performing the delivery. The Delivery
Comp is assigned in the following order and uses the first value it finds.
i. Customer Record
ii. Street
iii. Postal Code
iv. Global Setting in Store Settings > Services Tab > Delivery Tab.
v. (Optional) Menu Item level delivery comp overrides all of the above.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
122
Delivery Orders
7.
Chained Delivery Charge/Comp Per Trip
a. This feature charges the delivery charge and compensation only on the first order
in a chain of orders (for example, multiple orders delivered to the same address).
8. Delivery Charge/Comp Per Menu Item
a. This feature charges the delivery charge and comp based on the value defined at
the menu item level.
9. Delivery Charge Percent Based
a. This feature charges the amount in the delivery charge field as a percentage rather
than as a dollar amount.
10. Delivery Comp Percent Based
a. This feature charges the amount in the delivery comp field as a percentage rather
than as a dollar amount.
11. Apply Tax on Delivery Charge
a. This feature applies tax to the delivery charge portion of the ticket. This setting
may be found in the Back Office by navigating to Store Settings > Taxes Tab.
12. MapPoint Enabled
a. This setting enables the advanced routing and mapping features for delivery
orders. Microsoft MapPoint 2010 or greater must be installed in Integrated Mode
on each station used for delivery orders if you wish to make use of this feature.
This setting may be found in the Back Office by navigating to Station Settings >
Other Options Tab > Extra Settings.
Creating a Delivery Order
To create a delivery order, follow the steps below.
1. Click the “Delivery” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code. This displays the keypad for entering the customer phone number
or the screen allowing you to choose which search type to use. This option depends on the
Take Out/Delivery Show Search Type feature setting under Store Settings > Staff/CRM
Tab.
3. Enter the phone number or click on a search type and enter the appropriate information to
find the customer. This displays the Customer Information screen.
4. Enter the customer’s information. If the customer is in the database, the fields populate
automatically.
a. If this customer has previous orders, you may display those orders and
automatically create a new order based on their order history with a single button
click.
5. Click the “Finish” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Delivery Procedures
123
Chapter 13
Delivery Procedures
Assigning a Delivery Order
There are two ways in Aldelo® POS to assign a delivery to a driver. The default method requires
each driver to enter his access code to assign a delivery order to himself. The other method is by
using the driver dispatch screen to show all the drivers and orders, allowing quick assignment. The
driver dispatch screen is normally used when a station is dedicated to assigning orders to drivers
who are coming and going.
Using the Default Delivery Assignment Procedures
To assign an order to a driver using the default method, follow the steps below. These steps assume
a delivery order has been created.
1. Click on the “Driver” button in the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code. This displays the Driver Tracking screen with the current
employees’ names at the top.
3. Click “Departure.” This displays the Driver Departure Order Assignment screen.
4. Select the order(s) you are taking. Use the arrow buttons to navigate the orders list. You
may also scan the guest check with a barcode scanner to select the order.
a. Barcodes print on the guest check only when using an Epson TM-T88II/III
printer.
5. Click the “Departure” button.
Driver Dispatch Screen Assignment Procedures
To assign an order to a driver using the Driver Dispatch screen, follow the steps below. These steps
assume that a delivery order has been created and that the Show Driver Dispatch Screen option has
been selected in the Back Office under Store Settings > Services Tab > Delivery Tab.
1. Click on “Driver” in the Main POS screen. This displays the Driver Dispatch screen.
2. Highlight the name of the driver taking this delivery.
a. Only employees who are clocked in and designated as drivers are shown on this
screen.
3. Select the orders you wish to assign to this driver.
4. Click the “Departure” button. This assigns the order(s) to the driver.
a. If you accidentally assign an order to the wrong driver, click the “Show All”
button to display orders assigned to other drivers. You may then assign the order
to the correct driver.
5. (Optional) Click the “Done” button to return to the Main POS screen. You may stay in this
screen if this station is dedicated to assigning orders to drivers.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
124
Delivery Procedures
Using Delivery Directions and Route Planning
If your drivers need driving directions, you may want to use MapPoint integration. This replaces the
Microsoft Streets and Trips integration, but provides backward compatibility with Streets and Trips.
In order to make use of this integration, Microsoft MapPoint 2010 or greater must be installed on
the system that is used to view the driving directions. If more than one system is used for this
purpose, a copy of Microsoft MapPoint must be installed on each of the stations.
MapPoint Integration Setup
To setup Microsoft MapPoint Integration, follow the steps below.
1. Install Microsoft MapPoint on all systems that will use driving direction and route planning
functions.
2. Enable the feature called MapPoint Enabled. Do this by typing YES into the field when
editing the option. This option may be found in the Back Office under Station Settings >
Other Options > Extra Settings (the following features may also be found on the same
page).
3. Enter the current fuel cost in your local area. This feature is called MapPoint Fuel Cost.
4. Enter the address from where the deliveries depart. This feature is called MapPoint Home
Address. The format must be [Street Address], [City], [State][Zip Code]. If this
information is entered incorrectly, MapPoint will fail to start.
5. Enable the feature called Optimize Way Points. This calculates the fastest route when
delivering several orders.
6. Enter the number of minutes, on average, that it takes for the items to be prepared for
delivery in the MapPoint Route Start Minutes After field. The system uses this information,
plus the calculated route time, to estimate the time of delivery. The estimated delivery time
displays on the driving directions.
Using MapPoint Integration
To use MapPoint Integration, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already setup
MapPoint integration, have created a delivery order, and are in the Driver Dispatch screen.
1. Select the driver to whom you wish to assign the order.
2. Select the order(s) the driver is taking for delivery.
3. Click the “See Map” button. This displays the Route Planning screen. You can print the
directions as well as print a map from this screen.
4. Click “Print Map” or “Print Detail.” These will only print to the desktop printer. These will
not print to a receipt printer.
5. Click the “Done” button.
Viewing Delivery Order Status
Use the Delivery Status screen to keep an eye on the progress of all delivery orders. The screen is
accessed from the Main POS screen and is used by managers to keep track of drivers.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Delivery Procedures
125
Using the Delivery Status Screen
To use the Delivery Status screen, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created a
delivery order.
1. Click on the “Delivery Status” button in the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code and click the “” button.
3. The following information may be viewed on this screen: the order number, the time the
order was created, the delivery address, the driver, the departure time, the time it took to
prepare the order, and the time it has taken up to this point to deliver the order.
a. You may also view the driving directions for a delivery when using MapPoint
Integration by selecting the order and then clicking the “See Map” button.
4. Once an order is delivered, it is removed from this list.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
126
Delivery Procedures
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Quick Service
127
Chapter 14
Quick Service
Using the Quick Service Screen
Many of the operational buttons are displayed in plain view on the Quick Service screen. This
eliminates the additional button clicks needed to reach these buttons from the normal screen. The
modifier builder template is also incorporated onto this screen. When needed, it simply replaces the
operational buttons instead of using a popup, which reduces the number of clicks required to reach
these features.
The Quick Service screen also has an auto-logout feature that automatically logs a user off once he
has completed an order. You may also do this manually by clicking the “Change Server” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
128
Quick Service
To use the Quick Service feature, go to the Back Office and navigate to Station Settings > Quick
Service Tab. Choose the types of service (Dine In, Bar Tab, Take Out, Drive Thru, or Delivery)
where you wish to use the Quick Service feature by selecting the corresponding checkboxes. Click
the “Save” and “Done” buttons to save the changes.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Recall Procedures
129
Chapter 15
Recall Procedures
Recall Operations
There are many reasons to recall an order so that it may be edited. You may need to recall an order
to add more items, change the order type, add more guests, etc. Any time an order must be changed,
the recall function is used. Following are several ways to recall an order:
1. Click the “Recall” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Click on an occupied table when in the Table Selection screen.
3. Click the “Recall” button in the Order Selection screen when choosing an order to settle.
4. Click the “Checks” button and select a check to edit in Order Entry.
5. Click the “Recall Order” button on the MISC screen in Order Entry.
The most common methods of recall are the “Recall” button on the Main POS screen and clicking
on an occupied table when in the Table Selection screen. This section only covers the “Recall”
button on the Main POS screen, since it is the main way to recall an order.
To recall an order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already created an order.
1. Click the “Recall” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code. This displays the Recall Order screen.
3. Select the Order Type to filter by from the buttons at the bottom of the screen. This reduces
the number of orders displayed at once. It also displays specific order type information.
4. (Optional) To see all employees’ orders, click the “My Orders” button. This toggles the
filter off, displaying orders created by all employees.
5. (Optional) To see orders that have not yet been settled as well as those that have already
been settled, click the “Open Orders” button. This toggles the filter off, displaying both
open orders and settled orders.
6. (Optional) Scan the barcode on the guest check.
a. The barcode only prints on the guest check if you use the Epson TM-T88 II/III
printer.
7. (Optional) Click “Print” to create a hard copy of the order instead of recalling it.
8. Click the order to recall. This displays the order in the Recalled Order screen.
a. There are four options on this screen: Edit Order, Print Order, Rush Order, and
Pager.
9. Click the “Edit Order” button. This displays the order in the Order Entry screen.
Batch Transfer
While in the Recall Order Selection screen, you may batch transfer all of your assigned orders to
another server. This is useful when ending a shift and you have open orders still assigned to you.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
130
Recall Procedures
Click the “Batch Transfer” button, next to the Total Orders Count information. Have the new server
enter his or her access code. All orders transfer to the new server automatically.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Void Procedures
131
Chapter 16
Void Procedures
There are two types of voids in Aldelo® POS: Order Voids and Item Voids. This chapter covers only
Order Voids. For information on performing Item Voids, please refer to the section in Chapter 8 of
this manual entitled “Voiding Items,” which may be found on page 97.
Void Operations
To void an order, use the void features in Aldelo® POS. Only certain employees should have access
to the void features. When all employees can void an order, there is temptation to take advantage of
the system and give free food to friends or family. There are many ways to void an order in the
system. This section covers only the Main POS screen “Void” button.
To void an order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created an order and have
inventory depletion turned on.
1. Click the “Void” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code. This displays the screen on which you select the order to be
voided.
a. This screen is nearly identical to the recall screen, and is used in the same manner.
3. Select the order to be voided or enter the order number in the Quick Search field.
4. Enter the reason for voiding this order and then click the “” button. This displays a screen
asking if you want to notify the kitchen or bar about the void operation.
a. If you use the same reasons repeatedly, create Quick Void Reasons in the Back
Office under Store Settings > Order Entry Tab. When Quick Void Reasons
have been created, they appear as buttons on the Void Reason screen. Select a
Quick Void Reason by clicking on its respective button.
5. Click “Yes” or “No.” If you use the inventory control features, the following screen asks if
this void resulted in waste or not.
6. Click “Waste” or “No Waste” (if using the inventory control features).
a. “Waste” depletes the inventory because the menu item was discarded.
b. “No Waste” does not deplete the inventory because the item was voided before
any inventory was used to prepare the menu item.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
132
Void Procedures
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Cashier Operations
133
Chapter 17
Cashier Operations
No Sale
The No Sale function opens the cash drawer. There is a security setting to control which employees
may perform this action, as well as a feature that uses a webcam to record a picture of the person
performing the No Sale.
Pay Out
The “Pay Out” button on the Main POS screen is used anytime a payout is performed. Payouts come
in several forms.
General Payout
General Payouts are used for situations such as paying for items purchased at a store when an
inventory item runs out and must be replaced immediately, or when a vendor wants to be paid cash.
To perform a general payout, follow the steps below.
1. Click the “Pay Out” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code.
3. Select the “General” payout type.
4. Enter the Pay Out To, Amount, and Description information.
5. Click the “” button.
Wage Advance
Sometimes an employee may need money for an emergency. Use the Wage Advance option in
payouts to advance money to employees prior to their receiving their normal paychecks.
To perform a wage advance, follow the steps below.
1. Click the “Pay Out” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code.
3. Select the “Wage Advance” payout type.
4. Choose the respective button for the employee to whom you wish to make the wage
advance.
5. Enter the Amount and Description of the wage advance.
6. Click the “” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
134
Cashier Operations
This wage advance may then be deducted from the employee’s next normal paycheck by the person
who prepares the payroll.
Manager Cash Out
This feature allows the manager to take money out of the cash register without reducing the
cashier’s liability amount. This is used to take cash out of the cash drawer and place it in a safe in
the event that the cash drawer contains too much cash.
To perform a manager cash out, follow the steps below.
1. Click the “Pay Out” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code.
3. Select the “Manager Cash Out” payout type. This displays a keypad allowing you to enter
the amount to be removed from the cash drawer. Two receipts print with the amount and a
space for the manager signature.
4. Have the manager sign both copies. Place one with the cash removed and the other inside
the cash drawer.
a. When counting the cash drawer at the end of the shift, count the cash out receipt
as part of the cash drawer amount.
Issuing Refunds
When performing a refund for any reason, use the refund function of Aldelo® POS.
To perform a refund, follow the steps below.
1. Click the “Refund” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code.
3. (Optional) Enter the order number to which this refund applies.
4. Enter the Refund Amount and the Reason in their respective fields. Select the Refund
Method from the dropdown list.
a. If you have integrated credit card processing enabled, you can issue a credit to the
customer’s credit card.
5. Click the “” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Gift Card Procedures
135
Chapter 18
Gift Card Procedures
Issuing Gift Cards
Gift cards are a very important aspect of running a restaurant. They provide a means of creating
customer loyalty and a way of introducing new customers to your restaurant. When a customer
purchases a gift card, you know they plan on returning. It may also indicate that the gift card is
intended as a gift to a friend that the customer wishes to expose to your restaurant’s food and
atmosphere. Gift Cards are always well received and are considered a good way to advertise your
restaurant to others.
Many functions can be performed with gift cards including issuing, recharging, multiple
simultaneous purchases, and checking balances.
To issue a gift card, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are signed in as a cashier.
1. Click the “Gift Certificate” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code. This displays the Gift Certificate screen.
3. (Optional - required if Account Number is not used): Swipe the gift card through the MSR
device while the cursor is in the MSR Card field.
4. (Optional - required if MSR card is not used): Enter the account number of the gift card or
certificate. This is the number printed on the gift card or certificate.
5. (Optional) Enter the expiration date of the card or certificate. Use the “/” button to divide
the date.
6. (Optional) Populate the Issued To and Presented By fields.
7. Enter the Total Amount face value of the gift card.
8. (Optional) Enter a Discount amount. This is used to charge the customer less than the gift
card face value. If you discount the entire amount, the gift card is free of charge.
9. (Optional) Click the “Add” button to create another card that is to be paid for in this same
transaction. You may create and sell as many gift cards as you wish in one transaction.
Repeat steps 3 – 9 for every card you wish to create in this transaction.
10. Select the Payment Type from the dropdown list. If you use integrated credit card
processing, a credit card may be used to pay for the transaction.
11. Enter the amount received.
12. Click the “Finish” button. The gift certificate receipt prints with the gift certificate number
on it.
Note: Some of the above functions may not be supported by Mercury Gift or other gift card
integrations. Also, the procedure may differ slightly when using integrated gift cards, Aldelo ® Gift
Card Server, or gift cards accepted through Aldelo ® EDC.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
136
Gift Card Procedures
Recharging Gift Cards
Gift cards can be reused and are often used like a secured credit card. If the customer’s balance is
low, you can offer to recharge the gift card to add more value to it.
To recharge a gift card, follow the steps below. These steps assume a gift card has been created and
the gift card or gift card account number is available.
1. Click the “Gift Certificate” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code.
3. Click the “Recharge” button. This displays a screen asking if you would like to search for
the gift card by MSR number/ID number or by the gift card account number.
a. MSR number is the number on the magnetic stripe of the MSR card.
b. The ID number is the “Internal Number” of the gift card or certificate.
c. The account number is the number that the system uses for its own tracking if an
internal ID number is not used.
4. Select “Yes” or “No.”
a. “Yes” searches by MSR Card or ID.
b. “No” searches by Account Number.
5. Swipe the gift card or enter the information from the gift card or certificate.
6. Process the gift card as a new transaction. The additional amount charged is added to the
existing gift card or certificate balance.
Checking Balances
If a customer wishes to check the balance of his or her gift card before using it or is just curious as
to the remaining balance, you may swipe the gift card through the MSR device while in the Main
POS screen of Aldelo® POS to display the balance.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Order Settlement Procedures
137
Chapter 19
Order Settlement Procedures
Cashier Settle Operations
When you are signed in as a cashier, you may settle orders to your cash drawer. If you are not the
cashier, a cashier must settle your orders for you. The only exception to this is if you are using Staff
Bank. You must have a cash drawer open on a station before you can settle orders. There are many
aspects to settling an order and there are several ways in which orders may be settled.
Settling in the Main POS Screen
The most commonly used method of settling an order is through the Main POS screen’s “Settle”
button. This button may be used by the cashier to perform settlement operations on any order in the
system.
To settle an order using the “Settle” button in the Main POS screen, follow the steps below.
1. Click the “Settle” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code. This displays the Select Order To Settle screen.
a. This screen is very similar to the recall screen and performs many of the same
functions.
3. Click on the order you wish to settle. This displays the Settle Order screen.
a. This screen has many options from which to choose:
i. Cash
ii. Check
iii. Visa
iv. MasterCard
v. American Express
vi. Discover
vii. Carte Blanche
viii. Diner’s Club
ix. ATM/Debit Card
x. House Account
xi. Gift Certificate
xii. Complimentary
xiii. Even Amount Split
xiv. Split
xv. Combine
xvi. Discount
xvii. Gratuity
xviii. Print
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
138
Order Settlement Procedures
Cash
For cash payment types, click the “Cash” button. A dialog box appears and prompts you to enter the
amount tendered. On the right side of this window are some typical amounts that may be tendered.
To use one of these, click on the button corresponding to the amount tendered. If you do not see the
exact amount tendered, enter it manually. Once you have entered the amount tendered, click the “”
button to finish the settlement.
Check
If the customer is paying by check, click the “Check” button. This takes you to the Check Scan
feature. Enter the bank routing number. You may either enter it from the hardware keyboard or you
may use the on-screen keyboard by clicking the button with the keyboard icon on it. This displays
the keypad where you may enter the number on the touch screen. If you make a mistake, click on
the button with the ‘X’ icon on it to erase the number. Next, enter the Checking Account Number in
the checking account number field in the same way. Alternatively, you may run the check through a
MICR (Magnetic Ink Character Recognition) device, if you have one attached to your system, to
populate the Bank Routing Number and Checking account Number Fields automatically. Finally,
enter the customer’s Driver License information. Once all of the information is entered, click the
“Verify” button. The system then prompts you to enter the amount tendered. Enter the amount
tendered to complete the transaction.
Credit Card
When a customer pays by credit card, there are two ways to settle the order. Without integrated
credit card processing, the transaction is processed outside of Aldelo® POS on a stand-alone bank
hardware terminal. In Aldelo® POS, the user simply selects the appropriate credit card type, enters
the approved transaction amount from the bank terminal (excluding any gratuity), and then clicks
the “” button.
With Aldelo® EDC integrated credit card processing, the Credit Card Processing screen displays,
allowing the user to process the credit card directly through Aldelo® POS. When using credit card
integration, you select the credit card type in the settle screen and swipe the customer’s card to
process the order. When the Two Step EDC Settle registry option is enabled, you can adjust the
credit card gratuity by using the green button next to the payment amount after the card has been
pre-authorized. Once you have adjusted the gratuity, click “Pay” to finalize the payment. If you do
not use two-step EDC settle, adjust all gratuities when closing the cash drawer.
Integrated payment processing is accomplished in online mode. When a customer’s credit card is
swiped, Aldelo® EDC forwards the payment and transaction information to the payment processor.
If the payment processor approves the transaction, an approval code is returned. This approval code
guarantees payment of the transaction up to the approved amount.
If the merchant’s internet connection fails, payment processing through Aldelo® EDC may be placed
into offline mode. In offline mode, all credit card transactions are approved, regardless of account
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Order Settlement Procedures
139
status. Offline mode allows the merchant to continue accepting credit card payments while the
connection is down and to submit them for approval at a later time when the connection is restored.
WARNING: When using offline mode, transactions are not approved until
online processing is restored. The merchant accepts the risk of having these
transaction declined by the processor at that time. Please note that
transactions processed in offline mode that are declined when online
processing is restored are not stored for re-processing and may result in a
monetary loss to the merchant. To fully understand the inherent risks of
offline processing and for strategies to help mitigate these risks, please contact
your payment processor.
To place Aldelo® EDC into offline mode, from the main screen of Aldelo® POS, navigate to
Operations > Receive Payments. Click the “EDC Currently in Live Mode” button. The button
changes color and the button caption changes to “EDC Currently in Offline Mode.” Return to
Aldelo® POS and continue processing your customer orders as usual. To return to online mode,
from the main screen of Aldelo® POS, navigate to Operations > Receive Payments. Click the
“EDC Currently in Offline Mode” button. The button changes color and the button caption changes
to “EDC Currently in Live Mode.” As soon as online mode is restored, all of the transactions
processed while Aldelo® EDC was in offline mode are submitted to your payment processor for
approval. The EDC Offline Recovery window appears, displaying a list of the offline transactions
that were processed and their approval or denial status. Transactions from this point forward are
processed in live mode and are approved or declined immediately.
ATM/Debit Card
If the customer wishes to pay with an ATM/Debit card, use this option. For the processing of debit
card transactions, Aldelo® EDC may be integrated with Aldelo® POS. In the United States, this
integration is currently only supported by PPI and Mercury Payment Systems. In Canada, this
integration is currently only supported by Mercury Payment Systems. When using Aldelo ® EDC
with an integrated processor, clicking the “ATM/Debit Card” button on the Settle Order screen and
swiping the customer’s card through the MSR device enables the pinpad device where the customer
must enter his or her PIN (Personal Identification Number). When using a processor that does not
integrate with Aldelo® EDC, clicking the “ATM/Debit Card” button prompts the user to enter the
amount processed on the bank terminal. Enter the amount and then click the “” button.
Gift Certificate
Click the “Gift Certificate” button to display the screen asking how you would like to search for the
Gift Card or Certificate. Choose the search method and enter the information required. The
remaining balance shows on the receipt after the customer has paid with a Gift Certificate.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
140
Order Settlement Procedures
House Account
Use this option to settle orders for customers who have In House Charge Accounts. These may be
setup and maintained in the Back Office by selecting the “In House Charge Accounts” button.
To settle using the customer’s house account, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
created a house account for this customer.
1. Click the “House Account” button.
2. Choose the lookup type to find the customer’s account.
3. Depending on the chosen lookup type, enter the customer’s information.
4. Review the customer’s information.
5. Select “Yes” or “No” when asked if you wish to charge it to the customer’s account.
6. If “Yes” is selected above, enter the amount to charge to the account.
a. If less than the entire amount due is charged to the customer’s house account,
select an additional payment method by which to pay the remaining balance.
7. Click the “” button to complete the transaction.
Complimentary
This allows the manager to “Comp” the meal and enter any Discount amount. This is useful for
managers wishing to discount meals. This button can also be set to require a certain security level to
access it. All complimentary discounts are treated as Cash Discounts and appear in reports as such.
Settling in the Order Entry Screen
When using the “Settle” button in the Order Entry screen, the order is sent to the kitchen while at
the same time taking the user to the Settle screen. This screen is exactly the same as the Settle screen
when using the “Settle” button in the Main POS screen.
Settling Using Staff Bank
When an employee uses Staff Bank, their settlement options change a bit. In the Order Entry screen,
the “Cash Tender” and “Settle” buttons are replace with a “Staff Bank” button. When this button is
clicked, the Settle screen displays, allowing you to settle the order to your staff bank. You also have
the option to “Pay to Staff Bank” in the Recalled Order screen.
To settle using the Order Entry screen method, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
setup staff banking properly, are in the Order Entry screen, and have open the order you wish to
settle.
1. Click on the “Staff Bank” button. This displays the Settle Order screen.
2. Click on the payment method you wish to use.
3. Enter the amount the customer is paying. The Change Due screen displays unless the
amount entered was insufficient to cover the entire check. In this case, the Settle Order
screen reappears, requiring the user to repeat steps two and three, above.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Order Settlement Procedures
a.
141
When using Frequent Diner tracking, click the “Freq Diner Track” button on the
Change Due screen to add this purchase to the customer’s frequent diner account
balance. Follow the on-screen instructions to do so.
To settle using the Recall Order method, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
created an order.
1. Click “Recall” on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code. This displays the Recall Order screen.
3. Click on the order you wish to recall.
4. Click the “Pay To Staff Bank” button.
5. From this point, settle the order as usual.
Settling Using Driver Money Drop
If you use the Driver Money Drop feature, you must settle all orders that are not cash orders before
selecting the Money Drop feature. Since Credit Cards and Checks are not supported with the Money
Drop feature, these must be settled separately. Enable the Money Drop feature in the Back Office by
navigating to Store Settings > Services Tab > Delivery Tab and selecting the Enable Driver
Money Drop checkbox.
To use the Driver Money Drop feature, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
delivered orders, are using the Driver Dispatch screen, and have orders to settle.
1. Make sure you have settled any orders paid by check or credit card.
a. This step must be completed before using the money drop feature.
2. Click the “Driver” button in the Main POS screen.
3. Highlight your name, click the “Money Drop” button, and enter your access code.
4. The Driver Money Drop Report displays. You may either print it or click the “OK” button.
5. Next, the Cashier Login screen displays. The cashier or staff bank employee who is
collecting the driver’s money drop must enter his or her access code.
6. In the Money Count screen that follows, the cashier enters the money collected from the
driver. Enter the count of each denomination of currency and coin collected from the
driver.
7. When done, click the “Finish” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
142
Order Settlement Procedures
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Closing Procedures
143
Chapter 20
Closing Procedures
Closing the Cash Drawer
When all orders are settled, the cash drawer must be counted and closed out from the system.
To close out a cashier, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have closed all orders.
1. Click the “Cashier Out” button on the Main POS screen, enter your access code, and click
the “” button.
2. Select the cash tray to sign out.
3. (Optional) This displays the Adjust Gratuity screen. To adjust a gratuity, highlight the
desired order and enter the new gratuity amount by using the numeric keypad. After the
amount is entered, you may process the gratuity by clicking the “Enter” button. Select the
next order requiring a gratuity adjustment. Continue in this manner until all gratuities
requiring adjustment have been addressed. When finished, you may move to the Money
Count screen by clicking the “Settle All” button.
4. The Money Count screen appears with all of the charges and checks received.
5. Verify all checks and charges and check them off on the Money Count screen. Enter all of
the cash that is in the drawer. This includes Manager Cash Out receipts.
6. Click the “Finish” button. If there is a discrepancy in the drawer, the Register Discrepancy
screen appears and shows the discrepancy amount. Enter the reason for the discrepancy and
click the “” button. This deactivates the cash register features for this station.
Tech Tip: All Credit Card Gratuities should be removed before completing the
Cashier Sign Out process. If you leave the credit card tips in the drawer, the
drawer will be over by the amount of the gratuities.
Quick Sign Out
Use the Quick Sign Out feature when you need to quickly switch a cash tray or move to another
station. This feature is useful to switch out a cash tray and sign it back in at a station in a manager’s
office for safe counting of the money. This is an easy way of relocating a cash tray to another station
for any reason.
1. Click the “Cashier Out” button on the Main POS screen, enter your access code, and click
the “” button.
2. Select the cash tray to sign out.
3. (Optional) Click “Done” to bypass the gratuity screen.
4. Click “Cancel” on the Money Count Screen.
5. Select “Quick Sign Out (No Money Count Performed).”
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
144
Closing Procedures
6.
7.
8.
After the cash tray has been through a quick sign out, the cash tray is available for a quick
sign in. Only the employee that did the Quick Sign Out will be able to sign the tray back in.
At the new terminal, click the “Cashier In” button on the main POS screen. Enter your
access code and click the “” button.
Select the “Re-Open Cash Tray” button to activate this cash tray for this employee on this
station.
Closing Your Staff Bank
If you used Staff Bank during the day instead of a cash drawer, you must close your staff bank when
your shift is finished. To be able to close your staff bank, you must have already closed all your
orders or transferred them to another server.
To end your staff bank, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have closed all your orders
and do not have any open orders outstanding.
1. Click “Time Card” on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code and click the “” button.
3. Click on “End Staff Bank.” This displays the Staff Bank Liability Report.
a. You may either print it or click the “OK” button to go the next screen.
4. Click the “OK” button on the Staff Bank Liability Report screen. The Money Count screen
displays.
5. Enter the count of each denomination of currency and coin you are turning in. Also, verify
each check and charge receipt.
6. Click the “Finish” button. This displays the Money Count Confirmation screen.
7. Click “Yes” or “No” to either complete this transaction or go back to edit the amounts
again.
8. If a discrepancy exists, enter the reason for the discrepancy in the notes field of the
Register Discrepancy screen and then click the “” button. Manager approval may be
required.
Once you have closed out your staff bank, check with the shift manager to go over the Staff Bank
Liability Report to make sure your amounts are correct.
Clocking Out
To clock out, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are clocked in and all your orders are
settled.
1. Click the “Time Card” button on the Main POS screen, enter your access code, and then
click the “” button.
2. The Employee Time Card screen displays with the name and job title of the employee.
3. Click the “Clock Out” button. The clock out time displays.
a. If you still have open orders, you are prompted to transfer them to another server.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Closing Procedures
145
Running a Closing Report
The Closing Report shows the sales and other important closing information about your restaurant
for the report date. The closing report should be run every day and must be run if the inventory
system is used.
To run a Closing Report, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have closed all orders,
closed all cash drawers and staff banks, and everyone has clocked out.
1. Click “Operations” on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code and then click the “” button.
3. Click on the “Revenue Center” button.
4. Click the “Closing Report” button.
5. Select a date on which to report. Use the Year, Month, and Day buttons to select the data
you wish to report on and then click the “Select” button.
6. Click “Yes” or “No” when asked if you wish to review the access denied logs.
a. If you have not closed all your cash drawers and staff banks, you are notified
which banks are still open. These must closed before a final report may be
generated.
7. The Closing Report displays. You may print it or just view it and click the “OK” button.
a. Several sections of the closing report are turned off by default. To view or hide
these sections, change the values in the registry settings to “YES” or “NO,”
depending on your desired result.
i. Daily Closing Hide Employee Time Cards
ii. Daily Closing Hide Gratuity Recap
iii. Daily Closing Show Tender Details
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
146
Closing Procedures
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Manager Operations
147
Chapter 21
Manager Operations
Time Cards
Editing Time Cards
When employees make mistakes on their time cards, the time cards should be adjusted to reflect the
correct times. This is done by editing the time card in the Edit Unpaid Time Cards screen.
To edit unpaid time cards, follow the steps below. These steps assume an employee has clocked in
and out at least once.
1. Click on the “Time Card” button in the Main POS screen, enter your access code, and click
on the “” button. This displays the Employee Time Card screen with the employee’s
name at the top.
2. If you are a manager, click on the “Edit Time Cards” button to display the Edit Unpaid
Time Cards screen.
3. On the left, highlight the name of the employee whose time card needs editing.
4. Below the employee names list, highlight the date you wish to edit. The corresponding time
card displays.
5. When you click inside the Clock In Time field, it turns green. When the field is green, the
field is active and may be edited.
6. Use the Hour, Minute, and Date buttons to change the time in the field.
7. Click and edit each field that must be changed.
8. When finished, click the “Save” button. You are prompted to confirm the changes.
Orders
Reverting or Re-Opening an Order
If an order has been closed and must be re-opened, you can revert the order and change its status
back to open. This allows you to make changes to the order. This is a manager-only function and
should be protected from use by regular employees.
To revert a closed order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created an order and
settled it.
1. Click “Recall” on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code and click on the “” button.
3. Click the “Open Orders” button. This changes the button caption to read “All Orders” and
shows all orders that have been settled. By default, settled orders are not displayed.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
148
Manager Operations
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click the order you wish to revert. This displays the Recalled Order screen.
Click the “Re-Open Check” button. The system prompts you for a manager’s access code.
a. The security for this is called “Access Daily Closing Report” and is located in the
Back Office under Security Settings.
Enter a manager access code and click on the “” button. Confirm that you wish to re-open
the check.
The check is now editable and has a “Partial Payment” status set.
a. The status is “Partial Payment” because the payment has been applied to the order
but it is no longer closed.
You are now able to treat this order like a normal order and may open it for editing. If you need to
change the amount paid, first remove the current payment from the order. Do this by clicking on the
Red button next to the payment in the Settle Order screen.
Cash Drawers
Reverting or Re-Opening a Cash Drawer
If you have already closed a cash drawer and need to adjust it, you may revert the cash drawer back
to an open status. You can only revert cash drawers that are less than 3 days old. If it is 3 days old or
older, you cannot revert it for any reason.
To revert a cash drawer, follow the steps below (these steps must be performed by a user with a
manager’s level or higher security access code). These steps assume you have closed a cash drawer
or staff bank and it is less than 3 days old.
1. Click the “Operations” button on the Main POS screen.
2. Enter your access code and click the “” button.
3. Click the “Revenue Center” button.
4. Click the “Re-Open Cashier” button. You are prompted to confirm the revert operation.
5. Click the “Yes” button.
6. Click on the bank you wish to re-open and confirm the action.
a. Make sure you have the correct bank by referring to the “Liab. #” on the buttons.
Cross-reference this by using the Bank Liability option in Revenue Center.
7. Click “Yes” to confirm the operation.
Operations Center
Receive Payments Section
This section is used for receiving payments. There are three different choices for receiving payments
in this section. Below are descriptions of what each of these choices do and how to use them.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Manager Operations
149
Pay In House Charges
This feature is used to collect payments on In House Charge Accounts.
To make payments on in house charge accounts, follow the steps below. These steps assume you
have created a customer account, created an in house charge account, and paid an order using the in
house charge account.
1. In the Main POS screen, click the “Operations” button, enter your access code, and click
the “” button.
2. Click the “Receive Payments” button.
3. Click the “Pay In House Charges” button. This displays a search screen where you choose
the search method.
4. Choose the search method to find the customer’s account and enter the required
information. This displays the screen where you can make payments.
5. Review the orders to be paid. You may select them and print them for the customer to
review as well. These statements print on the receipt printer.
6. Select the payment type and enter the amount tendered. The change due screen appears and
shows the change due (if any). The charges are credited in chronological order (payments
are credited to the oldest order[s] first).
7. When finished. Click the "Done” button.
Pay Bad Checks
This feature allows you to collect payments on bad checks written to your restaurant.
To receive payment for a bad check, follow the steps below. These steps assume a bad check has
been created in the system.
1. In the Main POS screen, click the “Operations” button, enter your access code, and click
the “” button.
2. Click the “Receive Payments” button.
3. Click the “Pay Bad Checks” button. This displays a screen allowing you to select the check
to which you wish to apply a payment.
4. Select the check. Information about the check displays, along with options on how it is to
be paid.
a. You may also click the “?” button to view even more information about the check.
5. Select a payment source.
6. Select a payment method.
7. Click the “” button.
8. On the Amount Received screen that follows, enter the payment amount received and then
click the “” button.
9. Click the “Done” button on the Change Due screen.
Auto Pay All Open Deliveries
This feature allows you to pay all of the open delivery orders to the cashier using Cash as the form
of payment. To use this feature, you must have the Blind Cashier Close Out box checked. This
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
150
Manager Operations
option may be found in the Back Office under Store Settings > Revenue Tab > Cashier Tab. The
system assumes that all of the orders were paid in full for the correct amounts using cash.
To automatically pay all open deliveries, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
created delivery orders and have delivered them. They also assume you have checked the option
named Blind Cashier Close Out in the Back Office under Store Settings > Revenue Tab > Cashier
Tab.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In the Main POS screen, click the “Operations” button, enter your access code, and click
the “” button.
Click the “Receive Payments” button.
Click the “Auto Pay All Open Deliveries” button. This displays a confirmation window
asking if you want to pay all delivery orders to the cashier.
Click “Yes” or “No.”
Revenue Center Section
This section is used to do various types of revenue collection and organization. Below are
subsections for each of the features in the Revenue Center with descriptions on what each feature
does and how to use it. You may access the Revenue Center by clicking the “Operations” button on
the Main POS screen, entering your access code, and clicking the “” button. Next, click the
“Revenue Center” button.
Closing Report
For information on how to create a closing report, please see the section in Chapter 20 of this
manual entitled “Running a Closing Report,” which may be found on page 145.
Z Report
The Z Report shows the Total Net Sales to date and, for security purposes, this number cannot be
changed for any reason, even if orders are deleted from the database. Some countries require this
report and we include it to comply with international laws. This feature allows you to run a Z Report
based on the current up to date sales information or view a past Z Report based on the Z Report’s
number. All orders must be closed out and all cashiers, including Staff Bank employees, must be
signed out before a Z Report may be run. You may enable this report in the Back Office by
navigating to Station Settings > Other Options Tab > Extra Settings > Special Z Report.
Change the key value from “No” to “Yes.”
Bank Report
This feature allows you to review or print the Cashier/Staff Bank liability report. This report lists the
cashiers’ names, when they signed in, when they signed out, and what orders they took.
To print out or view a Bank Liability report, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have
started at least one cash drawer or staff bank.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Manager Operations
1.
2.
3.
4.
151
In the Main POS screen, click the “Operations” button, enter your access code, and click
the “” button.
Click the “Revenue Center” button.
Click the “Bank Report” button. You are prompted to enter the Bank Liability Report
Number.
a. The Bank Liability Number may be obtained by using the Register Report as
explained later in this section.
Enter the Bank Liability Report Number and click the “” button. This displays the
liability report for the cash drawer or staff bank, whichever was used.
Register Report
This feature gives you a report of the register activities for all of the registers on the specified date.
To print out or view a Register Report, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have started
at least one cash drawer or staff bank.
1. Click the “Register Report” button.
2. Choose a date and click the “Select” button. This displays the report, allowing you to
review it. To print the report, click the “Print” button.
Use the Bank Liability Number to display more detailed information about a cash drawer or staff
bank.
Bank Deposit
This feature lets you count the bank deposit money and print out the deposit preparation receipt. To
use this feature, click the “Bank Deposit” button. In the Money Count screen that displays, enter all
of the money to be deposited to the bank. After you have completed the Money Count screen, click
the “Finish” button to print the Bank Deposit Slip and the Bank Deposit Money Count receipts.
Gift Certificate List
This feature allows you to review a list of all of the gift certificates issued. To use this feature, click
the “Gift Certificate List” button to review the information. To export the list to a format that may
be read in Microsoft Excel, click the “Export” button. A confirmation window appears, confirming
that the report was exported successfully. Use an Excel-compatible spreadsheet program to edit the
report. To print the report, click the “Print” button.
Cust. Credit List
This feature allows you to view a list of all customer credits. This report may be exported or printed.
Order Pmt List
This feature allows you to review the payment types and tender amounts of the orders that the
registers have collected. This report may also be exported or printed.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
152
Manager Operations
Bad Check List
This feature allows you to review a list of all the bad checks recorded in your restaurant. To see all
bad checks, when you open the window, select the “Show All Checks” check box. To edit a bad
check, highlight it and click the Edit” button. To add a new bad check, click the “New” button and
enter the required information to create the bad check file.
Daily Receipt Summary
This feature allows you to print out all the guest receipts for the specified business day. This is a
very lengthy printout, so make sure you have enough paper in your receipt printer to do this. The
guest receipts are printed in a condensed format to save paper and will be on one continuous page.
Use this feature with caution. If you have a busy day and click this button, you may end up using an
entire roll of receipt paper.
Re-Open Cashier
Re-opening a cashier is useful to correct any mistakes discovered after the bank was closed.
To re-open a cashier, follow the steps below. These steps assume the cashier’s bank is closed.
1. Click the “Re-Open Cashier” button.
2. On the Revert Signed Out Cashier window, click “Yes.”
3. Select the cashier to re-open from the Select Cashier Out Record screen. To be sure you
choose the correct cash tray, check the Liab. # and match it to the number on the Cashier
Liability Report.
4. On the confirmation screen that displays, click the “Yes” button.
Re-Open Deposit
This feature is used to revert a bank deposit. To use this feature, select the “Re-Open Deposit”
button. A confirmation window appears, asking you to confirm that you indeed wish to re-open a
deposit. Click the “Yes” button. On the next popup window, enter the number of the bank deposit
slip you wish to re-open. A message confirms that the deposit was re-opened successfully.
Next Day Transfer
This button is used to transfer all orders to the next business day. The order time is reset to one
second after the daily start time. This allows the restaurant to keep orders open but still be able to
close the restaurant for the day. To use this feature, you must enable the option called 24 Hour
Operation Mode in the Back Office under Store Settings > Other Tab.
Break Missed Report
This feature displays a report that shows all employees who failed to clock out for their scheduled
break periods on time. To display the report, click the “Break Missed Report” button and then select
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Manager Operations
153
the desired date in the Select Report Date window. When finished, click the “Select” button. The
Break Missed Report displays on the screen. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the report, if
necessary. This report may be viewed on the screen or a copy may be printed, if desired.
Close EDC Batch
Clicking the “Close EDC Batch” button sends a message through Aldelo ® EDC to your payment
processor to close your current batch. Please note that this feature can only be used if integrated
payment processing with Aldelo® EDC is enabled.
Frequent Diners Section
New Freq. Diner
This feature is used to add a new frequent diner account to the system.
To add a new frequent diner, follow the steps below. These steps assume that an account has been
created for the customer.
1. Click the “New Freq. Diner” button.
2. Enter the customer phone number and click the “” button.
3. Fill in the customer information. The First Name and Last Name are required fields.
4. When finished, click the “” button.”
This feature creates both a customer record and a frequent diner account for the customer.
Track Order
This feature is used to track orders for the frequent diner feature.
To track an order for the frequent diner program, follow the steps below.
1. Click the “Track Order” button.
2. Enter the customer’s phone number and click the “” button.”
3. Enter the number of the order you wish to track and click the “” button.”
4. A message window lets the user know that the order has been successfully tracked or that
the order cannot be tracked.
a. If the order cannot be tracked, the order has not met the specified minimum
requirements needed to qualify this order for tracking in the frequent diner feature.
Redemption
This feature manually controls the redemption of the frequent diner points that the customer has
earned.
Follow the steps below to manually redeem credits for frequent diner orders. These steps assume
orders have been tracked for use with the frequent diner system.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
154
Manager Operations
1.
2.
3.
Click the “Redemption” button.
Enter the customer’s phone number and click the “” button.”
Enter the credit amount to be given for this customer’s orders.
Note: If you have automatic redemption of frequent diner-tracking points enabled, this procedure is
handled automatically by Aldelo® POS.
Freq. Diner Acct. List
This feature displays a list of all frequent diner accounts with the total tracked order count and total
tracked order amounts for each account.
In House Charge Section
In this section you may review and maintain all of your in house charge accounts. Access this
feature from the Main POS screen by clicking the “Operations” button, entering your access code,
and then clicking the “” button. Next, click the “In House Charge” button. There are four
subsections in this section. Below are descriptions of these subsections and how to use each of them.
Maintain In House Accounts
This feature allows you to add or update current in house charge accounts. To use this feature, click
the “Maintain In House Accounts” button. The Maintain In House Charge Accounts screen displays.
Here you may pick a customer from the list to review his or her information. To add a new account,
click the “New” button and enter the customer’s information. Click the “Save” button to save your
changes. When finished, click the “Done” button.
Create In House Statements
This feature allows you to issue statements to your customers for accounts that are due.
To create statements for your in house accounts, follow the steps below. These steps assume you
have created at least one in house account for a customer and there are charges to that account.
1. Click the “Create In House Statements” button.
2. Select the accounts for which you wish to generate statements by selecting their respective
checkboxes. Multiple accounts may be selected.
3. Click the “Done” button. The statements appear on screen.
4. There are several options on the preview screen.
a. “Previous” navigates to the previous statement.
b. “Next” navigates to the next statement.
c. “Clear Current” removes this statement from the displayed list.
d. “Print Current” prints the statement currently being viewed.
e. “Print All” prints all the statements in the displayed list.
These statements are arranged so that they fit in a normal business-size (#10) window envelope.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Manager Operations
155
In House Account List
This feature allows you to review a list of all of your in house accounts. Click the “In House
Account List” button to display the report. It may be reviewed on-screen, printed, or exported.
Customer Files
This feature allows you to review all of your customer files. Click the “Customer Files” button to
display the Maintain Customer Records screen. Here you may review a customer’s file by clicking
the phone number in the list on the left side of the screen. To add a new customer file to the list,
click the “New” button and enter the required information. Click the “Save” button to save your
changes.
Inventory Activities Section
This section allows you to review inventory items, purchase order information, and other reports. To
access this section from the Main POS screen, click the “Operations” button and then click the
“Inventory Activities” button. There are several buttons in this section. Below is a description of
what each of these buttons does.
Phy. Count Sheet
This feature prints a list of all your inventory items. This list may be used when performing a
physical inventory count. The list shows the inventory item name, the inventory item location, the
calculated current quantity on hand, and a blank line where the actual counted quantity is entered.
To use this feature, click the “Phy. Count Sheet” button to display the Physical Inventory Count
Sheet. You may view the sheet on-screen, export, or print it, as desired.
Phy. Inv. Count
Use this feature to record the physical inventory count actually on hand.
To record your physical inventory, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have inventory
entered in the system.
1. Click on the “Phy. Inv. Count” button to display the Physical Inventory Count screen.
2. Highlight the inventory item for which you wish to enter a new quantity.
3. Enter the actual quantity on hand in the “New Qty” field.
a. This is the total quantity you now have on hand based upon your physical
count, not the quantity you are adding to the count.
b. If desired, enter the reason you are making an adjustment to the calculated
count.
4. When finished, click the “Record” button.
a. Once you click the “Record” button, the system exits the screen.
If you scan all your inventory items into a scanning device when performing your physical
inventory count, export that information to a text file on your computer. You may then click the
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
156
Manager Operations
“Inv. Download” button on the Physical Inventory Count screen and select the text file containing
the scanned inventory items. Click the “Download” button to import the file to the software and
update the actual physical inventory count.
Inv. Prep. Forecast
This feature prepares a report that shows how many of each item’s inventory units the kitchen
should prepare for the day. This information is based upon the past inventory usage history for up to
the prior six weeks for the same day of the week. Please note that proper menu recipes and
inventory depletion must be defined and enabled for this feature to work properly.
To use this feature, click on the “Inv. Prep. Forecast” button and select the report date to display the
report. The report may be exported or printed, as desired.
Hourly Inventory Usage
This feature displays a report that shows the amount of each inventory item used in the preparation
of your menu items broken down by the hour of the day. To use this feature, click the “Hourly
Inventory Usage” button to display the Hourly Inventory Usage Report screen. Select the desired
date range by adjusting the Report From and Report To dates at the top of the screen. The report
may be exported or printed, as desired.
Inventory Items
The Inventory Items feature allows you to create and maintain your inventory items. This feature
may also be accessed from the Back Office by navigating to Setup > Inventory Setup > Inventory
Items. To use this feature, click the “Inventory Items” button to display the Inventory Items screen.
Inventory items may be reviewed or edited. New items may be added by clicking the “New” button.
Enter the required information for the new inventory item and click the “Save” button. For more
information on using this feature, see Chapter 5 – Information Data Entry – Inventory Setup –
Inventory Items, on page 75 of this manual.
Menu Recipe
Here you define the menu recipes for your menu items. You must create menu recipes if you wish to
use Inventory Depletion. To use this feature, click the “Menu Recipe” button to display the Menu
Recipe Editor screen. This feature may also be accessed from the Back Office by navigating to
Setup > Inventory Setup > Menu Recipe Editor. For more information on using this feature, see
Chapter 5 – Information Data Entry – Inventory Setup – Menu Recipe Editor, on page 77 of this
manual.
Qty Count Down Setup
This feature allows the setup of a countdown of the quantity remaining for each of the items on your
menu. To use this feature, click the “Qty Count Down Setup” button. Next, return to the main order
entry screen. Each of the order type buttons is now relabeled as a “Count Down Setup” button. Click
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Manager Operations
157
any one of these relabeled buttons to open the order entry screen. To add countdown quantities,
select each menu item in turn. Upon selection of a menu item, the Current Count Down Qty entry
window appears. Enter the quantity of the menu item currently in stock. Repeat this procedure for
each menu item under each of your menu item categories. When finished, return to Inventory
Activities and deselect the “Qty Count Down Setup” button. Now, when you create an order, the
quantity of the menu item that is currently in stock displays in the upper-right corner of its button.
Selection of the button adds the menu item to the guest’s order and decrements the current quantity
in stock by one unit. When a menu item’s count reaches zero, it may no longer be added to a
customer’s order.
Shopping List
If you are using automatic inventory depletion and an inventory item falls below the Pack Size
Reorder Point specified on the Inventory Items screen, the item is placed on the Shopping List. This
list shows what items must be ordered to bring the inventory back to acceptable levels. The report
may be exported or printed, as desired.
New PO (Purchase Order)
This feature allows you to create a new purchase order when ordering items from vendors. The
fields are described below.








Purchase Order #:This is the number assigned to the purchase order. If it is a new purchase
order, the field displays “New” until the purchase order is saved.
Account Number: Enter the account number for the vendor. This number displays while
reviewing purchase orders.
Vendor Name: Enter the name of the vendor supplying the items.
Purchase Order Date: Enter the order date for the items.
Barcode Scan: Enter the item’s barcode information. The easiest way to do so is to place
the cursor in the Barcode Scan field and then scan the UPC barcode on the item.
Inventory Item Name: Enter the name of the inventory item. As you type, the software
attempts to determine the inventory item name based upon what is entered so far (autocompletion).
Quantity Ordered: Enter the quantity ordered.
Price Per Quantity: Enter the price per quantity of the ordered item.
When all information is entered for the item, click the “Add” button to add the item to the list.
Repeat the steps above for each item you wish to order from this vendor. When finished, click the
“Done” button. To print the purchase order, click the “Preview” button, followed by the “Print”
button.
Review PO
This feature allows you to review existing purchase orders.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
158
Manager Operations
To review an existing Purchase Order, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created
a purchase order.
1. Click the “Review PO” button.
2. On the Purchase Order Selection screen, select the purchase order to review by clicking the
name of the purchase order and then clicking the “Review” button.
a. To delete a purchase order, select the desired purchase order from the list and
click the “Delete” button.
3. Once in the Purchase Order screen, the purchase order may be edited.
Receive Items
This feature allows you to receive inventory items from your vendors. It records the items received
from the vendor and calculates the inventory items’ quantities on hand and the costs per quantity.
To use the “Receive Items” feature, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have created a
purchase order.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click the “Receive Items” button to display the Receive Inventory Items screen.
Select the date range by entering dates in the “Earliest PO Date” and “Received Date”
fields at the top of the screen.
Select the purchase order to receive from the drop-down list at the top of the screen.
Review the items on the purchase order. If all information is correct, click the “Finish”
button.
a. If any information is incorrect or blank, highlight the item and click the “Edit”
button.
b. To add an item that is not on the purchase order, click the “Add” button.
c. To remove an item from a purchase order, highlight the item and click the
“Remove” button.
Once you are satisfied that the list is complete and correct, click the “Finish” button.
Other Tools Section
This section contains several options not accessible through other areas of the software, and
provides shortcuts to certain features in the Back Office. To access the tools in this section from the
Main POS screen, click the “Operations” button, enter your access code, and click the “” button.
Next, click the “Other Tools” button.
Caller ID Log
This feature allows you to review the entire Caller ID Log (as long as you have your Caller ID
configured and working properly). To use this feature, click the “Caller ID Log” button to display
the Caller ID Logs screen. Review the logs on this screen by highlighting a call and clicking the
“Details” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Manager Operations
159
Caller ID Switch
This feature is used to turn your Caller ID on and off. If you have the Caller ID feature configured in
your system, you do not have to worry about this button.
Calculator
The “Calculator” button provides the user with a shortcut to open the calculator feature of Microsoft
Windows.
To Training Mode
This feature is used to turn the training mode on and off. Training mode allows the POS system to
be used to train new employees without recording the training transactions as actual sales. To use
this feature, click the “To Training Mode” button to display the confirmation screen. When you
click the “Yes” button, a confirmation window appears, confirming that you are now in training
mode. To switch back to live mode, click the “To Live Mode” button (this button appears in the
same screen location where the “To Training Mode” button was previously). When the confirmation
screen appears, click the “Yes” button. Another confirmation window appears, confirming that you
have now reverted to live mode.
Note: If you notice that your training database is not up to date, navigate to the directory where
Aldelo® POS is installed and delete the Training.mdb file. This forces the software to create another
Training database file using the current information in you live database. Do not delete any other
files in this directory!
Assign Table
This feature allows a manager to assign tables to servers without going into the Back Office. The
same security level required to run a closing report allows access to this feature.
Add Cash To Bank
This feature allows you to add money to the start amount of either a staff bank or a cashier. To use
this feature, click the “Add Cash To Bank” button and enter the Bank Liability Number. You are
prompted to enter the amount to add to the bank start amount. Enter the amount and click the “”
button.
Customer Incidents
This feature allows you to record bad telephone calls to your restaurant. Click on the “Customer
Incidents” button and enter the phone number from which the call came. The New Customer
Incident screen appears, allowing you to enter the number of the order in the Order # field, whether
any food was wasted due to the call, and any details about the bad call. This information displays in
the Customer Information screen while entering take out or delivery orders. While doing so, the
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
160
Manager Operations
“Customer Incidents” button flashes, warning the user that this customer has caused problems
previously. Click this button to see the details of the incident.
Driver Summary
This feature displays a report of each driver’s net sales, delivery compensation, and number of
deliveries. To use this feature, click the “Driver Summary” button. The report may be viewed,
printed, or exported to a text file, as desired.
Emp. Still Working
This feature allows you to review a list of all the employees still working (clocked in). To use this
feature, click the “Emp. Still Working” button to display the Employee Still Working Report. The
report displays the employees’ names and the dates and times that each clocked in.
Edit Work Schedule
To use this feature, click the “Edit Work Schedule” button and select the employee whose schedule
you wish to change. This feature may also be accessed from the Back Office by navigating to Setup
> Employee Setup > Employee Schedules. For more information on using this feature, see Chapter
5 – Information Data Entry – Employee Setup – Employee Schedules, on page 54 of this manual.
Open Order Report
This feature displays a list of all open orders and lists the server for each. Click the “Open Order
Report” button to display the Open Order Report screen. Here you may review or print the report, as
desired.
Media Open
When using the Aldelo® Media Display software in integrated mode with Aldelo® POS, click the
“Media Open” button to enable the display of the customer receipt information on the Media
Display Client monitor on this terminal.
Media Clear
When using the Aldelo® Media Display software in integrated mode with Aldelo® POS, click the
“Media Clear” button, if necessary, to remove the current customer receipt information from the
Media Display Client monitor on this terminal.
Media Options
When using the Aldelo® Media Display software in integrated mode with Aldelo® POS, click the
“Media Options” button to display the Settings window of the media display software. Click the
button again to hide the window. The Settings window allows the user to adjust the port settings,
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Manager Operations
161
refresh the colors, view the picture size, view the log file, open or close the station, exit the Media
Display Client software, etc., on this terminal.
Media Close
When using the Aldelo® Media Display software in integrated mode with Aldelo® POS, click the
“Media Close” button to disable the display of the customer receipt information on the Media
Display Client monitor on this terminal.
Media Exit
When using the Aldelo® Media Display software in integrated mode with Aldelo® POS, click the
“Media Exit” button to exit the Media Display Client software on this terminal.
Menu Item Sales By Category
This feature allows you to choose a category and view menu item sales based upon that category.
You may also choose to view your menu item sales for all categories. This report shows quantity
and sales information for each individual menu item. This report may be printed or exported.
Sales By Menu Item Report
This feature generates a report of sales listed by menu item. The list is sorted alphabetically in
ascending order. This is a shortcut to the Sales By Menu Item Report in the Back Office.
Sales By Category Report
This feature generates a report of sales for each category. This is a shortcut to the Sales By Category
Report in the Back Office.
Server Gratuity Report
This feature generates a report of the gratuities each server earned for the specified date. Select the
desired date range by adjusting the Report From and Report To date fields at the top of the screen.
This is a shortcut to the Server Gratuity Report in the Back Office.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
162
Manager Operations
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Maintenance Activities
163
Chapter 22
Maintenance Activities
General Activities
This section describes the different manager functions in the Back Office of Aldelo® POS These
items are listed on the menu bar under “Activities.”
Pay Employees (Payroll)
Aldelo® POS includes a simple form of payroll and can assist in the generation of the information
you need to pay your employees. It does not calculate taxes or perform advanced deductions; it
simply acts as a way to generate a statement for the hours worked, overtime hours, and wages
earned.
To generate a payroll, follow the steps below. These steps assume you have employees with time
card information.
1. Click the “Pay Employees” button in the Back Office to display the Pay Employees screen.
a. You may also reach this screen from the General Activities section under the
Activities menu of the Back Office.
2. Select the employees for whom you wish to prepare a payroll.
a. Select an employee from the Employees list and click the single right-arrow
button to add that employee to the payroll list. Click the double right-arrow button
to add all employees to the payroll list.
3. Fill in the “Pay Period End Date.” Use the format MM/DD/YYYY.
4. If there is any additional pay due an employee, select the employee on the right and click
the “Additional” button. The system prompts the user for the amount due this employee in
addition to their normal pay. Enter this amount and then click the “” button.
5. Click the “Preview” button. Review the report to check for errors. The report may be
exported or printed. Click the “Done” button when you finish reviewing the report.
6. When you are satisfied that everything is correct, click the “Pay” button on the Pay
Employees screen.
If you generate a payroll by mistake, you may undo the previous payroll. Only one payroll may be
rolled back; you may not roll back a payroll prior to the current payroll.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
164
Maintenance Activities
New Local E-Mail
As a way to communicate with other employees, Aldelo® POS includes an internal e-mail system.
This system does not communicate with the internet, but stores messages internally.
To send an e-mail to an employee, follow the steps below.
1. In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > General Activities and click on the New Local
E-mail menu item. This displays the New Local E-Mail Message screen.
2. If desired, use the drop-down list near the top of the screen under the To Employee(s) label
to filter the job type of the employees you wish to e-mail.
3. To e-mail individual employees, choose the employees you wish to e-mail by selecting
checkboxes next to their names in the Employees list.
4. Use the drop-down list near the top of the screen under the New Message label to select the
employee from whom this e-mail is originating.
5. Type a message in the Message field.
a. Use the “Keyboard” button to enter this message if a hardware keyboard is not
available.
6. Click “Send.”
Review Local E-Mail
As a manager, you may want to keep track of your employees’ communications between each other
to make sure the system is not being abused.
To review e-mails sent by employees, follow the steps below. These steps assume e-mails were
created.
1. In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > General Activities > Review Local E-mails to
display the Local E-mail Maintenance screen.
2. Select the employee you wish to review by clicking on the employee’s name in the list.
3. Click the “Read E-mail” button. This displays the Local E-mail Viewer screen.
4. Select the e-mail message you wish to review by clicking on it in the E-mail Messages
section. The e-mail displays in the Viewing Selected E-mail section.
Video Surveillance Control Center
This feature is only available if you have a web cam installed correctly and have checked the Enable
Video Surveillance Captures checkbox in the Back Office under Station Settings > General Tab.
To use the Video Surveillance Control Center, go to the Back Office and navigate to Activities >
General Activities > Video Surveillance Control Center.
Camera Settings
The Camera Settings section of the Video Surveillance Control Center allows the user to adjust the
camera settings for the best picture quality. There are four Camera Settings buttons: Compression,
Display, Format, and Source. Use these buttons to adjust your camera settings for the best picture
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Maintenance Activities
165
quality. Under the Format option, Aldelo recommends using 320 x 240 for the Resolution setting
and RGB 24 for the Pixel Depth (bits) and Compression setting.
Disable Camera
By default, the Video Surveillance Control Center captures pictures when triggered by a variety of
events. Use the checkboxes next to the descriptions of the events to disable the capture of a picture
for a specific event.
Maintenance
The features under the Maintenance section allow the deletion of previously captured video
surveillance images. If you wish to purge all images when they have been in the system for a
specified number of days, enter a value in the Delete All Surveillance Pictures When Older Than
(Days) text box. This value must be a whole number within the range of 0 – 99, inclusive. To
remove all existing images, click the “Delete All Surveillance Pictures Now” button.
Snapshot
Click the “Snapshot” button to capture a picture of whatever is in the view of the webcam at the
current time.
Close
Click the “Close” button to exit the Video Surveillance Control Center.
Video Surveillance Review Browser
The Video Surveillance Review Browser feature may be found in the Back Office under Activities
> General Activities. Use this feature to review the images captured by the Video Surveillance
Control Center. Select the category of pictures you wish to review by expanding the Look In
dropdown list and then clicking on the desired category. Next, click on the individual image you
wish to review by clicking on it in the picture list at the bottom of the window.
Create Menu Item Labels
The Create Menu Item Labels feature is used to generate barcode stickers for menu items. This
feature searches for all menu items that have barcode data attached to them and prints barcode labels
that may be attached to menu the items.
To print barcode labels for menu items, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are using an
Aldelo certified label printer with 1” x 3” labels.
1. In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > General Activities > Create Menu Item
Labels to display the Menu Item Label Generator screen.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
166
Maintenance Activities
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select either the “All Menu Items with Barcode” radio button or the “Select Menu Items
with Barcode” radio button.
a. If you choose the “Select Menu Items with Barcode” radio button, you may filter
the results by Menu Category or by Menu Group.
Click the “Search” button.
Select the items for which you wish to print labels by selecting the items’ corresponding
checkboxes. You may also click the “Select All” or “Select None” buttons to select or
deselect multiple menu items simultaneously.
Enter the number of copies you wish to print.
Click the “Print” button.
When finished, click the “Done” button.
Maintain Pay Outs
The Maintain Pay Outs feature allows the user to make any necessary adjustments to the
information that was entered when a payout was initially created. In the Back Office, navigate to
Activities > General Activities > Maintain Pay Outs to display the Maintain Pay Outs screen.
Please note that once the cashier from whose cash tray the payout was made has closed his or her
cash drawer via the Cashier Out process, this information is no longer editable. To edit the payout
information, select the desired payout from the list on the left side of the screen by clicking on it and
then edit the fields on the right as necessary. If you wish to void the payout, select the Pay Out
Voided checkbox. If desired, a freehand note may be entered in the Void Reason text box. A time
and date stamp may also be added to the Void Reason text box by clicking the button that displays
the clock icon. Click the “Save” button when finished to save your changes.
Maintain Manager Cash Outs
The Maintain Manager Cash Outs feature allows the user to make any necessary adjustments to the
information that was entered when a manager cash out was initially created. In the Back Office,
navigate to Activities > General Activities > Maintain Manager Cash Outs to display the
Maintain Manager Cash Outs screen. Please note that once the cashier from whose cash tray the
manager cash out was made has closed his or her cash drawer via the Cashier Out process, this
information is no longer editable. To edit the manager cash out information, select the desired
manager cash out from the list on the left side of the screen by clicking on it and then edit the fields
on the right a necessary. If you wish to void the manager cash out, select the Cash Out Voided
checkbox. If desired, a freehand note may be entered in the Void Reason text box. A time and date
stamp may also be added to the Void Reason text box by clicking the button that displays the clock
icon. Click the “Save” button when finished to save your changes.
Global Menu Item Price Change
To do batch updates on your menu item prices, use the Global Menu Item Price Change feature.
This screen allows you to adjust menu item prices very quickly and in several different ways.
To change prices on menu items using the Global Menu Item Price Change screen, follow the steps
below. These steps assume you have created menu items.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Maintenance Activities
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
167
In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > General Activities > Global Menu Item
Price Change to display the Global Menu Item Price Change screen.
In the Menu Group dropdown list, select the menu group to which you wish to make price
changes (or select All Menu Groups).
In the Menu Items list box, choose the menu items you wish to change by selecting their
respective checkboxes (or click the “Select All” or “Select None” buttons).
Select the desired price change option by clicking its respective radio button.
a. Markup By Percent
b. Markup By Amount
c. Markdown By Percent
d. Markdown By Amount
e. Amount
i. Use the Amount field to specify the amount of the new price.
Based upon the selection made above, enter the amount of the price change as either a
fixed monetary amount or a percentage.
Click the “Update” button.
a. The results display in the Price Change Results section.
When finished, click the “Done” button.
Export Menu Item Sales
This feature exports sales information about your menu items to a CSV (Comma Separated Values)
text file. In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > General Activities > Export Menu Item
Sales to access the feature. Next, enter the beginning and ending dates of the date range for which
you wish to generate the report into their respective date picker windows. When finished, the report
is automatically exported to your computer’s C:\ProgramData\Aldelo\Aldelo For Restaurants\
Export\Menu Item Sales Recap directory. Below is a sample of the text file. The fields (from left to
right) are Menu Item ID, Qty ordered, total sales, 1 (used only as a place holder), Menu Item Name,
Menu Group Name, and Menu Item Price.
250, 1.000, 3.95, 1, Onion Rings, Appetizers, 3.95
251, 3.000, 14.85, 1, Nachos, Appetizers, 4.95
252, 6.000, 35.70, 1, Potato Skins, Appetizers, 5.95
253, 7.000, 55.65, 1, Shrimp Cocktail, Appetizers, 7.95
254, 9.000, 35.55, 1, Fried Zucchini, Appetizers, 3.95
255, 23.000, 113.85, 1, Fried Mozzarella, Appetizers, 4.95
256, 6.000, 29.70, 1, Quesadilla, Appetizers, 4.95
257, 8.000, 55.60, 1, Chicken Tenders, Appetizers, 6.95
258, 7.000, 55.65, 1, Lemon Pep. Shrimp, Appetizers, 7.95
259, 4.000, 31.80, 1, Cajun Shrimp, Appetizers, 7.95
260, 0.500, 1.98, 1, Stuffed Jalapeños, Appetizers, 3.95
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
168
Maintenance Activities
Customer Activities
Maintain Customer Records
The Maintain Customer Records feature allows the user to make any necessary adjustments to the
information that was entered when a customer record was initially created. In the Back Office,
navigate to Activities > Customer Activities > Maintain Customer Records to display the
Maintain Customer Records screen. To edit the information, select the desired customer phone
number from the list on the left side of the screen by clicking on it and then edit the fields on the
right, as necessary. If desired, freehand text may be entered in the Customer Notes text box. A time
and date stamp may also be added to the Customer Notes text box by clicking the button that
displays the clock icon. Click the “Save” button when finished to save your changes.
Create Customer Address Labels
The Create Customer Address Labels feature is used to generate address labels for customer
mailings. This feature searches for all customers in the system and prints address labels used to stick
on envelopes.
To print address labels for customers, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are using an
Aldelo certified label printer with 1” x 3” labels.
1. In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > Customer Activities > Create Customer
Address Labels to display the Customer Address Label Generator screen.
1. Select either the “All Customers with Mailing Address” radio button or the “Select
Customers with Mailing Address” radio button.
a. If you choose the “Select Customers with Mailing Address” radio button, you may
filter the results by Postal Code, Area Code, Anniversary Month, Highest
Spending Customers, or Lowest Spending Customers. When filtering by highest
or lowest spending customers, the list is generated in ascending or descending
order by the amount spent by the customer. In the adjacent text box, enter the
number of customers for which you wish to print address labels. For example, if
you wish to print address labels for your 50 lowest spending customers, enter ‘50’
in the Filter By Lowest Spending Customers textbox and then click the “Search”
button to display the list.
2. Choose the customers you wish to print address labels for by selecting the customers’
corresponding checkboxes. You may also click the “Select All” or “Select None” buttons
to select or deselect multiple customers simultaneously.
3. Enter the number of copies you wish to print.
4. Click the “Print” button.
5. When finished, click the “Done” button.
Maintain In House Charge Accounts
The Maintain In House Charge Accounts feature allows the user to make any necessary adjustments
to the information that was entered when a customer in house charge account was initially created.
In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > Customer Activities > Maintain In House Charge
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Maintenance Activities
169
Accounts to display the Maintain In House Charge Accounts screen. To edit the information, select
the desired customer from the list on the left side of the screen by clicking on it and then edit the
fields on the right a necessary. If desired, freehand text may be entered in the Credit Account Notes
text box. A time and date stamp may also be added to the Credit Account Notes text box by clicking
the button that displays the clock icon. Click the “Save” button when finished to save your changes.
Create In House Charge Statements
This feature allows you to issue statements to your customers for accounts that are due or past due.
To create statements for your In House Account customers, follow the steps below. These steps
assume you have created in house accounts for customers and there are charges to those accounts.
1. In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > Customer Activities > Create In House
Charge Statements to display the In House Charge Account List screen.
2. Choose the customers you wish to print statements for by selecting the customers’
corresponding checkboxes. You may also click the “Select All” or “Select None” buttons
to select or deselect multiple customers simultaneously.
3. Click the “Done” button to display the statements. There are several options on this screen.
a. The “Previous” button navigates to the previous statement.
b. The “Next” button navigates to the next statement.
c. The “Clear Current” button removes this statement from the list of statements
currently being viewed.
d. The “Print Current” button prints the statement currently being viewed.
e. The “Print All” button prints all the statements in the print list.
These statements are arranged so that they fit in a normal business-size (#10) window envelope.
Maintain Frequent Diner Accounts
The Maintain Frequent Diner Accounts feature allows the user to make any necessary adjustments
to the information that was entered when a frequent diner account was initially created. In the Back
Office, navigate to Activities > Customer Activities > Maintain Frequent Diner Accounts to
display the Maintain Frequent Diner Accounts screen. To edit the information, select the desired
customer name from the list on the left side of the screen by clicking on it and then edit the fields on
the right a necessary. Click the “Save” button when finished to save your changes.
Maintain Frequent Diner Tracking
Use the Maintain Frequent Diner Tracking feature to view your customers’ unredeemed frequent
diner tracking points.
To see customers’ frequent diner tracking points that have not yet been redeemed, follow the steps
below.
1. In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > Customer Activities > Maintain Frequent
Diner Tracking.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
170
Maintenance Activities
2.
3.
4.
On the next window, enter the phone number of the customer for whom you wish to
display the information and then click the “” button.
The Maintain Unredeemed Frequent Diner Tracking Points screen displays.
View the information on this page or select one of the records and click the “Remove”
button to permanently delete the selected record from the list.
Maintain Customer Credits
The Maintain Customer Credits feature allows the user to view the information that was entered
when a customer credit was initially created. The only editable information on this screen is the
Credit Status dropdown list and the Void Reason text box. In the Back Office, navigate to Activities
> Customer Activities > Maintain Customer Credits to display the Maintain Customer Credits
screen. Select the desired credit from the list on the left side of the screen by clicking on it. You may
then view the credit information on the right side of the screen. If the Credit Status dropdown list is
set to Voided, then a freehand void reason may be entered in the Void Reason text box. A time and
date stamp may also be added to the Void Reason text box by clicking the button that displays the
clock icon. Click the “Save” button when finished to save your changes.
Maintain Gift Certificates
The Maintain Gift Certificates feature allows the user to view the information that was entered when
a gift certificate was initially created. The only editable information on this screen is the Status
dropdown list and the Void Reason text box. In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > Customer
Activities > Maintain Gift Certificates to display the Maintain Gift Certificates screen. Select the
desired gift certificate from the list on the left side of the screen by clicking on the account number.
You may then view the gift certificate information on the right side of the screen. If the Status
dropdown list is set to Voided, then a freehand void reason may be entered in the Void Reason text
box. A time and date stamp may also be added to the Void Reason text box by clicking the button
that displays the clock icon. Click the “Save” button when finished to save your changes.
New Bad Check
When a customer writes a bad check, this feature allows you to record it in the software. If the
customer presents another check in the future, the system warns the user that the customer
wrote a bad check previously. A decision can then be made as to whether to accept the new check.
In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > Customer Activities > New Bad Check to display the
Bad Check Editor screen. Simply fill in all of the requested information for the bad check and click
the “Done” button.
Follow Up Bad Checks
This screen allows you to select a bad check that was previously entered into the system and edit its
information. Once selected, you may edit the information concerning the check in the same Bad
Check Editor screen that was used to record the bad check. In the Back Office, navigate to
Activities > Customer Activities > Follow Up Bad Checks to display the Bad Checks List screen.
If necessary, select the “Show All Checks” checkbox to display the current list of bad checks. Select
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Maintenance Activities
171
the desired check by clicking on it in the list and then clicking the “Edit” button to display the Bad
Check Editor screen. Edit the check in this screen as necessary and click the “Done” button to when
finished. A new bad check may also be recorded within this feature by selecting the “New” button
on the Bad Checks List screen.
Inventory Activities
New Purchase Order
This feature allows you to create a new purchase order when ordering items from vendors. For
further information on using this feature, see Chapter 21 – Operations Center – Inventory Activities
Section – New PO (Purchase Order), on page 157 of this manual. This feature may also be accessed
from the Main POS screen by navigating to Operations > Inventory Activities > New PO.
Review Purchase Order
This feature allows you to review existing purchase orders. For further information on using this
feature, see Chapter 21 – Operations Center – Inventory Activities Section – Review PO, on page
157 of this manual. This feature may also be accessed from the Main POS screen by navigating to
Operations > Inventory Activities > Review PO.
Create PO from Shopping List
If you have a large shopping list, use this feature to create purchase orders quickly for your vendors.
In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > Inventory Activities > Create PO from Shopping List
to display the Create PO from Shopping List screen. To create purchase orders for all vendors on the
shopping list, simply click the “Create PO” button. The newly created purchase orders may be
viewed in the Back Office by navigating to Activities > Inventory Activities > Review Purchase
Order.
Create Inventory Item Labels
The Create Inventory Item Labels feature is used to generate barcode stickers for inventory items.
This feature searches for all inventory items that have barcode data attached to them and prints
barcode labels to attach to the inventory items.
To print barcode labels for inventory items, follow the steps below. These steps assume you are
using an Aldelo certified label printer with 1” x 3” labels.
1. In the Back Office, navigate to Activities > Inventory Activities > Create Inventory
Item Labels to display the Inventory Item Label Generator screen.
2. Select either the “All Inventory Items with Barcode” radio button or the “Select Inventory
Items with Barcode” radio button.
a. If you choose the “Select Inventory Items with Barcode” radio button, you may
filter the results by Inventory Vendor or by Inventory Group.
3. Click the “Search” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
172
Maintenance Activities
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the inventory items for which you wish to print labels by selecting the inventory
items’ corresponding checkboxes. You may also click the “Select All” or “Select None”
buttons to select or deselect multiple menu items simultaneously.
Enter the number of copies you wish to print.
Click the “Print” button.
When finished, click the “Done” button.
Receive Inventory Items
This feature allows you to receive inventory items from your vendors. For more information on
using this feature, see Chapter 21 – Operations Center – Inventory Activities Section – Receive
Items, on page 158 of this manual. This feature may also be accessed from the Main POS screen by
navigating to Operations > Inventory Activities > Receive Items.
Physical Inventory Count
Use this feature to record the physical inventory actually on hand. For more information on using
this feature, see Chapter 21 – Operations Center – Inventory Activities Section – Phy. Inv. Count,
on page 155 of this manual. This feature may also be accessed from the Main POS screen by
navigating to Operations > Inventory Activities > Phy. Inv. Count.
Maintenance Activities
Monitor Client Connections
This feature allows you to view all of the clients connected to the network. It also allows you to shut
down any clients that are not connected but are preventing the software from allowing you to
compact or backup the database. This feature may be accessed from the Back Office by navigating
to Activities > Maintenance Activities > Monitor Client Connections. Once you are in the
Aldelo® POS Client Connection Monitor, the maximum number of clients allowed is shown at the
bottom of the window in green text. Just below the maximum number is the number of clients
currently logged on to the system. If the window shows that a client is logged on but Aldelo® POS is
not running on that client’s computer, select the checkbox for the client that is not connected and
click the “Shut Down Clients” button. This closes the selected client connection.
If you ever get a message that says, “You have exceeded your max number of licenses,” you must
shut down the client that the system thinks is connected but is not. To do this, follow the steps
mentioned above.
Remove All Access Denied Logs
This feature allows you to delete all of the access denied logs. This feature may be accessed from
the Back Office by navigating to Activities > Maintenance Activities > Remove All Access
Denied Logs. It deletes all Access Denied records, and may shrink the database size. After cleaning
up the Access Denied Logs, compact the database for increased efficiency.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Maintenance Activities
173
Remove All Caller ID Logs
This feature allows you to delete all of the Caller ID logs. This feature may be accessed from the
Back Office by navigating to Activities > Maintenance Activities > Remove All Caller ID Logs.
It deletes all Caller ID records and reduces the database size. After cleaning up the Caller ID logs,
compact the database for increased efficiency.
Remove All Customer Names from Orders
This feature allows you to remove the names from a specific customer’s orders (perhaps due to the
customer’s request). This feature may be accessed from the Back Office by navigating to Activities
> Maintenance Activities > Remove All Customer Names from Orders. Once selected, a popup
window appears and prompts you to enter the customer’s phone number. Enter the phone number of
the customer whose name you wish to delete from the orders. Upon completion, a confirmation
message appears, displaying the number of orders where the customer’s name was deleted.
Remove All Redeemed Gift Certificate MSR Card Information
This feature allows you to remove all of the swipe card information for redeemed gift certificates.
This feature may be accessed from the Back Office by navigating to Activities > Maintenance
Activities > Remove All Redeemed Gift Certificate MSR Card Information. After making this
selection, a confirmation screen appears asking if you wish to remove all MSR card track data from
redeemed or voided gift certificates. Click the “Yes” button. The next window confirms that all of
the scan code information was deleted successfully. MSR Card information that is already redeemed
is automatically deleted from the system every time the software is restarted.
Remove Prior Manager Cash Outs
This feature allows you to remove the entire prior manager’s cash out information. This feature may
be accessed from the Back Office by navigating to Activities > Maintenance Activities > Remove
Prior Manage Cash Outs. You are prompted to enter a date using the month, day, and year
buttons. Any Manager Cash Outs prior to this selected date are removed from the system.
Remove Prior Reservations
This feature allows you to remove all the prior reservation information. This feature may be
accessed from the Back Office by navigating to Activities > Maintenance Activities > Remove
Prior Reservations. You are prompted to enter a date using the month, day, and year buttons. Any
reservations prior to this selected date are removed from the system.
Delete Master Data
This feature allows you to delete database entries that have never been used or were created in error.
It may be accessed from the Back Office by navigating to Activities > Maintenance Activities >
Delete Master Data. Select the category, then select the items to delete. If the item is in use by the
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
174
Maintenance Activities
system, a message displays stating that the record cannot be deleted. Compact the database
immediately after using this feature.
Note: This feature is particularly useful when you finish creating your database but before using
Aldelo® POS for the first time, to remove any unnecessary entries.
You may only delete items that have no sales associated with them. If the item has ever been used to
perform a sale, been attached to another database item, or has any links to the database whatsoever,
it must remain in the database forever. The only other option is to dump all your sales to free the
items and unlink them so that they may be deleted. Make sure the object does not have a forced
modifier connected to it.
Refresh Cumulative Grand Total
This option recalculates the total sales figure when using the Show Non-Resettable Grand Total
feature. This feature may be accessed from the Back Office by navigating to Activities >
Maintenance Activities > Refresh Cumulative Grand Total. When the recalculation is completed
successfully, a confirmation message displays. To enable the Show Non-Resettable Grand Total
feature, go to the Back Office, navigate to Store Settings > Other Tab, and place an ‘X’ in the
Setting Value column to the right of the Show Non Resettable Grand Total option.
Third Party Add Ins
New
This feature allows you to create links to other programs. It does not integrate these programs, but it
allows you to open the programs from within Aldelo® POS. This feature may be accessed from the
Back Office by navigating to Activities > Third Party Add Ins > New.
When you select this, a file opens in Windows Notepad that contains the following information:
Instructions:
1) To create a Menu Separator, enter DASH PIPE DASH.
2) To enter Menu Command, enter DESCRIPTION,
then PIPE, then the EXECUTABLE PATH.
===> Enter Menu Commands Starting The Following Line <===
New|CurrentPath
-|Calculator|C:\ WINDOWS \ System32 \ calc.exe
Notepad|C:\ WINDOWS \ System32 \ notepad.exe
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Maintenance Activities
175
Follow the instructions above if you wish to create additional third party add ins. Place your new
code beginning on the line directly below the last line of this file. When finished, save your changes
in Notepad.
Calculator
This feature opens the Windows Calculator from within Aldelo® POS. It may be accessed from the
Back Office by navigating to Activities > Third Party Add Ins > Calculator.
Notepad
This feature opens Windows Notepad from within Aldelo® POS. This feature may be accessed from
the Back Office by navigating to Activities > Third Party Add Ins > Notepad.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
176
Maintenance Activities
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Database Maintenance
177
Chapter 23
Database Maintenance
Database & Support Files
Below is a list of some of the files used by Aldelo® POS along with explanations of what they are
and how they work.
adResSettings.dat
This file contains the Store Settings for your database. Anytime you perform a database backup, this
file is copied along with the database. In addition, anytime an error occurs in your software, this file
helps the Aldelo Technical Support Team to shorten the time it takes to troubleshoot the issue with
your system. If you encounter an error, call the Aldelo Technical Support department and arrange to
send this file by e-mail.
adResISV.dat
This file contains the external software links, such as the link to the Windows Calculator. You may
create your own links to other software programs that are installed on your computer by editing this
file. For more information on adding an external software link, see Chapter 22 – Third Party Add
Ins – New, on page 174 of this manual. Please note that if you enter a link to a different program,
the program to which you are linking must be installed on the local computer. The instructions on
how to edit this file are contained in the file when you open it.
adResHostess.dat
This file contains the settings for the Hostess functions of the software.
adRes.lang
This file contains the information used to display text in the software. If the software cannot connect
to this file, Aldelo® POS displays buttons with no text.
Database Engine Used
Aldelo® POS uses the Microsoft Jet 4 database engine.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
178
Database Maintenance
Database Recommended Limits
The recommended database limit in Aldelo® POS is 2 gigabytes. There is no limit on the number of
clients that may connect to the database, but performance suffers greatly if there are a large number
of clients connected to a database installed on a slow computer.
Compact Database
Periodically (for example, every two weeks), use the Compact Database feature in the Back Office
of Aldelo® POS. Compacting the database shrinks it and re-claims its unused space. This makes the
database smaller, faster, and more efficient. To compact the database, go to the computer that holds
the database. Close all other client stations connected to this database computer. Navigate to the
Back Office and click on the “Compact Database” button to start the compaction process. Once
finished, a message notifies the user that the compaction process was executed successfully.
Jet Compact Utility
If you must use the Jet Compact Utility, you may run it from within Aldelo® POS. To do so,
navigate to Back Office > Help > Technical Support and press F12 on your keyboard. When
prompted, enter the password ‘05338942.’ The software asks if all client stations are shut down.
Double check to make sure. Once all stations are shut down, click the “Yes” button on the prompt
and follow the displayed steps to complete the operation. This function creates a backup of the
database before the compact is performed so that in case anything goes wrong, all is not lost.
Backup Database
Backing up the database allows you to create backup copies of your database in case your live
database becomes corrupted or unusable. You may only backup the database at the computer on
which the database is locally stored. You cannot backup the database to a floppy drive. The device
must be a CD or DVD recorder drive, a magnetic tape drive, an external hard drive, a USB flash
drive, or the computer’s hard drive itself. The database is too large for a floppy disk. To backup the
database, go to the Back Office and click on the “Backup Database” button. Select the folder in
which to store the database backup. A backup folder is provided for your use in the Aldelo® POS
folder during setup. After you have selected the folder for the backup, click the “Backup” button.
After the backup is complete, a confirmation window displays a message indicating that the backup
was performed successfully. The database, the adResSettings.dat file , and the adResHostess.dat file
are backed up. Keep these files safe and always keep a second location for the backup, just in case
your primary backup is damaged.
You may also use the Windows built-in backup software to schedule automatic backup times so that
you can create a snapshot of your database at certain time intervals, or simply automate the once-aday backup. This may also be accomplished through Aldelo® POS in the Back Office under the
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Database Maintenance
Station Settings > General Tab. Remember that the other stations must not be running Aldelo®
POS when a backup is performed.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
179
180
Database Maintenance
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Import/Export Data
181
Chapter 24
Import/Export Data
Export Data
This feature allows you to export data to transfer to another blank database or to transfer into an
existing database. It may be accessed from the Back Office by navigating to File > Import/Export
Data. To export the data, click the “Export Setup Data” radio button, select the data to export, and
click the “Export” button. If you wish to export the entire database, click the “Export Entire
Database” radio button and then click the “Export” button.
This creates a text file containing all the data you have chosen to export. This data is in a proprietary
format and cannot be edited. The exported file is saved in the Export folder contained in the C:\
ProgramData \ Aldelo \ Aldelo For Restaurants \ Export \ Data directory.
Import Data
This feature allows you to import data that was exported from another Aldelo® POS database.
Follow the steps below to use the import feature.
1. From the Back Office, navigate to File > Import/Export Data.
2. Click the “Import” button.
3. Select the export file that you wish to import and click the “Open” button.
If you try to import into a database that has existing data, any information that cannot be imported is
hidden. Follow the steps below to restore this information.
1. From the Back Office, navigate to Setup > Menu Setup > Menu Items.
2. On the left side of the screen, click on the desired menu group and then choose a button in
the grid that is not currently in use.
3. The Menu Item Editor screen displays. Click the “Pick” button.
4. In the Menu Item Picker window that displays, select the menu item that you wish to assign
to the selected grid button.
5. Click the “Done” button.
Import New Resource Database
This feature allows you to import a new language database created in the Aldelo ® Localization
Utility. The name of the language database file is adRes.imp. This file contains all the text strings
for the software, allowing you to change them and customize your software. Refer to the Aldelo®
Localization Utility manual for more information on how to create new language databases.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
182
Import/Export Data
Export Reports
Aldelo® POS allows you to export all of the built-in reports. Once inside the report, click the
“Export” button. A confirmation displays indicating that the report has been saved to a .xls file in
the programs directory under the Export folder. Use Microsoft Excel to view or edit the exported
file as desired.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
183
Chapter 25
Reports
Generating Reports
Aldelo® POS contains a multitude of built-in reports available to the restaurant owner or manager.
These reports may be generated in the Back Office by clicking on the Reports menu. Here you find
the reports grouped by category. Simply click on a category and select the desired report.
Sample Reports
The remainder of this chapter displays a description and sample of each report available in Aldelo®
POS. These sample reports are listed in the same order in which they are listed in the Reports menu.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
184
Reports
Sales Summary Report
This report shows total sales for the specified date range. It gives an overall view of the restaurant’s
performance.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
185
Guest Count Report
This report shows the total number of guests served for the specified date range. Guests are sorted
by Breakfast, Lunch, Dinner, and Total Guests.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
186
Reports
Sales By Category Report
This report shows the total sales within the report date range, grouped by the menu categories. This
report is useful for reviewing the sales by different categories in the restaurant, such as Food,
Beverages, etc.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
187
Sales By Hour (Summary) Report
This report shows the total sales within the report date range, grouped by the hour blocks in a
summary format. This report is useful for determining which hours are the busiest so that you may
schedule your staff accordingly.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
188
Reports
Sales By Hour (Detail) Report
This report shows the total sales within the report date range, grouped by the hour blocks in a
detailed format. This report’s usefulness is similar to the Total Sales By Hour Summary Report,
except that it shows how many of each menu item were sold by each hour.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
189
Sales By Menu Item Report
This report shows the total sales within the report date range, grouped by menu items. This report is
useful to find out the fastest and slowest selling items, and provides an overview of items sold
through the report period. The report may be sorted by any of the three columns, and may be sorted
in ascending or descending order.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
190
Reports
Sales By Order Type Report
This report shows the total sales within the report date range, grouped by order type (also known as
Revenue Centers).
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Sales By Server Report
This report shows the total sales within the report date range grouped by servers.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
191
192
Reports
Sales By Station Report
This report shows the total sales within the report date range grouped by computer stations. Use this
report to see the load of computer station usage within the report period, to better allocate POS
station usage, and to determine the necessity of adding additional POS stations.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Daily Sales Analysis Report
This report shows the total sales within the report date range grouped by days.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
193
194
Reports
Weekly Sales Analysis Report
This report shows the total sales grouped by weeks.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Monthly Sales Analysis Report
This report shows the total sales grouped by months.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
195
196
Reports
Quarterly Sales Analysis Report
This report shows the total sales grouped by quarters.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Yearly Sales Analysis Report
This report shows the total sales grouped by years.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
197
198
Reports
Sales Vs. Inventory Usage By Auto Depletion Report
This report shows the total sales and the total inventory usage by auto depletion for the report date
range. The inventory usage information does not show in this report if the auto depletion feature is
disabled.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
199
Labor Vs. Sales By Breakfast, Lunch, & Dinner Report
This report shows the total hourly and salary labor cost for the report date range and the grouped
meal times. This report displays up-to-the-minute information and includes employees who have not
yet clocked out for the day. This report may also be used to determine how much each of the meal
times groups generates in sales. The time ranges for Breakfast, Lunch, and Dinner are defined in the
Back Office under Store Settings > General.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
200
Reports
Sales By Area Report
This report displays sales information broken down by the defined area (for example, Dining Room,
Patio, Bar, Drive Thru, Delivery, Take Out, etc.). A total for all defined areas displays at the bottom
of the report.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
201
Gift Certificate List Report
This report shows all outstanding gift certificates, along with the currently remaining account
balance amount. It also provides an overview of how many gift certificates have not yet been
redeemed. This report may be sorted by any column (except for the Balance column) and may be
displayed in either ascending or descending order.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
202
Reports
Gift Certificate Redemption Tracking Report
This report shows the gift certificate redemptions for the report date range, including the date and
time, the certificate number, the account number, the order number, where it was redeemed (station
and cash tray), by whom it was redeemed, and the redemption amount.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
203
Order Payments Report
For the selected date range, this report displays the register collections of order payments with cash,
credit cards, and checks. A summary of the tendered amounts and the gratuities displays at the
bottom of the report. This report may be sorted by any column and may be displayed in either
ascending or descending order.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
204
Reports
Other Payments Report
This report summarizes all the register collections for non-order payments with cash, credit cards,
and checks. This report includes new gift certificate sales collections and bad check reimbursement
collections.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
In House Account Payments Report
This report summarizes the In House Account Payments report. It gives an overview of the
customers who have paid their accounts within the specified date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
205
206
Reports
Pay Out Details Report
The report shows the payouts for the specified date range. The report displays the recipient, date,
time, amount, description, and the employee who made the payout.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Manager Cash Out Details Report
This report shows the details of any manager cash out transactions.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
207
208
Reports
Refund Details Report
This report shows the refunds performed for during the specified report date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
209
Total Payments Received Summary Report
This report shows the total payments received, by payment type, for the specified report date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
210
Reports
Customer Files Report
This report shows customer names, phone numbers, and sales information. Use this report to view
your customers’ spending at your restaurant.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
211
Customer Sales By Date Range Report
This report shows all customer sales for the specified date range. It may be sorted by any column, in
ascending or descending order.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
212
Reports
Specific Customer Purchases Report
After specifying the customer’s telephone number, this report shows the customer’s sales history for
the specified date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
213
Customer Anniversary Report
This report displays customers who were added to the database during the selected month. This
report is useful by the marketing department. The anniversary is setup in the customer record file by
clicking the “Anniversary Month” button.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
214
Reports
Customer Credit List Report
This report displays all currently existing customer credits.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Credit Redemption Tracking Report
This report displays the customer credit redemptions within the specified report date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
215
216
Reports
Frequent Diner Accounts Report
This report shows the existing frequent diner accounts list. This report includes the customer’s
name, phone number, number of orders tracked, tracked amount, mailing address, city, state, zip
code, and e-mail address.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Frequent Diner Tracking Report
This report displays the frequent diner tracking information for the specified date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
217
218
Reports
Frequent Diner Tracking By Account Report
This report displays the frequent diner tracking information for the specified date range for a
specific customer.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Frequent Diner Sales Summary Per Account Report
This report displays sales information for each frequent diner for the specified date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
219
220
Reports
In House Charge Accounts Report
This report displays the In House Charge Accounts list. It shows the customer charge account
balance and other information. If a customer’s account is closed, it does not appear in this report.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
221
In House Charge Tracking Report
This report shows the In House Charge tracking information. It displays all charged orders within
the specified date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
222
Reports
Outstanding Bad Checks Report
This report displays all outstanding bad checks recorded in the system.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Customer Incidents Report
This report displays the customer incident log information recorded in the system.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
223
224
Reports
Employee Schedules Report
This report displays employee schedules as defined in the Employee Schedule data entry screen in
the Back Office under Setup > Employee Setup > Employee Schedules.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Weekly Labor Cost Projection Report
This report provides an estimated cost labor based on the current employee schedules.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
225
226
Reports
Employee Time Cards Report
This report displays a specific employee’s time card information for the specified report date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Employee Payroll History Report
This report displays your employees’ payroll history details for the specified report date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
227
228
Reports
Employee Payroll History Report (Summary)
This report contains the same information as the Employee Payroll History Report, but in summary
form.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Wage Advance Details Report
This report displays employee wage advance payout details for the specified report date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
229
230
Reports
Dine In Server Performance Report
This report displays Dine In server sales grouped by employee.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
231
Table Group Sales Per Employee Report
This report displays sales information by employee for each table group. Use this report to assign
your employees to their most productive table groups.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
232
Reports
Server Gratuity Report
This report displays the total gratuities recorded in the POS station for each server, as well as other
related gratuity information.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Menu Item Sales By Server Report
This report displays menu item sales information grouped by server.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
233
234
Reports
Specific Server Sales By Category Report
This report displays the sales for each category, as well as the total for all categories, for the
specified server and date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Driver Delivery Summary Report
This report displays each delivery driver’s net sales, number of deliveries, and the compensation
received for the specified date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
235
236
Reports
Inventory Shopping List Report
This report displays the shopping list based upon the inventory auto-depletion feature.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Purchase Order Received Status Report
This report displays your purchase orders and their statuses for the specified date range. Use this
report to determine which purchase orders are still outstanding. This report may be sorted by any
column, in ascending or descending order.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
237
238
Reports
Inventory Preparation Forecast For Kitchen/Bar Report
This report attempts to predict the quantity of each inventory item that will be needed for the
selected business date based upon the usage of those inventory items for the previous six week
period. Please note that this report cannot predict extraordinary factors that may affect your
inventory item usage, neither positively nor negatively. Use this report as a basis for determining
how much of each inventory item should be prepared in advance.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
239
Detailed Inventory Depletion Summary Report
For each inventory item during the specified report date range, this report displays the quantity used,
the cost of the quantity used, and its percentage of the total amount of inventory used. The report is
based upon the automatic inventory depletion feature. The total cost of the inventory used appears at
the bottom of the report.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
240
Reports
Hourly Inventory Usage Report
For each inventory item during the specified report date range, this report displays the quantity used
broken down by the hour of the day.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
241
Current Inventory Quantity On Hand Report
This report displays the current calculated inventory on hand based upon the automatic inventory
depletion feature.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
242
Reports
Inventory Level Report
This report displays the levels of all of your inventory items for the specified date range. The
Beginning Inventory, Received Inventory, Actual Inventory Usage, and Ending Inventory figures
for each inventory item are listed. The Ending Inventory equals the Beginning Inventory plus the
Received Inventory minus the Actual Inventory Usage.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
243
Physical Inventory Count Report
Use this report to print a count sheet to use when performing your physical inventory counts. This
report may also be accessed from the Main POS screen by navigating to Operations > Inventory
Activities > Phy. Count Sheet.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
244
Reports
Physical Inventory Count (DISCREPANCY) Report
After performing your physical inventory count and making the necessary adjustments to your
inventory, this report displays all inventory items where the counted quantity does not equal the
quantity calculated by the automatic inventory depletion feature.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
No Sale Tracking Report
This report displays No Sale actions that were performed.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
245
246
Reports
Audit Log Tracking Report
This report displays the entire audit log recorded in the system by the specified report date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Void Tracking Report
This report shows the entire order void history for the specified report date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
247
248
Reports
Time Card Edit Report
This report displays information regarding time cards that were edited by your employees.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Employee List Report
This report lists all employees, their employee ID numbers, and their tax account numbers.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
249
250
Reports
Menu Item List Report
This report lists all of your menu items and the associated forced modifier information.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
251
Menu Item Recipe Cost and Profit Report
This report lists all of the menu items for which you have created recipes, and the cost, retail, and
profit amounts for those menu items. The Price Review column displays ‘<<<<<<<<<<<<’ as a
visual cue to identify to the user any menu items where the current retail price is less than the
minimum retail price, indicating that the menu item’s pricing should be reviewed.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
252
Reports
Menu Profit Analysis Report
This report displays the profitability of your menu items. It can help you decide whether a menu
item should be discontinued in favor of trying something new.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
253
Discount Usage Report
This report displays the discounts that were applied to customer orders during the specified report
date range. It also tracks employee discounts for the same report date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
254
Reports
Surcharge Usage Report
This report displays the surcharges applied to customer orders during for the specified report date
range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Menu Modifier Usage Report
This report displays menu modifier usage for the specified report date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
255
256
Reports
Menu Item Sales by Category Report
This report displays the menu item sales filtered by categories and shows the details of the category
sales. The sales are also broken down by the servers.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
257
Menu Item Sales By Stations Report
For the specified report date range, this report displays menu items sold, organized by station ID.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
258
Reports
Menu Item Sales Per Station by Employees Report
This report displays menu items sold, sorted primarily by employee and secondarily by station.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Menu Item Tracking by Printer Locations Report
This report displays ordered menu items, sorted by the printer locations to which the menu items
were sent.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
259
260
Reports
Caller ID Tracking Report
For the specified date range, this report displays the Caller ID log for all customer calls recorded in
the system.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Delivery Timing Report
This report displays delivery trip timing information for the specified date range.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
261
262
Reports
Drive Thru Timing Report
This report displays the drive thru window employee performance by listing the time taken to
complete each order.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Cashier Sign Outs Report
This report provides a summary of each of the cashiers’ sign out reports. It lists the starting cash
amount, the ending cash/checks/charges, and the discrepancy amount, if any.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
263
264
Reports
Cashier Discrepancies Report
This report displays the cashier discrepancies recorded in the system.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Reports
Deposit Slips Report
This report displays the deposit slips created with the Bank Deposit feature.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
265
266
Reports
Tax 1, Tax2, Tax3 Report
This report displays the sales tax liability for taxes 1 and 2 for the specified report date range. It also
shows non-taxable and tax-exempt sales information.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
267
Part 4
Appendix
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
268
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
Appendix A
Store Settings
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
269
270
Store Settings
Store Settings are global in nature and affect the entire system. Keep this in mind as you enter your
Store Settings data. These settings may be edited by navigating to Back Office > Store Settings.
General
Field Name
Description
Store Name
Your restaurant name is displayed in this field. This information cannot
be changed unless you change your registration with Aldelo.
Premise Address
The physical address that you registered this program under appears in
this field. This information cannot be changed unless you change your
registration with Aldelo.
Premise Postal Code
Enter your physical postal code here. This information is gathered
when you first create a new database. Three prompts appear. The first
prompt is the zip code, which is used in this field.
Area Code + Phone No.
The restaurant telephone number that you registered shows in this field.
This information cannot be changed unless you change your
registration with Aldelo.
Default Area Code
The number you enter in this field becomes the default area code when
you enter a phone number in the system. This displays on Take Out and
Delivery Orders.
Site Number
If your restaurant is part of a chain and you have a site number, enter
that number here.
Mailing Address
Enter your restaurant’s mailing address. This address is used as the
return address when creating In House Charge Account billing
statements.
Mailing Postal Code
Enter your restaurant’s mailing postal code. When you enter a zip code
into this field, the field to the right is automatically populated with the
city and state.
Side Bar Logo
This field allows you to choose a picture to display on the main screen
of the POS system. To select a picture, click on the button with the
three dots. To remove a picture, click on the button with the red X
through it. The image size for this picture should not exceed
1000x1400 pixels.
Daily Start Time
This field allows you to specify your restaurant’s daily start time. This
time should be two to three hours after your establishment closes. For
example, if your establishment closes at 3AM, this field should be set
to 6 or 7AM. If your establishment is open 24 hours a day, enter a time
when it is usually not busy. For example, if it is slow at 3:00 AM, you
should select 4:00 AM to give yourself time to do the closing reports
and any other daily managerial tasks. If you experience reports that
don’t match, try adjusting the figure in this field.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
Lunch Start Time
Dinner Start Time
Telephone Display
Format
Server Computer Name
Server TCP/IP Address
Server TCP/IP Port #
Auto Restart All
Computers
Auto Shut Down All
Computers
Auto Trigger Time
Display Special Message
During Login
Special Message
271
This field allows you to specify the lunch start time for reporting
purposes. This option affects the Labor vs. Sales By Breakfast, Lunch,
and Dinner report in the Back Office under Reports in the Sales
category.
This field allows you to specify the dinner start time for reporting
purposes. This option affects the Labor vs. Sales By Breakfast, Lunch,
and Dinner report in the Back Office under Reports in the Sales
category.
This field allows you to adjust the telephone number format. This is
useful for countries other than the United States that have less than or
more than 10 digits in their phone numbers.
Use this field to enter the server name that is hosting the database. The
database must be located on this system for this setting to take effect.
Many functions in Aldelo® POS depend on this setting, including
Caller ID, Time Synchronization, Setting Changes, Table Status
Changes, and Central Gift Card operations (when Gift Card Server is
used).
Enter the IP address of the server computer in this field. This is the
address of the computer defined in the “Server Computer Name”
setting (above). This setting must always be used in conjunction with
the previous setting.
This field is used to enter the port number Aldelo® POS uses for all
communications. This is only used if you have firewalls between the
server and the POS stations. Make sure you allow this port number to
be passed through the firewall, if one is present.
Select this option to automatically restart all of the computers at a
specified time. The database/server computer will restart 30 seconds
later to ensure all clients are logged off the database. If your client
computers boot faster than your server computer, they may display
messages that they cannot find the database. This is true, since the
server computer is still booting up.
Select this option to automatically shut down all computers at a
specified time. The database/server computer shuts down 30 seconds
later to ensure all clients are logged off the database.
Use this field to specify the time that all systems should Auto Shut
Down or Auto Restart.
Select this option to show your special message whenever an
employee enters an access code. Managers can use this to alert the
servers of the daily specials or special promotions. This message is
displayed in place of the Side Bar Logo.
Enter the special message to employees in this field. This message
displays on the Main screen anytime an employee enters his or her
access code.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
272
Store Settings
Taxes > Tax 1
Field Name
Description
Alias Name
If you wish to give this tax a name other than “Tax 1,” enter that name
here. This name is used throughout the software, including reports.
Tax 1 (%)
Enter the tax percentage you wish to apply to menu items in this field.
The percentage is expressed as a whole value, not as hundredths, so
enter the percentage value in this field (for example “7” or “8.25”).
Apply Tax on Surcharge
Select this option to apply Tax 1 to the Surcharge when a surcharge is
applied to a guest check. Surcharges are setup in the Back Office under
Setup > General Settings > Surcharges.
Apply Tax on Delivery
Charge
Select this option to apply Tax 1 to the Delivery Charge when a
Delivery Charge is applied to a guest check.
Taxes > Tax 2
Field Name
Description
Alias Name
If you wish to give this tax a name other than “Tax 2,” enter that name
here. This name is used throughout the software, including reports.
Tax 2 (%)
Enter the tax percentage you wish to apply to menu items in this field.
The percentage is expressed as a whole value, not as hundredths, so
enter the percentage value in this field (for example “7” or “8.25”).
Apply Tax on Surcharge
Select this option to apply Tax 2 to the Surcharge when a surcharge is
applied to a guest check. Surcharges are setup in the Back Office under
Setup > General Settings > Surcharges.
Apply Tax on Delivery
Charge
Select this option to apply Tax 2 to the Delivery Charge when a
Delivery Charge is applied to a guest check.
Tax Code Character
You may place a character in this field to show up on the guest check
that indicates which items on the receipt have this tax applied to them.
Tax Is Included in Item
Price
Check this box when using Tax 2 and the tax is already included in the
price of the menu item. The tax included in the item price is reported in
the Tax Report located in the Back Office under Reports > Other >
Tax Report.
Hide Inclusive Tax from
Guest Check
This feature hides the inclusive tax collected amount from the guest
receipt.
Trigger Tax Exemption
When Sub Total is Less
Than
This feature causes Tax 2 to be added to a guest check after a defined
amount is reached. For example, if you want all orders under $2.00 to
be tax-exempt, enter 2 in this field. Set this value to 4.01 to enable the
options for use in Ontario, Canada.
Apply Tax on Previous
Tax Amount
Select this option to apply Tax 2 to the amount of Tax 1.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
273
Taxes > Tax 3
Field Name
Description
Alias Name
If you wish to give this tax a name other than “Tax 3,” enter that name
here. This name is used throughout the software, including reports.
Tax 3 (%)
Enter the tax percentage you wish to apply to menu items in this field.
The percentage is expressed as a whole value, not as hundredths, so
enter the percentage value in this field (for example “7” or “8.25”).
Apply Tax on Surcharge
Select this option to apply Tax 3 to the Surcharge when a surcharge is
applied to a guest check. Surcharges are setup in the Back Office under
Setup > General Settings > Surcharges.
Apply Tax on Delivery
Charge
Select this option to apply Tax 3 to the Delivery Charge when a
Delivery Charge is applied to a guest check.
Apply Tax on Previous
Tax Amount
Select this option to apply Tax 3 to the amount of Tax 2. If this option
is checked and Tax 2 also has this option checked, Tax 3 is applied to
the sum of Tax 1 and Tax 2.
Taxes > Other Options
Field Name
Description
Apply Discounts After
Taxes
Select this option to apply discounts after taxes have been applied.
Apply Credit After
Taxes
Select this option to apply credits after taxes have been applied.
Tax Exempt Security
Select this option to specify the minimum security level necessary to
make a sale tax exempt.
Tax Exemption Alias
Name
Select this field to specify an alias name for tax exemption. For
example, to label your tax exemption “Tax Included,” enter the text in
this field.
Tax Account Info To
Print on Guest Check
Select this field to enter the Tax Account number issued to your
restaurant by the government. This field may also be used for other tax
account information. This information displays on the top of the guest
check. This information can be the ABN number used in Australia or
the GST number used in Canada.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
274
Store Settings
Services > Dine In
Field Name
Description
Dine In
Select this option to enable the ability to create Dine In orders.
Alias Name
To change the Dine In order type name to something other than Dine
In, enter that name in this field. For example, to change “Dine In” to
“Sit Down” on the main POS screen, enter “Sit Down” in this field.
Show Retail Screen
Select this option to default the system to the barcode entry screen
for Dine In type orders.
Tax Exempt
Check this box if tax does not apply to Dine In orders.
Dine In Automatic
Surcharge
Choose a surcharge in this drop-down list to apply to every Dine In
order automatically.
Bar Automatic Surcharge
Choose a surcharge from this drop-down list to apply to every Bar
Tab order automatically.
Prompt for customer name Select this option to prompt the user for a customer name at the end
of a Dine In order.
at dine in completion
Prompt for customer name Select this option to prompt the user for a customer name at the end
of a Bar Tab order.
at bar tab completion
Skip Table Selection
Select this option to skip the Table selection screen and go directly to
the Order Entry screen.
Track Guest Count for
Dine In Orders
Select this option to control whether the software asks for the
number of guests when a new order is created.
Warn Drink Per Guest
Policy
Select this option to warn the users that they have not ordered at least
one drink per guest on the ticket. Menu items must be marked as Bar
Drink Items for this option to function correctly.
Enforce Drink Per Guest
Policy
Select this option to force the user to order at least one Bar Drink
menu item per guest.
Prompt Seat Number on
Startup
Select this option to show the seat selection screen when a new Dine
In order is created.
Prompt Seat Number on
Each Item
Select this option to show the seat selection screen for each item
ordered when in the order entry screen.
Show Seat Assignment
Reminder on ‘Done’ for
Dine In Orders
Select this option to remind the user to assign each item on the guest
check to a seat when the “Done” button is selected.
Force Seat Assignment
Reminder on ‘Done’
This option forces the user to assign each item on the guest check to
a seat when the “Done” button is selected.
Force Clear Settled Dine In This option requires the user to mark a table as cleared when it has
been cleared by the Bus Person and is ready for another guest.
Table
Occupied Table Cannot
Create New Ticket
Select this option to prevent new orders from being created on tables
with existing orders.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
275
Services > Dine In > Hostess/Paging Setup > General
Field Name
Description
Paging Receiver COM
Port
Select this option to specify the COM port where the receiver is
installed.
Paging Receiver COM
Settings
In this field, enter the COM settings for the device. The format is
[Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, Stop Bits], without the brackets.
EPD Paging System
Integration
Select this checkbox to enable EPD two-way paging system
integration. Selection of this checkbox automatically populates the
following four fields with default values.
EPD Paging System
Orders Folder
If you do not wish to use the default folder, enter the path to the folder
on your system where you wish to save incoming orders.
EPD Paging System
Pages Folder
If you do not wish to use the default folder, enter the path to the folder
on your system where you wish to save outgoing guest pages.
EPD Paging System
CapCode Range From
If you cannot use the default value, enter the beginning number of the
range of CapCodes your paging system uses.
EPD Paging System
CapCode Range To
If you cannot use the default value, enter the ending number of the
range of CapCodes your paging system uses.
Page Server When New
Table is Assigned
Select this option to page the server assigned to a table.
View Closed
Reservations/Waiting
List Security Level
Use this drop-down list to specify the security level required to see
closed reservations and waiting list entries.
Re-Open Closed
Reservations/Waiting
List Security Level
Use this drop-down list to specify the security level required to re-open
reservations and waiting list entries that have are already closed.
Default Table Usage
Minutes
Use this field to specify the number of minutes for which a table is
reserved. For example, if customers typically stay for 2 hours, enter
120 in this field.
Staff Paging Register
Pager Security Level
Use this drop-down list to specify the security level required to register
a pager in the Staff Paging screen located in the Time Card section of
the software.
Staff Paging Send Page
Security Level
Use this drop-down list to specify the security level required to register
a pager in the Staff Paging screen located in the Time Card section of
the software.
Staff Paging Shortcut
Messages 1-8
Use these fields to specify a list of standard messages. The user can
select a message from the list to save typing it each time a page is sent.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
276
Store Settings
Services > Dine In > Hostess/Paging Setup > Reservations
Field Name
Description
Minimum Advance Days
Use this field to specify the minimum number of days required before a
reservation can be made. To allow reservations on the same day they
are created, enter 0.
Maximum Advance Days Use this field to specify the maximum number of days in the future a
reservation can be made. If there is no limit, enter 0.
Hold Reservation Open
After Time Expired For
(Minutes)
Use this field to specify the number of minutes a reservation is held
open after the customer was due to arrive. Once this time has expired,
the reservation is marked as a “No Show” the reservation is closed, and
the table is re-opened for seating.
Require Telephone
Number
Select this option to specify whether a phone number is required before
a reservation may be created.
Print Seating Chit
Select this option to print a chit with the number of people, party name,
table number, and server assigned to the table. This chit is printed after
the reservation is checked in.
Disable Reservation
Feature
Select this option to disable the Reservations tab in the software.
Services > Dine In > Hostess/Paging Setup > Waiting List
Field Name
Description
Auto Page Priority
Status After (Minutes)
Select this option to specify the number of minutes after the customer
is assigned to the waiting list until he or she starts receiving status
notifications. A status update is sent to the customer’s pager whenever
a party ahead on the list is removed from the waiting list for any
reason.
Require Pager
Assignment on Creation
Select this option to require a pager to be assigned anytime an entry is
added to the waiting list.
Require Table
Assignment on Check In
Select this option to require the customer to be assigned a table when
they are checked in.
Print Guest Chit
Select this option to print a chit with the party name and the number of
people in the party when an entry is created in the waiting list.
Print Seating Chit
Select this option to print a seating chit with the number of guests, the
name of party, the table number, and the server name.
Disable Waiting List
Feature
Select this option to disable all waiting list functions.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
277
Services > Dine In > Hostess/Paging Setup > Manager Alerts
Field Name
Description
Sales Update Every
(Minutes)
Use this field to specify the number of minutes between sales updates
sent to a manager pager. Sales update information includes total sales,
number of guests, and average check.
Clock Out Alert Every
(Minutes)
Select this option to specify the number of minutes between pages for
employees who have forgotten to clock out.
Reservation Walk Out
Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when there is a Walk Out
by a guest party with a reservation.
Waiting List Walk Out
Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when there is a Walk Out
by a guest party on the Waiting List.
Waiting List No Show
Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when a guest party on the
Waiting List is a No Show.
Enter Back Office Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone accesses
the Back Office.
Employee Setup Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone accesses
the employee setup screen.
Data Source Setup Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone tries to
change the data source.
Backup Performed Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone performs a
backup.
Store Settings Setup
Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone accesses
Store Settings in the Back Office.
Security Settings Setup
Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone accesses
Security Settings in the Back Office.
Station Settings Setup
Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone accesses
Station Settings in the Back Office.
Exit Program Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone exits the
program.
No Sale Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone performs a
No Sale.
Split Order Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone splits an
order.
Combine Order Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone combines
orders.
Refund Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone performs a
refund.
Pay Out Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone performs a
payout.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
278
Store Settings
Staff Banking
Discrepancy Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when an employee shows a
discrepancy while ending his or her Staff Bank.
Cashier Discrepancy
Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when an employee shows a
discrepancy while closing his or her cash drawer.
Void Item Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when an item is voided.
Void Order Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when an order is voided.
Late Clock In Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone clocks in late.
Early Clock Out Alert Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone clocks in
early.
Late Clock Out Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone clocks out
late.
Edit Time Card Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone accesses the
edit time card screen.
Create Credit Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone creates a
credit.
Insufficient Security
Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone enters an
access code and is denied access.
SQL Screen Access
Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone accesses the
SQL query screen.
Registry Screen
Access Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone accesses the
registry screen.
Menu Item Outage
Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when a menu item cannot be
ordered due to the calculated inventory being 0.
Change Price Alert
Select this option to alert the manager pager when someone changes the
price of a menu item.
Services > Dine In > Hostess/Paging Setup > Pagers
Field Name
Description
Pager #
This is the number assigned to this pager. This number is assigned
automatically by the software.
Capcode
Select this option to set the capcode number given by the pager vendor.
This is used by the transmitter to page the correct pager.
Baud Rate
Select this option to set the baud rate used for the pagers. The default is
1200.
Tone
Select this option to choose the tone to use for the pager when it sounds.
There are 4 options; 0, 1, 2, and 3.
Alphanumeric
Select this option to specify if this is a pager that supports text.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
279
Services > Take Out
Field Name
Description
Take Out
Select this option to enable the ability to create Take Out orders.
Alias Name
To change the Take Out order type name to something other than Take
Out, enter that name in this field. For example, to change “Take Out”
to “Carry Out” on the main POS screen, enter “Carry Out” in this field.
Show Retail Screen
Select this option to default the system to the barcode entry screen for
Take Out type orders.
Tax Exempt
Check this box if tax does not apply to Take Out orders.
Take Out Automatic
Surcharge
Choose a surcharge from this drop-down list to apply to every Take
Out order automatically.
Prompt for customer
name at take out
completion
Select this option to prompt the user for a customer name at the end of
a Take Out order.
Require Phone # for
Take Out
Select this option to require the entry of a phone number for all Take
Out type orders. By default, the users can press “Enter” when the area
code is displayed and the system will let them in. Use this option in
conjunction with the option found in Store Settings > Staff CRM >
Enforce Exact Telephone Number Digits to ensure the best possible
tracking of customer telephone numbers.
New Customer Take Out Select this option to print a “Hold Until Arrival” message on the
kitchen ticket. This only applies to Take Out orders placed by a
on Hold
previously non-existent customer. This option is helpful if your
establishment has experienced problems with new customers calling in
take out orders and not showing up to pick up the orders.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
280
Store Settings
Services > Drive Thru
Field Name
Description
Drive Thru
Select this option to enable the ability to create Drive Thru orders.
Alias Name
To change the Drive Thru order type name to something other than
Drive Thru, enter that name in this field. For example, to change
“Drive Thru” to “Drive Up Window” on the main POS screen, enter
“Drive Up Window” in this field.
Show Retail Screen
Select this option to default the system to the barcode entry screen for
Drive Thru type orders.
Tax Exempt
Check this box if tax does not apply to Drive Thru orders.
Drive Thru Automatic
Surcharge
Choose a surcharge from this drop-down list to apply to every Drive
Thru order automatically.
Prompt for customer
name at drive thru
completion
Select this option to prompt the user for a customer name at the end of
a Drive Thru order.
Disable Drive Thru
Timing Feature
Select this option to disable the Drive Thru timing screen that appears
when the “Drive Thru” button is selected.
Drive Thru Orders Use
Drive Thru Stations
Select this option to require Drive Thru orders to be settled only at
Drive Thru stations.
Services > Delivery
Field Name
Description
Delivery
Select this option to enable the ability to create Delivery orders.
Alias Name
To change the Delivery order type name to something other than
Delivery, enter that name in this field. For example, to change
“Delivery” to “Home Service” on the main POS screen, enter “Home
Service” in this field.
Show Retail Screen
Select this option to default the system to the barcode entry screen for
Delivery type orders.
Tax Exempt
Check this box if tax does not apply to Delivery orders.
Delivery Automatic
Surcharge
Choose a surcharge from this drop-down list to apply to every Delivery
order automatically.
Prompt for customer
name at delivery
completion
Select this option to prompt the user for a customer name at the end of
a Delivery order.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
281
Show Driver Dispatch
Screen
Select this option to show a list of all your drivers when you click
“Driver” on the Main POS screen. This feature helps speed up your
driver departures and arrivals. However, this allows employees to
assign orders to other drivers, and should be used with caution.
Enable Driver Money
Drop
This feature enables the “Money Drop” button to settle all cash
payment deliveries in one transaction. Credit Cards and checks must be
settled separately.
WARNING: You should completely settle Credit Card transactions before the
order is taken for delivery. The order cannot be settled by the person delivering the
order if the order was not completely settled by the person creating the order.
Orders paid by check must be settled after delivery but before the Money Drop is
performed.
Enable Popup Streets
Select this option to show a list of streets to choose from when entering
the delivery address. The list is generated from all the streets
previously entered into the Aldelo® POS Back Office.
Round Delivery Total to
Next Quarter
Select this option to round the delivery total to the next increment of
25¢. The additional amount is added to the delivery charge.
Delivery Charge
Select this field to set the global default amount for the delivery charge.
The order in which delivery charges are applied is:
1. Customer Level
2. Street Level
3. Postal Code Level
4. Global Level
The higher settings on the list override the lower ones. For example,
Customer Level settings override Postal Code Level settings.
Delivery Comp
Select this field to set the global default amount for the delivery
compensation. This feature follows the same order as “Delivery
Charge,” above.
Chained Delivery
Charge/Comp Per Trip
Select this option to charge the delivery charge and compensation only
on the first order in a chained set of orders.
Delivery Charge/Comp
Per Menu Item
Select this option to charge the delivery charge and compensation only
for items with a delivery charge/comp specified in the Menu Item
Editor. Items without a delivery charge/comp specified will not have a
delivery charge/comp applied.
Delivery Charge Percent
Based
Select this option to charge the delivery fees on a percentage basis
rather than a dollar amount.
Delivery Comp Percent
Based
Select this option to charge the delivery compensation on a percentage
basis rather than a dollar amount.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
282
Store Settings
Revenue > Payments
Field Name
Description
Check
Select this option to enable the ability to accept checks as a form of
payment.
Enable Check Scan
Select this option when using a MICR reader and you wish to verify
checks based on your own bad check records in your Aldelo® POS
software. With this feature enabled, whenever you scan a check, the
software, if declined, displays a message stating “Check Acceptance
Declined/Please do not accept this check as payment for this order.”
However if the check is not declined, the system assumes the check is
good. This information only applies to check records previously entered
into the system and in no way verifies the validity of the check
presented by a customer with no Bad Check history on file in the
system.
Visa
Select this option to enable the ability to accept Visa as a form of
payment.
MasterCard
Select this option to enable the ability to accept MasterCard as a form
of payment.
American Express
Select this option to enable the ability to accept American Express as a
form of payment.
Discover
Select this option to enable the ability to accept Discover as a form of
payment.
Carte Blanche
Select this option to enable the ability to accept Carte Blanche as a
form of payment.
Diner’s Club
Select this option to enable the ability to accept Diner’s Club as a form
of payment.
ATM/Debit Card
Select this option to enable the ability to accept ATM/Debit cards as a
form of payment.
In House Charge
Select this option to enable the ability to accept In House Charge as a
form of payment.
Days Due
This drop-down list allows you to specify the terms on In House
charges. For example, if you specify 30, the payment is due 30 days
after the charge is created. Specify Due Upon Receipt if no terms are
allowed.
Remote In House
Account Marker
This field allows you to specify the account name for a ticket to print to
the remote In House printer. The word must be listed first and followed
by a space character. For example, to have all accounts with “Room”
listed first in the first name field to print a ticket at the remote printer,
simply type “Room” in this field. Any combination of “Room” and any
other words following a space character (such as “Room 317”) will
then print to the remote In House printer.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
283
Revenue > Payments > Configure EDC Integration Settings > Store Level
Field Name
Description
POS User Name
The POS user account is used for transaction processing against the
EDC Server. The POS User Name must be setup under User Accounts
in Aldelo® EDC first, and then copied to this field.
POS Integration Token
The POS Integration Token is used to authenticate the POS user
account without revealing the actual password. The token cannot be
used to login and provides greater security. The token must match the
POS Integration Token under User Accounts in Aldelo® EDC.
Batch User Name
The Batch user account is used for end of day processing against the
EDC server. The Batch User Name must be setup under User Accounts
in Aldelo® EDC first, and then copied to this field.
Batch Integration Token The Batch Integration Token is used to authenticate the Batch user
account without revealing the actual password. The token cannot be
used to login and provides greater security. The token must match the
Batch Integration Token under User Accounts in Aldelo® EDC.
EDC Transport
Response Time Out
Seconds
Specify the number of seconds for the EDC transport to wait for the
EDC server to respond before timing out. The recommended value for
this field is 90 seconds.
POS Transport
Response Time Out
Seconds
Specify the number of seconds for the POS transport to wait for the
EDC transport to respond before timing out. The recommended value
for this field is 120 seconds.
Receipt Copies To Print
Specify the number of receipt copies to print at the POS station.
Restaurant Industry
Indicate whether the primary merchant account is set to restaurant
industry mode by entering “Yes” or “No” in this field.
Gift Processing Enabled
Indicate whether the EDC server has a gift processing account setup
and enabled by entering “Yes” or “No” in this field.
USA Debit Processing
Enabled
Indicate whether the EDC server has a USA debit processing account
setup and enabled by entering “Yes” or “No” in this field.
Canadian Debit
Processing Enabled
Indicate whether the EDC server has a Canadian debit processing
account setup and enabled by entering “Yes” or “No” in this field.
Check Processing
Enabled
Indicate whether the EDC server has a Check processing account setup
and enabled by entering “Yes” or “No” in this field.
Verify Users
Click to verify the POS User and the Batch User accounts against the
EDC server.
Update
Click to save changes made to all Store Level and Station Level
settings.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
284
Store Settings
Revenue > Payments > Configure EDC Integration Settings > This Station
Field Name
Description
POS Transport Server
Port
This field defines the TCP/IP port through which Aldelo® POS
connects for inter-process communication. This port is used by POS
transport as the TCP listening port.
Automatic Batch Close
Trigger Time
This field defines the time of day for the Aldelo® POS Service to
automatically trigger the daily batch close. This time may be entered in
either the twelve or the twenty-four hour clock format. Enable this on
only one station throughout the entire store; do not enable this feature
on more than one station. To use this feature, disable the Auto Batch
Time in Aldelo® EDC, since the Aldelo® POS Service handles the auto
batch trigger. When you enable this feature, you may close Aldelo ®
EDC when not in use.
Enable Service Logging
Select this option to enable the Aldelo® POS Service to create a service
log file for troubleshooting purposes. This feature does not log any
payment related details.
Enable Secured
Magensa Credit Card
Swipes
Select this checkbox to enable the secured magensa credit card swipes
feature.
Allow Secured and NonSecured Credit Card
Swipes
Enables both secured and non-secured credit card swipes on this
station.
Pin Pad Device Type
Specify the Pin Pad device that is attached to the local station by
selecting it from the list. This feature is only applicable when
USA/Canadian debit processing is enabled.
Pin Pad Com Port
Specify the COM Port number to which the Pin Pad device is
connected.
Pin Pad Time Out
Seconds
Specify the number of seconds for the Pin Pad device to wait for
customer input before timing out. The recommended value for this field
is 45 seconds.
Canadian Debit
Merchant Account ID
Specify the Pin Pad specific Canadian debit processing merchant
account ID designated for the attached Pin Pad device selected under
“Pin Pad Device Type,” above.
Canadian Debit Connect Specify the number of seconds before the Canadian debit processing
connection attempt times out. The recommended value for this field is
Time Out Seconds
30 seconds.
Canadian Debit
Response Time Out
Seconds
Specify the number of seconds before the Canadian debit processing
response attempt times out. The recommended value for this field is 60
seconds.
Canadian Debit Last
Sequence Number
This read-only field displays the last transaction sequence number
received from Canadian debit processing.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
285
This field is for the internal use of Aldelo only. Do not enter anything
in this field.
Click to initialize the currently selected Pin Pad device.
Click to save changes made to all Store Level and Station Level
settings.
Click to elevate the application security to manage the Aldelo® POS
Service operations. This feature is applicable to Windows Vista or
later operating systems running UAC (User Access Control).
Click to install the Aldelo® POS Service as a Windows Service. The
Aldelo® POS Service is the POS Transport service that allows
Aldelo® POS to process financial data through Aldelo® EDC.
Click to run the Aldelo® POS Service. Whenever store level or station
level changes are made, the Aldelo® POS Service must be stopped
and restarted.
Click to stop the Aldelo® POS Service. Whenever store level or
station level changes are made, the Aldelo® POS Service must be
stopped and restarted.
Click to uninstall the Aldelo® POS Service as a Windows Service.
The Aldelo® POS Service is the POS Transport service that allows
Aldelo® POS to process financial data through Aldelo® EDC.
Canadian Debit
Command
Initialize Pin Pad
Update
Elevate Security
Install Service
Run Service
Stop Service
Uninstall Service
Revenue > Gratuity
Field Name
Description
Tip % on Dine In Server This field allows you to specify the percentage to appear at the bottom
of the Server Dine In Sales report and enables the servers to know how
Sales
much they should have made in tips based on the specified percentage.
For example, if the order is $9.64 and the server’s tip is $3.36, the
I.R.S. requires the restaurant to report at least 8% of the server’s tips (in
this case, 77¢). If you create a second reference point, for example
10%, the Server Dine In Sales Report also includes a line to show the
10% figure (96¢). Enter “0” to prevent these fields from displaying.
Auto Tip Alias Name
Select this field to specify an alias name for the Auto Gratuity.
Auto Print Server Tip
Claim Receipt
Select this option to print a Server Claim Receipt for the servers’ tips.
This way, the cashier can collect the servers’ tips and the servers can
pick them up them during slow periods or at the end of their shifts. For
example, if the customer brings the check to the cashier and pays the
gratuity to the cashier instead of leaving it on the table, the cashier gets
a receipt to put into the cash drawer to keep track of the server’s tips.
Auto Gratuity Percent
This field allows you to specify the percentage to charge for the Auto
Gratuity. For example, to charge a 15% tip on the total amount of the
order, enter “15” here. If your restaurant charges Auto Gratuity based
on the number of guests, set the minimum number of guests in the
following field.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
286
Store Settings
Use Auto Gratuity
Percent When Guests at
or Exceed
This field allows you to specify the minimum number of guests before
the Auto Gratuity percentage is applied to the order.
Dine In Do Not Apply
Auto Tip
Select this option to prevent the application of Auto Gratuity to Dine In
orders.
Auto Tip at Bar Tab
Select this option to apply Auto Gratuity to Bar Tab orders.
Auto Tip at Take Out
Select this option to apply Auto Gratuity to Take Out orders.
Auto Tip at Drive Thru
Select this option to apply Auto Gratuity to Drive Thru orders.
Auto Tip at Delivery
Select this option to apply Auto Gratuity to Delivery orders.
Revenue > Cashier
Field Name
Description
Change Due Show
Original
Select this option to show the amount of the ticket as well as the
change due when the Change Due screen appears.
No Sale Show Alert
Select this option to show a screen alert with the employee’s name
anytime a No Sale is performed.
Blind Cashier Close Out
Select this option to display a “Blind Close” button on the cashier
money count screen. When this button is used, the system
automatically assumes that all the money due has been collected, and
that the correct amount was collected.
Enable Staff Banking
Select this option to enable the use of Staff Banking by employees.
Auto Start Staff Bank
When Clock In
Select this option to automatically start an employee’s Staff Bank when
he or she clocks in. The start amount of the Staff Bank is set at $0.00.
Credit Card Tips
Percentage Fee Charged
to Server
Select this option to take money out of your server’s credit card tips to
pay for the processing fee charged by the credit card processing
company. This option only reports the number; it does not reduce the
amount owed.
Auto Reduce Credit
Card Tip Fees
Select this option to automatically reduce the credit card tip fee from
the staff bank instead of just reporting the money owed.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
287
Revenue > Other Options
Field Name
Description
Printers Currency
Symbol Hex Value
Select this field to specify the printer’s currency symbol (represented
as a hex value). See your printer’s manual or contact the printer
manufacturer to obtain these values.
Custom Currency
Denominations
Select this field to create your own custom currency denominations. To
specify the currency amount, click on the button with 3 dots and enter
the denomination amount. Repeat until all denominations are entered
(up to 12 different denominations). To remove the custom currency
denominations, simply click on the button with the red X. These values
replace the values in the Money Count screen when cashing out.
Amount Due Automatic
Round to Nearest
Select this option to round the total to the nearest amount entered in
this field. The amount can be anything from 0.05 to 1.00. The delivery
round to nearest quarter supersedes this option.
Daily Closing Reminder
#1-6
You can enter up to 6 different reminders to appear every day when the
closing report is run. As you complete each task or reminder, click the
button to mark it as complete. When all reminders are completed, the
“Continue” button is enabled.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
288
Store Settings
Receipts > Guest Check
Field Name
Description
Store Message
Select this field to display a message directly below your restaurant
name and information on the guest receipt. For example, you might
place the phrase “the best steak in town” in this field. This field is used
if your registration name is too long when registering the software. For
example, if your restaurant name is “The Little Hole in the Wall Grill
and Pub,” you could register it as “The Little Hole in the Wall” and
place “Grill and Pub” in the store message field.
Hide Ticket Number
from Guest Check
Select this option to hide the ticket number on the printed guest check.
Hide Time from Guest
Check
Select this option to hide the time of day on the guest check.
Show Delivery Cust
Sales Info
Select this option to show the customer’s information on the guest
receipt for delivery orders. This information includes the Total Orders
To-Date and the Total Spent To-Date.
Hide Hold Time on
Printed Check
Select this option to hide the order’s hold time on the printed guest
check.
Hide Seat # from Printed Select this option to hide the guests’ seat numbers on the printed guest
check.
Check
Show Ordered Items
Individually
Select this option to show the ordered items on screen separately
instead of combining them. For example, if you order 2 Cokes, they
appear as “1 Coke” and “1 Coke.” By default, they appear as “2 Coke.”
Hide Voided Item from
Printed Guest Check
Select this option to hide the voided items on the printed guest check.
Hide Modifier Cost from Select this option to hide the cost of the modifiers on the printed guest
check.
Printed Check
Hide No Cost Modifier
from Printed Check
Select this option to hide the modifiers with no cost on the printed
guest check.
Guest Check Print
Description
Select this option to print the description of the menu item that is
defined in the Menu Item Editor on the guest check.
Print Tip Line on Guest
Check
Select this option to print a tip amount line on the guest check. This
serves as a reminder to the customer to leave a tip.
Always Show Guest
Check Tip Line
Select this option to put a tip line on the guest check regardless of
whether tips have already been entered or allocated.
Show Food/Bar
Subtotals on Guest
Check
Select this option to show a subtotal for the food items ordered on a
ticket and a subtotal for the bar items ordered on that same ticket.
Guest Check Message
Enter a message to print on the Guest Receipt, for example, “Thank
you. Have a nice day.”
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
289
Show Tip Sugg. on
Check Based on Order
Total
Select this option to display a suggested tip amount based on the Tip
Suggestion percentage, below.
Enter Tip Suggestion
Percentage
Click this button to enter a suggested tip percentage at the bottom of
the Guest Receipt. When you use this option, you are prompted for a
percentage. For example, if you enter 10%, the software adds a line
reading “10% Tip, Or The Value Of <10>.” Everything on this line is
editable except the <10>. This information is used by the software to
calculate the suggested tip. You might change it to say something like
“Please leave a tip of <10>.”
Receipts > Kitchen/Bar
Field Name
Description
Hide Ticket Number
from Kitchen/Bar Chits
Select this option to hide the ticket number on the printed kitchen/bar
chit.
Hide Time from
Kitchen/Bar Chits
Select this option to hide the time on the printed kitchen/bar chit.
Show Kitchen/Bar
Modifier in Red
Select this option to print the menu item modifiers on the kitchen chit
using red ink.
Disable Kitchen
Coordination
Select this option to disable the kitchen coordination feature. When
selected, the kitchen and bar receipts do not display the “Being Made
On Other Stations” message when printing to multiple bar or kitchen
printers.
Kitchen/Bar Chits Show
Item Price
Select this option to print the prices of the items on the kitchen and bar
chits.
Kitchen/Bar Chits Show
Modifier Price
Select this option to print the modifier prices on the kitchen and bar
chits.
Show Recipe Summary
on Kitchen Copy
Select this option to print a summary of the items’ recipes on the
kitchen chits. A recipe must have been created for the menu item for
this option to work.
Kitchen/Bar Print
Description
Select this option to print the description of the menu item that is
defined in the Menu Item Editor. Any item description you wish to
display requires “>>” in front of the description.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
290
Store Settings
Receipts > Other Options
Field Name
Description
Closing Report Show
Sales by Order Types
Select this option to show sales in the closing report by Order type (for
example Dine In, Take Out, etc.).
Guest/Packager Receipt
Title Print in Red for
Delivery Order
Select this option to print the title of the Guest and Packager receipts in
red. If enabled, this option enables the ability of the kitchen printer to
print in red.
Guest Check, Kitchen
And Bar Chits Show
Postal Code
Select this option to print the postal code on the kitchen, bar, and guest
receipts.
Hide Order # from
Receipts
Select this option to hide the order number on the Guest Receipt.
Hide Order # from
Charge Slip
Select this option to hide the order number on the credit card charge
slip.
Hide Time from Daily
Receipt Summary
Select this option to hide the time on the daily receipt summary.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
291
Print > Guest Check
Field Name
Description
Print Guest Check on
Send
Select this option to print the guest check whenever the “Done,”
“Settle,” or “Cash Tender” buttons are clicked in the Order Entry
screen.
Print Two Copies of
Guest Checks
Select this option to print two copies of the guest check.
Re-Print Check Need
Manager Override
Select this option to require a manager to approve a reprint of a guest
check.
Smart Seat Handling
Select this option to group menu items on the guest check by seat
numbers if seats are specified.
Show Total Per Seat
Select this option to show the total amount per seat on the guest check.
The taxes for each seat are not based on the items per seat, but the total
tax divided equally among the seats.
Do Not Print Guest
Check for Dine In
Orders in Order Entry
Select this option to disable printing a guest check from Order Entry for
Dine In orders.
Do Not Print Guest
Check for Take Out
(Phoned In) Orders in
Order Entry
Select this option to disable printing a guest check from Order Entry for
Take Out orders that were phoned in by the customer.
Do Not Print Guest
Check for Take Out
(Walk In) Orders In
Order Entry
Select this option to disable printing a guest check from Order Entry for
Take Out orders that were ordered by walk in customers.
Do Not Print Guest
Check for Drive Thru
Orders In Order Entry
Select this option to disable printing a guest check from Order Entry for
Drive Thru orders.
Do Not Print Guest
Check for Delivery
Orders In Order Entry
Select this option to disable printing a guest check from Order Entry for
Delivery orders.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
292
Store Settings
Print > Kitchen/Bar
Field Name
Description
Enable Smart Kitchen
Printing
Select this option to print the Kitchen copy with menu items combined
and modifiers listed separately for each item.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
293
Enable Smart Bar
Printing
Select this option to print Bar items combined and modifiers listed
separately for each item.
Sort Kitchen Items
Automatically on
Kitchen Chits
Select this option to automatically print the menu items on the kitchen
chit in order of their sort numbers, which is defined in the Menu Item
Editor for that menu item. For example if in the menu item editor you
assigned all menu items classified as appetizers with a sort number of
“1” and all menu items classified as salads with a sort number of “2,”
then the kitchen receipt lists the appetizers first and the salads second.
Enable Delayed Send
Order Feature
Select this option to enable hold functions in the software. The
software must be running on the server computer for this option to
work properly.
Print Kitchen/Bar Item
on the Fly
Select this option to print each item to the kitchen once the next item is
clicked.
Delay Auto Print to
Kitchen/Bar On Settle
Select this option to delay the print to the kitchen until the order is
completely settled and payment is received when using the “Settle”
button in order entry.
Print > Multilingual
Field Name
Description
Guest Check Show Sec
Lang Also
Select this option to print the secondary language specified (if any) in
addition to the primary language on the guest copy of the check.
Packager Receipt Print
Secondary Language
Select this option to print the packager receipt in the secondary
language as well as the primary language.
Packager Print
Secondary Lang. Only
Select this option to print only the secondary language at the packager
printer.
Kitchen/Bar Print Both
Languages
Select this option to print both the primary and secondary languages on
the kitchen/bar chit.
Kitchen Use Secondary
Language
Select this option to print the kitchen chit in the specified secondary
language.
Bar Use Secondary
Language
Select this option to print the bar chit in the specified secondary
language.
Kitchen Language
Select a language from this drop-down list to specify the language
printed in the kitchen. The items affected are everything on the chit
except for the menu items and the menu modifiers. This overrides any
other language settings you may have in the system.
Bar Language
Select a language from this drop-down list to specify the language
printed at the bar. The items affected are everything on the chit except
for the menu items and the menu modifiers. This overrides any other
language settings you may have in the system.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
294
Store Settings
Print > Packager Receipt
Field Name
Description
Copies of Packager
Receipts for Dine In
Orders
Select this drop-down list to specify the number of packager receipt
copies to print at the packager printer for Dine In orders.
Copies of Packager
Receipts for Phoned In
Orders
Select this drop-down list to specify the number of packager receipt
copies printed at the packager printer for Phoned In orders.
Copies of Packager
Receipts for Walk In
Orders
Select this drop-down list to specify the number of packager receipt
copies printed at the packager printer for Walk In orders.
Copies of Packager
Receipts for Drive Thru
Orders
Select this drop-down list to specify the number of packager receipt
copies printed at the packager printer for Drive Thru orders.
Copies of Packager
Receipts for Delivery
Orders
Select this drop-down list to specify the number of packager receipt
copies printed at the packager printer for Delivery orders.
Print > Customer Receipt
Field Name
Description
Auto Print Receipt when Select this option to print all receipts (except guest check)
automatically.
Finished
Select this option to print 2 copies of the Gift Card or credit receipts.
Gift Cert/Cust Credit
Print 2 Copies of Receipt Keep these receipts at the restaurant in case the customer forgets to
bring their Gift Card or receipt when ready to use it.
Paid Out Print 2 Copies
of Receipt
Select this option to print 2 copies of the Pay Out receipt. By default,
the software only prints 1 copy of the Pay Out receipt.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
295
Print > Other Options
Field Name
Description
Asian and Ultra Print
Font Name
This field allows you to specify the name of the font to use for the
Ultra Large and Asian Printer types in this field. The font entered must
be a fixed width font or the receipts will not print correctly.
Asian/Ultra Large
Kitchen Printer Extra
Line Feed
This field allows you to specify extra line feeds for Asian and Ultra
large print types on the kitchen printer. Simply enter 0-9 to specify
additional line feeds at the end of the paper. This is useful if the printer
is stopping before the text has cleared the tear-bar or auto-cutter.
Asian/Ultra Large Bar
Printer Extra Line Feed
This field allows you to specify extra line feeds for Asian and Ultra
large print types on the bar printer. Simply enter 0-9 to specify
additional line feeds at the end of the paper. This is useful if the printer
is stopping before the text has cleared the tear-bar or auto-cutter.
Normal Desktop Printer
Font Size
This field allows you to specify the font size to print on your normal
desktop printer. This is helpful if you wish to print your reports in a
larger or smaller font.
Windows Printer
Columns Per Line
These fields allow you to adjust the columns on the receipt. The lower
the number in these fields, the fewer columns are used for the receipt.
Staff/CRM
Field Name
Description
Pay Period
This drop-down list lets you specify the pay periods for your payroll.
 Weekly: Once per week
 Bi-Weekly: Once every two weeks
 Semi-Monthly: Twice per month
 Monthly: Once per month
Work Week End Day
This drop-down list allows you to specify the last workday of each
week. Simply open the drop-down list and select the day of the week.
Please note that this setting is only for reporting purposes and has
no effect on the payroll functions.
Clock Out Reminder
After (Minutes)
This field allows you to specify the number of minutes an employee can
be clocked in beyond their scheduled clock out time before the system
flashes a reminder notifying the user to clock out. This feature is useful
if you have employees who forget to clock out when they leave.
Over Time Basis
This drop-down list allows you to specify how overtime is calculated.
“Other” enables more advanced features found in the registry.
Over Time After
(Hours)
This field allows you to specify the total number of hours that must be
worked before overtime accrues.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
296
Store Settings
Over Time Hour %
This field allows you to specify the percentage of straight pay paid for
overtime. For example, if you pay your employees time and a half for
overtime, enter 150 in this field.
Force Hourly Employee
Clock In before Use
System
Select this option to force any employee set up as an hourly employee
to clock into the system before being allowed to continue.
Employee with Multi Job Select this option to allow your employees to have more than one job.
To setup an employee with two jobs, the employee must have two
Selection
records that are the same, except for two differences. 1) The employee
record for the second job should not include an access code. 2) The job
title must be different in the second record when setting up an
employee with two jobs.
Take Out/Delivery Show
Search Type
Select this option to prompt the user to select the search type to use to
bring up the customer’s file. Whenever the customer lookup window
appears (for example, when selecting Take Out) you are able to choose
how to lookup customers (by MSR Card, Account Code, Customer
Name, or Phone number). By default, you can only search by phone
number.
Enforce Exact Telephone Select this option to enforce the exact number of digits (specified in
Store Settings > General under Telephone Display Format) when the
Number Digits
user enters a phone number. This helps eliminate entering incomplete
telephone numbers.
Auto Create Freq. Diner
Reward
Select this option to automatically create the Frequent Diner rewards
once a frequent diner account qualifies for the rewards.
Minimum Check
This field allows you to specify the minimum check amount necessary
for an order to qualify for Frequent Diner Reward Points. For example,
if you want only checks over $40.00 to qualify for reward points,
simply enter 40 in this field.
Tracking Begin Time
This field allows you to specify the time of day that Frequent Diner
tracking begins so that you may only offer Frequent Diner tracking and
points during certain times of the day.
Tracking End Time
This field allows you to specify the time of day that Frequent Diner
tracking ends.
Freq. Points Expire Days This field allows you to specify the number of days that customers
have to redeem Frequent Diner points before they expire. Since this
field does not change on a daily basis, it is not readily editable, so as to
help prevent the accidental changing of the figure in this field. If you
must edit this field, place the cursor in the field, press the Insert key on
your keyboard, and enter the number of days.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
297
Minimum Checks Count
This field allows you specify the number of checks a customer must
have before qualifying for Frequent Diner point tracking.
Minimum Checks Total
This field allows you to specify the minimum combined total of all
orders a customer must have before qualifying for Frequent Diner point
tracking. For example, the customer must have spent $500.00 to qualify
for a credit.
Reward Credit Amount
This field allows you specify the dollar amount of credit awarded to
qualifying customers. For example, to give the customer a $30 credit,
enter 30 in this field.
Tech Tip: The options below only apply when using the Aldelo® Gift Card Server.
These should be left blank if you are not using the server software. The options below
replace and simplify the setup procedures in the older version of the Gift Card Server.
GCS Site Number
This field allows you to enter a site number for this location when using
the Aldelo® Gift Card Server software. This software is not included in
the Aldelo® POS package, but is a separate module that may be
purchased from Aldelo.
GCS Server IP
This field allows you to enter the IP address of the CGS Server. This IP
address must be the IP address of the static IP given to you by your ISP.
GCS Server Port
This field allows you to enter the port number of the port used to allow
CGS to communicate.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
298
Store Settings
Products > Modifiers
Field Name
Description
Menu/Modifier Font Size This field allows you to specify the size of the font that appears on
your menu items and menu modifiers. This only affects the screen and
does not change your printer font size.
Sort Menu Sub
Items/Forced Modifiers
Select this option to sort the Sub Level Items alphabetically.
Persist Manual Modifier
Price Change
Select this option to allow manual entry of modifier prices. By default,
without this option enabled, the software maintains the price entered
during setup, and does not allow manual price changes.
Hide NOTE from Touch
Modifier Screen
Select this option to hide the Note button on the Modifier screen in
Order Entry. This option is helpful if you do not want your wait staff to
put notes on the orders.
Hide ‘Half’
Select this option to disable the “Half” modifier type. This option is
useful for saving space on the modifier type selection list in the
Modifier screen in Order Entry.
Hide ‘Toppings’
Select this option to disable the “Toppings” modifier type. This option
is useful for saving space on the modifier type selection list in the
Modifier screen in Order Entry.
Hide ‘Bar Mixing’
Select this option to disable the “Bar Mixing” modifier type. This
option is useful for saving space on the modifier type selection list in
the Modifier screen in Order Entry.
Hide ‘All’
Select this option to disable the “All” modifier type. This option is
useful for saving space on the modifier type selection list in the
Modifier screen in Order Entry.
Disable FINISH button
in Forced Modifiers
Select this option to disable the Finish button that appears on the
forced modifier selection window in Order Entry. This option is useful
if you do not want the users to have the ability skip any of the forced
modifier choices.
Auto Select Single Forced Select this option to automatically select the forced modifier if there is
only one choice. For example, if you only have fries as a forced
Modifier
modifier choice, select this option to always auto-select fries with the
menu item.
Modifier Builder Type
#1-8
This field lets you specify the eight master modifier builder types.
These serve as a basis for the modifier builder screen. At least one
must be entered to use the Modifier Builder Template Setup in the
Back Office.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
299
Products > Pizza
Field Name
Description
Proportioned Pizza
Topping Charge
Select this option to charge half price for a topping put on only half of
the pizza. This option also works with third and quarter pricing
methods.
Half Topping Half Price
on EVEN Qty
Select this option to charge half price on a topping when the total
toppings ordered is an even quantity. For example, if you order a pizza
to be divided into two or four sections, this option charges half price
for each of the toppings. If you order a pizza to be divided into three
sections, this option charges full price for those toppings.
Do Not use 4” x 1.5”
Large Label For Pizza
Label Printing
This option allows the user to use the 1” x 3” labels for printing pizza
labels instead of the 4” x 1.5” labels.
Products > Inventory
Field Name
Description
Enable Auto Inventory
Depletion by Sales
Select this option to enable automatic inventory depletion. This, in
combination with other features, enables you to automatically deplete
items from your inventory.
Monitor Inventory Level Select this option to display a warning message when an item is
ordered and there is not enough inventory to make the item. This does
when Ordering
not provide a countdown of the inventory but serves to notify the user
that the inventory items are no longer in stock.
Minimum Recipe Profit
%
This field allows you to specify the minimum markup for all menu
items. This option is used for inventory tracking, and provides an idea
of the profit for a recipe. The default is 100%. For example, if a menu
item costs the restaurant $1.00, and you want to sell it for $2.50, enter
150 in this field (a markup of 150% of the cost plus the original cost of
$1.00 equals $2.50).
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
300
Store Settings
Products > Other Options
Field Name
Description
Open Price Item Ask
Desc.
Select this option to prompt the user to enter a description of the item
anytime an open price item is ordered. To use an open price item, enter
1234.56 as the default item price in the Menu Item Editor.
Do Not Auto Hide Sub
Menu Item Page
Select this option to keep the sub-level item page displayed when
ordering menu items. By default, this page closes and makes you
reselect the top-level item. For example, if you have a top level item
called Domestic Beer and you click it, you have the option of ordering
several different types. If you select Budweiser, the software closes this
window and requires you to select Domestic Beer again to order
another Budweiser. With this option enabled, the window with the
domestic beers stays active and allows you to order multiple beers.
Click the “Finish” button to close the window.
Menu Auto Price
Percentage Based
Select this option to tell the software that the menu item auto price is
percentage based rather than dollar based. This works for discounts
only; when you enter a percentage, it discounts the item, but cannot be
used for charging more than 100% of the item base cost.
Order Entry
Field Name
Description
Show Unsent Items in
Green
Select this option to mark all ordered items in Green on the Order
Entry screen. This helps prevent accidental reordering of items.
Order Entry Amount
Due in Yellow
Select this option to show the “Amount Due” on the Order Entry screen
in yellow. This option is useful for people who may be colorblind or
who have problems seeing the color red.
This feature allows price changes on items not yet sent to the kitchen.
Only Secure Change
Price Feature on Already This allows the server to perform price changes on items and send them
to the kitchen. If the server tries to go back and change the price again
Sent Items
on the same item, the software requires a person with a sufficiently
high security level to approve the second change.
Disallow Edit of Existing
Open Order in Order
Entry
Select this option to prevent the editing of orders after they are sent.
You cannot edit an order from Recall.
Hide Voided Item from
Order Screen
Select this option to hide items that have been voided on the Order
Entry screen.
Hide Expired Hold Time
Select this option to hide the Item/Order hold time once the hold time
has expired.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
301
Void Item Require
Explanation
Select this option to require an explanation anytime an item is voided.
Show Coupon
Confirmation on Finish
in Order Entry
Select this option to show a reminder screen prompting the user to
enter any coupons before the order is completely settled.
Select this option to exempt Dine In orders from showing the reminder
Coupon Confirmation
Exclude Dine In in Order screen prompting the user to enter any coupons before the order is
completely settled. Other order types are not be affected by this option.
Entry
Disable ‘Half’ Portion
Select this option to disable the “Half” key on the order entry screen.
Allow Save Order
without Any Items
Select this option to save an order, even if no items have been entered.
This leaves the ticket open for future use.
Weight Button Caption
This field allows the user to enter a custom name for the weight button
located on the order entry screen.
Misc. Features Lock
Override in Order Entry
Use this drop-down list to set the minimum level of security required
to override the lock on the Misc. button in order entry.
Fire Kitchen 1-6
These options allow the user to send a fire command to the kitchen
once a specific part of the order is ready to be prepared. This feature is
useful if your orders have items that do not need to be cooked
immediately. For example, if you send an order to the kitchen with an
appetizer, salad, and a main course lobster, the lobster does not need to
be cooked until after the salad is prepared and served. Select the Fire
button on the Recall screen to notify the kitchen to cook the lobster.
Void Item/Order Quick
Reason
These fields allow you enter a list of reasons for performing voids to
cut down on the time necessary for a server to create a void. The server
can then pick a reason from the list, rather than writing the entire
reason each time. For example, “Mistake on Order” or “Customer
Changed Mind” would be common reasons for voids.
Other
Field Name
Description
Confirm Exit Program
Select this option to prompt the user to confirm exiting the program.
Enable this option to prevent unwanted closing of the software.
Exit Program Security
This drop-down list allows you to set the minimum security level
necessary to exit and minimize the program.
Open Order Reminder
After (Hours)
This field specifies the number of hours an order can have open status
before a reminder displays notifying the user of the open order.
Change Server Security
This field specifies the minimum security level necessary to change an
order’s server.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
302
Store Settings
Select this option to search by the order number in the Recall screen. If
Search By Order
Number in Recall Screen this option is enabled, the Barcode on the ticket becomes the order
number (it replaces the ticket number). By default, the search is done
by ticket number.
Disable Smart Ticket
Search
With this feature enabled, only open orders display on the recall
screen. The settled and voided orders are hidden.
Enable Advanced Back
Office Protection
Select this option to increase security for Data Source, Store Settings,
Security Settings, Station Settings, Employee files, Video Surveillance
Controls, and Reports. For example, a security level of 4 might be
required to get into the Back Office but a security level of 5 might be
required to access the features mentioned above.
Show Secured Credit
Card Number
Select this option to display the full credit card number on the receipt
instead of a series of X’s.
Disable Auto Print Bank
Report
Select this option to disable the liability report auto print function when
signing out a cash drawer.
Enable Bar Tab PreAuthorization
Select this option to allow the user to run a credit card preauthorization for a pre-determined amount on a Bar Tab order. Once
this amount is reached, the bartender must settle the tab and create a
new one with a new pre-authorized amount.
Bar Tab PreAuthorization Amount
Select this field to set the Bar Tab Pre-Authorization amount.
24 Hour Operation Mode Select this option to enable the “Next Day Transfer” button in
Operations > Revenue Center. All open orders transfer to one minute
after the “Daily Start Time” (which is the next day).
Show Non Resettable
Grand Total
Select this option to show the Grand Total on the daily closing report.
This total is the grand total for all positive transactions since the
restaurant first opened. It cannot be reset.
This setting works in conjunction with the features for Ontario,
Bakery Pastries Tax 2
Canada.
Exempt if All Bakery
Pastries Quantity is 6 or
More (Otherwise, treat it
as prepared food)
Soft Drinks Tax 2
Exempt if Sold with
Prepared Food and Sub
Total is Below Tax 2
Exempt Trigger Amount
This setting works in conjunction with the features for Ontario,
Canada.
Enable Table Group Tip
Sharing
Select this option to enable the sharing of tips on the total sales for a
particular table group. The total shared is the sales for that table group
before taxes. This option only works for Staff Bank and shows up on
the Bank Liability Report.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
303
Hide Tip Sharing
Formula on Staff
Banking Report
Select this option to hide the formula on the bank liability report used
to calculate the shared tip amounts so that the server that must share
does not see the percentages setup for other employees.
Manager Alert Pager
Number
Enter the pager number of the manager pager. This affects all manager
type pages specified in the software under “Manager Alerts” when
configuring the paging options.
Pizza Size (1-10) Alias
Name
Specify a name for each pizza size. Examples are Small, Medium,
Large, Extra Large, etc.
Pizza Size (1-10) Half
Topping Price
Specify the half-topping price corresponding to the sizes in the option
above. All half toppings are priced the same.
Aldelo Finger Print
Server Data Source
Specify where the fingerprint database is located; the local system or
the network. It should be located on the same system as the server
computer to increase speed. Double-click inside the field to display an
open file dialog box.
Aldelo Kitchen Display
Server IP Address
Specify the IP address of the computer that has the Aldelo® Kitchen
Display Server running on it.
Aldelo Kitchen Display
Server IP Port
Enter the IP port number specified in the configuration of the Kitchen
Display Server settings.
Off Premise Tax (1-3)
Applied Override
If the ordered items are for consumption outside of the restaurant (off
premises), the respective tax (1, 2, or 3) is not applied to the order.
Sales Taxes Always
Round Up
When the results of a percentage sales tax calculation in Aldelo® POS
requires rounding, select this option to always round the figure up.
Enable Malaysia
Rounding
This enables a system of rounding the total dollar amount of the order
to the nearest multiple of five cents. For example, if the total dollar
amount of the order is $25.38, $25.39, $25.40, $25.41 or $25.42, the
customer is charged $25.40. However, if the total dollar amount of the
order is $25.43, $25.44, $25.45, $25.46, or $25.47, the customer is
charged $25.45.
Do Not Distribute
Gratuity as Cash
Enable this option if your employees do not collect their gratuities in
cash at the end of their shifts but you instead pay them their gratuities
on their payroll checks. This option causes the gratuities collected to be
included in the cashier’s amount for which he or she is responsible at
the end of the shift.
Disable New Factura on
Re-Print
This disables the generation of a new factura on a reprinted receipt. The
reprinted receipt will have the same factura as the original receipt.
Disable Seat Number on
Kitchen Bar Chits
This disables the printing of the customer’s seat number on all kitchen
and bar chits.
Disable Dine In EDC
Draft upon Auth
This disables the printing of the draft receipt in EDC for Dine In orders
upon authorization of the transaction.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
304
Store Settings
Disable Bar EDC Draft
upon Auth
This disables the printing of the draft receipt in EDC for Bar orders
upon authorization of the transaction.
Disable Take Out EDC
Draft upon Auth
This disables the printing of the draft receipt in EDC for Take Out
orders upon authorization of the transaction.
Disable Drive Thru EDC This disables the printing of the draft receipt in EDC for Drive Thru
orders upon authorization of the transaction.
Draft upon Auth
Disable Delivery EDC
Draft upon Auth
This disables the printing of the draft receipt in EDC for Delivery
orders upon authorization of the transaction.
Enable EDC Draft
Reprint in Settle
This enables the printing of the draft receipt in EDC when the
transaction is reprinted in the Settle screen.
This enables the printing of the guest receipt for a delivery order at the
Enable Guest Receipt
Reprint in Driver Assign time a driver is assigned to deliver the order.
This enables the printing of the EDC draft receipt for a delivery order
Enable EDC Draft
Reprint in Driver Assign at the time a driver is assigned to deliver the order.
Bar Tab Auto Re-Auth
upon Check Close
This enables the feature that allows the user to pre-authorize a
customer’s credit card for a certain limit by swiping it through the MSR
device. When the pre-authorized limit is reached, the card is
automatically re-authorized for the same amount again without the
need to swipe the card again. Please note that there is a limit of eight
(8) authorization transactions that may be performed under this feature
and that the subsequent re-authorizations may be subject to a different
interchange rate than the initial pre-authorization. Please contact your
payment processor for information on the rates charged for these preauthorizations and re-authorizations.
Packager Receipt Hide
Item Price
This disables the printing of the item price on the receipt that goes on
the item package.
Packager Receipt Hide
Check Totals
This disables the printing of the guest check total on the receipt that
goes on the item package.
Packager Receipt
Alternate Name Print
Large
This enables the printing of the alternate name on the receipt that goes
on the item package in a large font.
Daily Closing Report
Hide Driver Timing
Section
This disables the printing of the driver timing section on the daily
closing report.
Unassign Driver
Requires Manager
This enables the feature to require an employee with a manager’s or
higher security access level to unassign a driver.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Store Settings
Prompt Packager
Receipt Re-Print in
Recall
305
This enables the display of a message when an order is recalled asking
the user if he wishes to re-print a copy of the packager receipt.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
306
Store Settings
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Security Settings
Appendix B
Security Settings
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
307
308
Security Settings
Security Settings allow the restaurant owner to set a minimum security level required to access each
function of the software. Then by assigning each employee a security access level, control can be
maintained over what functions and information each employee may access in the system. Giving
these settings some serious thought as to what functions each category of employee has a legitimate
need to access can greatly enhance the security of your POS system. These settings may be edited
by navigating to Back Office > Security Settings.
Security Settings
Security Name
Description
Access Delivery Status This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to access the Delivery Status feature on the Main POS menu.
Minimum Default
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
1
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Access Driver
Tracking
Minimum Default
1
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to access the Driver feature on the Main POS menu.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Adjust Price in Order
Entry
Minimum Default
4
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to change the menu item price when on the Order Entry screen.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Approve Cash
Register Discrepancies
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to approve a cash drawer discrepancy issue when the cashier is
performing a Cashier Out.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Cashier Out Another Person’s Cash Register
Minimum Default
4
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Security Settings
Security Name
Access Back Office
Minimum Default
5
309
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to access the Back Office.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Cash Discount
Amount Entry
Minimum Default
3
Description
This option allows you to specify the minimum level of security required
to use a cash discount in Order Entry.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Apply Credit Usage
Require Manager
Minimum Default
3
Description
This option allows you to specify the minimum level of security required
to apply a credit to an order in the Order Entry screen.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Access Daily Closing
Report
Description
This option allows you to specify the minimum level of security required
to review the Closing Report on the Operations > Revenue Center
screen. This security setting also disables the Revenue Center and In
House Charge buttons in Operations. This security also is used for the
Assign Table feature in Operations > Other Tools.
Minimum Default
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
5
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Ability to access the “Revenue Center” in Operations.
Reverting and Order/Settlement
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
310
Security Settings
Security Name
Discounts Require
Manager
Minimum Default
3
Description
This option allows you to specify the minimum level of security required
to apply a discount toward an order or item on the Order Entry screen.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Unchecked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Edit Delivery
Compensation Amount
Description
This option allows you to specify the minimum level of security required
to modify the delivery driver compensation amount when in the Customer
Information screen.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Minimum Default
3
Security Name
Edit Unpaid Employee
Time Cards
Minimum Default
4
Description
This option allows you to specify the minimum level of security required
to edit any unpaid employee time cards inside the Time Card screen.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Create New Orders
Description
This option allows you to specify the minimum level of security required
to create a new order.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Minimum Default
1
Security Name
Exclusive Cash
Register Access
Minimum Default
Description
This security setting blocks other employees from gaining access to the
cash drawer or Settle functions on this station when the cashier is signed
in, except for those employees/managers with security levels greater than
or equal to the Override Security Level.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
3
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Security Settings
311
Security Name
Exclusive Server
Access
Description
This security setting blocks other servers from accessing the current
server’s orders for edit or print, unless their security level exceeds the
Override Security Level specified here.
Minimum Default
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
3
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Reprint Guest Check/Customer Receipt Requires Manager Override
Security Name
Approval of Clock In
Time Not on Schedule
Minimum Default
4
Security Name
Issue Refund to
Customer
Minimum Default
4
Security Name
Maintain Customer
Credits
Minimum Default
4
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to perform a forced employee clock in. This is useful when
employees are working but are not scheduled to work.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to issue a refund to a customer. This also sets the security for
reverting orders to unpaid status.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to create new customer credits.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
312
Security Settings
Security Name
Maintain Gift
Certificates
Minimum Default
4
Security Name
Access Manual
Modifier Screen
Minimum Default
3
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to access Maintain Gift Certificates in the Back Office under
Activities > Customer Activities > Maintain Gift Certificates.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to go into the Manual Modifier entry screen when inside the
Modifier screen in Order Entry.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Access Miscellaneous
Features in Operations
Minimum Default
3
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to access the Inventory Activities button in the Operation screen.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Do Not Print Duplicate
Order to Bar
Minimum Default
Description
When you enable this setting, the system does not send already printed
items to the bar printer, as long as there are no changes to the order.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Do Not Print Duplicate
Order to Kitchen
Minimum Default
Description
When you enable this setting, the system does not send already printed
items to the kitchen printer, as long as there are no changes to the order.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Security Settings
Security Name
Access No Sale
Feature
Minimum Default
1
313
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to access the No Sale feature. This feature is still enforced, even
when the employee is the cashier for this drawer. If the Access No Sale
Require Manager security is enabled, this security does not work.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Access No Sale
Require Explanation
Minimum Default
Description
This security option allows you to require an explanation for why a No
Sale was performed.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Access No Sale
Require Manager
Minimum Default
3
Description
This security option allows you to require a manager’s security level to
perform a No Sale. This overrides the Access No Sale Feature security.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Apply Gratuity
Require Manager in
Order Entry
Description
This option allows you to specify the minimum level of security required
to apply an order gratuity when inside the Order Entry window.
Minimum Default
3
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
314
Security Settings
Security Name
Issue Payout to
Vendor
Minimum Default
4
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to perform a Pay Out.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Recall Existing Order
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to use the Recall feature.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Minimum Default
1
Security Name
Accept Gift Certificate
Redemption
Minimum Default
3
Description
This option allows you to specify the minimum level of security required
to apply a Gift Certificate payment type.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Cashier Sign
In/Cashier Sign Out
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to perform Cashier In and Cashier Out operations. This also
disables the Frequent Diner and Other Tools buttons in Operations.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Minimum Default
1
Security Name
Apply Surcharge
Require Manager
Minimum Default
3
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to apply a surcharge to an order in the Order Entry screen.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Unchecked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
315
Security Settings
Security Name
Accept
Complimentary
Payment
Minimum Default
4
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to make an order complimentary.
Override Default
Minimum Default
4
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Accept In House
Charge Payment
Minimum Default
3
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to apply an In House Charge Payment.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Security Name
Void Order or Items
Description
This security setting allows you to specify the minimum level of security
required to void orders or items.
Override Default
Security Enforced Default
Checked
Other Functions Tied to this Security
Minimum Default
3
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
316
Security Settings
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Station Settings
Appendix C
Station Settings
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
317
318
Station Settings
Station Settings are similar to Store Settings except that they only affect the local station. For
example, selecting Spanish for the Station Language only affects the station where you made this
selection, not the entire system. These settings may be edited by navigating to Back Office >
Station Settings.
Station Settings > General
Field Name
Description
Station Number
This field displays the station number of this station. This number is
generated automatically by the software and cannot be edited using
traditional methods like fields or check boxes. To edit this number, use
SQL statements to delete the station number information in the
database. This action removes all sales information from the database
due to the data being associated with all transactions. This must only be
performed by Aldelo technical support or other qualified technician.
Computer Name
This field displays the name of your computer based on the computer’s
name in the Windows network.
Station Language
Use this drop-down list to specify the desired language of this station.
The employee default language overrides this option.
System Language
Settings
Use this feature to customizes language settings. You may use different
fonts to customize you POS system, allowing you to match the look of
the POS to the restaurant environment. Experiment before making a
final decision on a font. It is not necessary to change the Charset, as it
causes the system to become unreadable if changed to something not
recognized by the user. There are three sections on this screen. They
are explained in the following three items in this table.
Interface Display
Use this to change the font on all screens in the POS system. For
example, to use “Times New Roman” as your POS font, type “Times
New Roman” in the field next to your language. This field also allows
you to display the correct font for the different languages you may want
to use with Aldelo® POS. Type the font name of the language you wish
to display.
40 Column POS Receipt
Use this feature to change the font Aldelo® POS displays in the Order
Entry screen for the ticket. This allows some flexibility on making the
words easier to read (in some cases). For example, to use “Times New
Roman” as your ticket display font, type “Times New Roman” in the
field next to your language. This field also allows you to display the
correct font for the different languages you may want to use with
Aldelo® POS. Type the font name of the language you wish to display.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Station Settings
319
This allows the user to choose a Fixed-Width font to use for the 80
column reports under Back Office > Reports. These must be FixedWidth fonts or the columns will not line up correctly. Only a few
fixed-width fonts are included with Windows. Courier and Lucida
Console are examples of Fixed Width fonts included with Windows.
Other fonts may be purchased on the web or as a software package in
a retail store. This field also allows you to display the correct font for
different languages you may want to use with Aldelo® POS. Type the
font name of the language you wish to display.
80 Column Report
Enable Video Surveillance This option enables the video surveillance capture feature. This
feature takes a snapshot with any web cam that is supported by
Captures
NetMeeting from Microsoft® whenever certain function events occur,
such as No Sales or Voids. Select which events trigger the snapshot
captures in Back Office > Activities > General Activities > Video
Surveillance Control Center.
Backup Prompt Time
Use this field to specify the time for the automatic backup. For
example, to start the automatic backup at 12AM, simply enter 12AM
in this field.
Automatic Backup
Select this option to automatically backup the database at the
“Backup Prompt Time,” which is specified in the “Backup Prompt
Time” field mentioned above. This is highly recommended, as
frequent backups are essential to saving valuable data. A manual
backup must be performed before the automatic backup can take
place.
Station Specific Picture
Use this field to specify the picture to display on the right side of the
Main POS window. To use this field, simply click on the button with
3 dots on it and navigate to the picture you wish to display. To
remove the picture, simply click the button with the Red X on it.
Station Background
Picture
Select this option to specify a station background picture. This image
is active throughout the software, not just in the Back Office.
Station Settings > Cashier
Field Name
Description
Show Cashier Features
Select this option to show all register features in the POS. For
example, with this option enabled, you see the Settle, Pay Out, Gift
Certificate, and various other buttons in the POS. Without this option
enabled, the register features are not shown and orders cannot be
settled other than with Staff Bank.
Auto Recognize This
Station’s Cashier as the
Default Employee
without Login
Select this option to automatically recognize the cashier on this station
as the default employee. This eliminates the need to enter an access
code when performing functions in the POS.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
320
Station Settings
Stay In Settle Screen
Select this option to allow quick order settlement. Once an order is
settled, the Recall Order screen displays, allowing you to select the
next order to settle.
Change Due Screen
Time Out Seconds
Select this option to define the number of seconds that pass before the
Change Due screen closes.
Foreign Currency Name
To Show On Guest
Check
Select this option to specify a currency name to print on the guest
check. Include the currency symbol if possible. For Example,
“Canadian $.”
Foreign Currency Rate
To Calculate On Guest
Check
Select this option to specify the exchange rate used to calculate the
foreign currency amount listed on the guest check. This number can be
greater or less than one (for example, “1.59” or “0.78”), depending on
whether the foreign currency is stronger or weaker than the default
currency.
Settles Only
Use this drop-down list to specify one specific order type that this
station can settle. For example, to settle only Dine In Orders at this
station, select Dine In from the drop-down list.
Station Settings > Quick Service
Field Name
Description
Stay in Order Entry
Screen After Order is
Finished
Select this option to remain in the order entry screen after the Send or
Settle buttons are pressed. By default, the system returns to the Main
POS screen after the user selects either one of these buttons.
Disable Done/Chain in
Order Entry Screen
Select this option to turn off the Send and Chain buttons in Order
Entry.
Blind Cash Tender in
Order Entry
Select this option to hide the prompt to the user to enter the amount
tendered. The system assumes that the amount collected is correct.
Dine In Use Quick
Service Order Screen
Select this option to use the Quick Service screen for Dine In orders.
Bar Tab Use Quick
Service Order Screen
Select this option to use the Quick Service screen for Bar Tab orders.
Take Out Use Quick
Service Screen
Select this option to use the Quick Service screen for Take Out orders.
Drive Thru Use Quick
Service Screen
Select this option to use the Quick Service screen for Drive Thru
orders.
Delivery Use Quick
Service Screen
Select this option to use the Quick Service screen for delivery orders.
Quick Service Screen
Auto Log Out Seconds
Select this option to specify the number of seconds before the Quick
Service screen logs the current user out after an order has been created.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Station Settings
321
Station Settings > Other Options
Field Name
Description
Auto Show All Orders as Select this option to show All Orders whenever the user Recalls an
the Default Order Type order in the POS. For example, when you click Recall, you see all
orders, regardless of whether they are Take Out, Dine In, Drive Thru,
in Order Recall
etc. If your restaurant does large amounts of business, the load time of
the recall screen increases and could become a problem. Deselect this if
it becomes an issue in your restaurant.
Auto Show Currently
Logged In Server’s
Orders in Recall
Select this option to automatically show the currently logged in
server’s orders in Recall. For example, if John uses Recall and enters
his access code, then all orders shown belong to John. This helps speed
up the access time when using the Recall button.
Stay in Table Selection
Screen After Dine In
Order Completes
Select this option to stay in the table selection screen once a Dine In
order is complete. This makes the order entry process one step faster.
This option also assumes the same server is currently logged in.
Select this option to prevent the system from prompting the user for the
Do Not Prompt User to
customer’s phone number when creating a Take Out order. By default,
Enter Customer Phone
Number for Take Out on the user is prompted to enter the customer’s phone number.
This Station
Mark this Station as a
Drive Thru Station
Select this option to mark this station as a drive thru station. This
option is used in conjunction with Store Settings > Services > Drive
Thru > Drive Thru Orders Use Drive Thru Stations.
Direct Login Screen
This drop-down list allows you to specify the screen the system
displays after an access code is entered or access card is swiped from
the Main POS screen. For example, to display the Dine In screen when
an access code is entered or access card swiped, simply select “Dine
In” from this drop-down list. This is useful with MSR cards in allowing
a card to be swiped in the Main POS screen and going straight to the
Dine In or Recall screens, saving keystrokes, and logging in the user at
the same time.
Enable Bar Tab Services Select this option to enable Bar Tab services for this specific station.
With this option enabled, bar tab orders on this station can be created
for this Station
on this station.
Skip Table/Bar Tab
Type Selection for Dine
In
Select this option to bypass the Table Selection and Bar Tab creation
screens, moving directly to the order entry screen for quicker use. This
option is useful in fast paced bar type scenarios. This option is identical
to the Skip Table Selection Screen in Store Settings, only on a per
station basis.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
322
Station Settings
Bar Drink Items Will
Not Charge Sales Tax
(Applies to Bar Orders
on This Station Only)
Select this option to remove the sales tax on Bar drink items when
ordered through the Bar Tab feature.
Bar Tab Caption
Select this field to enter a custom caption for your bar tab that prints
before the customer’s name on the Guest receipt.
Station Receipt Message
Select this option to enter a message specific to this station. For
example, if you want the ticket to say “Thank You for Visiting our
Restaurant’s Bar, Please Come Again,” enter the message text here.
Export Settings
Select this button to export the current station settings to a file that can
be imported by another station. This speeds up configuration of the
systems.
Import Settings
Select this button to import the station settings from a file exported by
another station. When used in conjunction with the Export Settings
feature, above, this greatly reduces the amount of time it takes to
configure multiple stations.
Extra Settings
Select this button to go to the registry settings in the software.
Station Settings > Printer > Receipt Printer
Field Name
Description
Receipt Printer
Use this drop-down list to select your receipt printer. Be sure to make
the correct selection. There may be several to choose from, depending
on how many are installed on the network.
Receipt Printer Type
Use this drop-down list to select the printer type of your receipt printer.
In general, select the printer type that matches your receipt printer. For
example, if you select “Epson TM-T88II” as your receipt printer, then
select “Epson TM-T88II/III Large Font Autocut” as your receipt printer
type. You may also change the size of the text by specifying a different
printer type. For example, the Ultra Large Print Support printer type
makes the text on your receipt much larger.
Receipt Logo Control
Code
Select this option to print your company’s logo on the receipt. To use
this option, enter the receipt logo control code, which can be obtained
by consulting the user manual that came with the receipt printer. The
Epson control codes are natively supported.
Epson TM Code
Select this button to automatically enter the Epson Control Code for
printing logos.
Do Not Prompt User to
Print Guest Check when
Finished in Order Entry
Screen
Select this option to prevent the software from prompting the user to
print a guest check once the order has been completed in Order Entry.
By default, the software prompts the user to print the check at the
completion of the order.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Station Settings
323
Station Settings > Printer > Packager Printer
Field Name
Description
Packager Printer
Use this drop-down list to select the printer to designate as the packager
printer. Simply choose the printer from the drop-down list..
Packager Printer Type
Use this drop-down list to select this station’s packager printer type.
You can change the font of your packager printer by specifying a
different printer type. For example, selecting the Ultra Large Print
Support printer type makes your packager printer text print much
larger.
Station Settings > Printer > Kitchen/Bar > Kitchen
Field Name
Description
Kitchen Title (1 – 6)
Use this field to specify a name for each printer. For example, to name
a printer “Kitchen Printer 1,” type “Kitchen Printer 1” in this field.
Repeat this procedure for each kitchen printer on your network.
Kitchen Printer (1 – 6)
Use this drop-down list to specify the printer(s) on the system to
designate as the kitchen printer(s). Simply open the drop-down list and
select the desired printer.
Kitchen Printer Type
(1 – 6)
Use this field to specify the printer type for the Kitchen printer.
Usually, you select the printer type that matches your printer. For
example, if you have an Epson TM-U200 as your kitchen printer, select
one of the “Epson TM-U200” printer types from the Type drop-down
list. To increase the font size, select the Ultra Large Printer types from
this drop-down list.
Station Settings > Printer > Kitchen/Bar > Bar
Field Name
Description
Bar Title
Use this field to specify a name for your bar printer. For example, to
name this printer “Main Bar Printer,” type “Main Bar Printer” in this
field.
Bar Printer
Use this drop-down list to specify the printer to designate as the bar
printer for this station. Simply open the drop-down list and select the
desired printer.
Bar Printer Type
Use this drop-down list to select the printer type for the bar printer. In
general, use the printer type that matches the bar printer. This field is
identical to the Receipt Printer type drop-down list. You can change the
size of the text by specifying a different printer type. For example, the
Ultra Large Print Support printer type makes your receipt printing
larger.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
324
Station Settings
Station Settings > Printer > Label Printer
Field Name
Description
1” x 3” Label Printer
Use this drop-down list to specify the system printer designated as the
label printer on this station. Simply open the drop-list down and select
the desired printer. An example of a label printer is the Eltron LP2844.
4” x 1.5” Pizza Label
Printer
Use this drop-down list to specify the printer for printing pizza labels
on 4” x 1.5” labels.
Station Settings > Printer > Report Printer
Field Name
Description
Use this drop-down list to specify the system printer designated as the
report printer on this station. Simply open the drop-down list and select
the desired printer. This must be a typical desktop printer. The closing
report prints to the receipt printer, not the report printer.
Report Printer
Station Settings > Printer > Other
Field Name
Description
Journal Printer
Select this option to print a duplicate guest receipt on another printer.
When you specify a printer here, it creates an exact duplicate of the
guest receipt.
Journal Printer Type
Use this field to specify a printer type for the Journal printer. Select the
printer type that matches your printer. For example, if your Journal
printer is an Epson TM-U200, select one of the “Epson TM-U200”
printer types from the Type drop-down list.
Remote In House
Charge Printer
Select this option to print a duplicate of the In House Charge Slip on
another printer. When you specify a printer here, it creates an exact
duplicate of the In House Charge Slip.
Remote In House
Charge Printer Type
Use this field to specify the printer type for the Remote In House
Charge Slip printer. Select the printer type that matches your printer.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Station Settings
325
Station Settings > Port Settings
Field Name
Description
Caller ID COM Port
Use this field to specify the COM port for your Caller ID device.
Caller ID Init String
Use this drop-down list to choose the Caller ID box Init string for your
modem. See the modem’s user manual to find the AT commands. Use this
information to determine the correct Caller ID Init String. If the modem’s
Caller ID works in HyperTerminal, it should work in Aldelo® POS.
Pole Display COM
Port
When using a pole display, select the COM port to which the device is
connected.
Pole Message Row 1
Use this field to enter the message to display on the Pole Display’s first
row. For example, to display “Pizza Factory,” enter the text in this field.
Pole Message Row 2
Use this field to enter a message to display on the Pole Display’s second
row. For example, to display “Best Pizza In Town,” enter the text here.
“Home” Control
Code
Enter into this field the code that determines where the Home position of
the cursor is. When using the UTC command set, it is not necessary to
enter the code in this field. When not using the UTC command set, refer
to the user’s manual of your Pole Display for this code or contact the
manufacturer.
“Hide Cursor”
Control Code
Enter into this field the code that hides the cursor. When using the UTC
command set, it is not necessary to enter the code in this field. When not
using the UTC command set, refer to the user’s manual of your Pole
Display for this code or contact the manufacturer.
Serial Cash Drawer
COM Port
From this drop-down list, choose the COM port to which your Serial Cash
drawer is connected. This is only used when directly connecting your cash
drawer to your computer. If you have the cash drawer connected to a
printer, this field is not used.
Cash Drawer Open
Code
When using a SERIAL driven cash drawer, enter the code required to
open the cash drawer into this field. The code is normally “BEL.” If
“BEL” does not work, contact the manufacturer of the cash drawer for the
cash drawer open codes. This is only used with cash drawers connected
directly to the computer.
Weight Scale COM
Port
Use this drop-down menu to select the COM port to which your weight
scale is connected.
Weight Scale Type
Aldelo® POS supports the NCI Weightronics 6700 series family of weight
scales. This may be selected from this drop-down menu.
Serial MSR COM
Port
Use this drop-down list to select the COM port to which your MSR card
reader is connected.
Advanced Buttons
Use these buttons to configure the port settings for each of the different
COM Ports. These settings override any Windows settings.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
326
Station Settings
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Advanced Settings
Appendix D
Advanced Settings
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
327
328
Advanced Settings
The more advanced settings in Aldelo® POS are made by changing the Registry Settings. The
Registry Settings screen may be accessed in Aldelo® POS by navigating to Back Office > Station
Settings > Other Options > Extra Settings. All the features are listed. To change a setting,
highlight it and click the “Edit” button.
Advanced Settings
Field Name
Description
Auto Price Item Not
Discountable
This setting prevents items that have auto pricing from being discounted.
Auto Update Customer
Anniversary with First
Order Month
This setting automatically populates the Anniversary Month in the
customer’s record with the month of their first order at the restaurant, saving
the user from having to enter an Anniversary date manually.
Bank Liability Report
Show Summary Only
This setting hides the Order Payment section on the Bank Liability report.
Cashier Closing Require This setting prevents the closing of a cashier shift until all of shift’s guest
checks have been closed.
All Self Checks Closed
Combine Security Level
This setting enables a security for the combine feature in order entry.
Daily Closing Hide
Employee Time Cards
This setting hides the employee time card section of the closing report to
save paper.
Daily Closing Hide
Gratuity Recap
This setting hides the gratuity recap on the closing report to save paper.
Daily Closing Show
Tender Details
This setting shows the Tender Details in the Closing Report.
Debit Alias
This setting changes the name of the Debit button in the Settle screen.
Debit Pay Security Level This setting enables a security for the Debit button in the Settle screen.
This setting changes the default order type viewed in the recall screen. You
Default Order Type in
must first turn off the feature “Auto Show all Orders as the Default Order
Recall
Type in Order Recall.” This feature is located in Station Settings > Other
Options.
1 = Dine In
2 = Bar Tab
3 = Take Out
4 = Drive Thru
5 = Delivery
This setting hides the Comp button in the Settle screen.
Disable Comp
This setting hides the Credit button in the Settle screen.
Disable Credit
This setting hides the Gift Certificate button in the Settle screen.
Disable Gift Cert
This setting disables pickup chits for Kitchen and Bar type orders when
Disable Kitchen Bar
chits are globally enabled.
Chit when Pickup Chit
Enabled
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Advanced Settings
329
Disable Pickup Chits For This setting disables pickup chits for Bar type orders when chits are
globally enabled.
Bar Tab
Disable Pickup Chits For This setting disables pickup chits for Delivery type orders when chits
are globally enabled.
Delivery
Disable Pickup Chits For This setting disables pickup chits for Dine In type orders when chits are
globally enabled.
Dine In
Disable Pickup Chits For This setting disables pickup chits for Drive Thru type orders when chits
are globally enabled.
Drive Thru
Disable Pickup Chits For This setting disables pickup chits for Take Out type orders when chits
are globally enabled.
Take Out
Disable Price Change
This setting disables the “Change Price” button under the miscellaneous
features of the order entry screen.
Disable Quarters
This setting disables the “Quarters” section on the pizza builder screen.
Disable Startup Warning This setting disables the two pop-ups regarding your screen resolution
and taskbar settings when you first start the software.
Disable Thirds
This setting disables the “Thirds” section on the pizza builder screen.
Do Not Print Cashier
Out Receipt
This setting disables the printing of the cashier out receipt.
Do Not Print Notes on
Guest Check
This setting disables the Notes to the kitchen on the guest check so that
customers will not see them.
This setting hides any employees in the driver dispatch screen who are
Driver Dispatch Hide
Employee Not Clocked In not clocked in.
Driver Do Not Move
Payments from Cashier
This setting disables the feature that moves payments from the Cashier
to the Driver with credit card orders.
Enable Advanced
Fingerprint Security
This setting enables Advanced Fingerprint integration.
Enable Caller ID Trace
File
This setting enables the creation of a trace file to record events that
occur during the use of Caller ID. This file is used by Aldelo Technical
Support in diagnosing problems in the use of Caller ID.
Enable Coin Dispenser
This setting enables Coin Dispenser integration.
Enable EDC Signature
Waiver for QSR Small
Tickets
This setting deletes the signature line on credit card tickets for small
Quick Service type orders. For Visa and MasterCard, no signature is
required for tickets of $25.00 or less; for American Express, no
signature is required for tickets of $15.00 or less.
Enable Marked
Surcharge as Tip
This setting displays a surcharge as a tip on the guest check. The
surcharge must have <TIP> in the surcharge description for this to
function properly.
Enable Seniat Data Input This setting is only used in Venezuela to comply with local regulations.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
330
Advanced Settings
Enable Tax Exempt
Selection
When enabled, this setting requires the user to select from which levels of
tax (tax1, tax2, and tax3) that the selected menu item should be exempt
when the “Tax Exempt” button is selected under the miscellaneous
features of the order entry screen.
Enable Virtual Print
This setting sends the print job to a text file for testing purposes.
End of Day Require All This setting requires that all employees be clocked out before the closing
report can be run.
Clocked Out
Factura
This setting enables the Factura number regardless of the regional
language settings.
Factura Alias
This setting changes the name “Factura.”
GC Auto Deplete
Amount
Enter the amount to deplete from a gift card upon expiration of the
number of days set in the GC Auto Deplete Recur Days setting (below).
GC Auto Deplete Both
This setting enables gift card auto deplete to use Percent or Amount.
GC Auto Deplete
Greater Of
This setting depletes the greater value when depleting by percent and
amount.
GC Auto Deplete
Percent
Enter the percentage to use when depleting value from the gift card.
GC Auto Deplete
Recur Days
Enter the number of days between depletion actions.
Gift Card Discount
Security Level
This setting enables a security for discounts on gift cards.
Grouped Fire Hold on
Bar Chits
This setting enables Bar Receipts to group hold items and normally
submitted items to fire separately (any items not on hold or voided are
considered fire items). Option of Enable Delayed Send Order Feature
should not be selected in Store Settings > Print Tab > Kitchen/Bar
Tab.
Grouped Fire Hold on
Kitchen Chits
This setting enables Kitchen Receipts to group hold items and normally
submitted items to fire separately (any items not on hold or voided are
considered fire items). Option of Enable Delayed Send Order Feature
should not be selected in Store Settings > Print Tab > Kitchen/Bar
Tab.
Guest Receipt
Horizontal Rule Char
This setting allows the user to enter a specific character that he wishes to
use to form separator lines on the guest receipt.
Hide No Cost Item
from Guest Receipt
This setting hides no cost items from the guest check.
Hide Refund Button
This setting hides the refund button from the main POS screen.
Hide Rounding from
Guest Chit
This setting hides the amount added to the check when rounding is used.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Advanced Settings
331
Include ChineseBig5 in
Language Toggle
This setting includes the Chinese Big 5 option when using the
secondary language toggle in the Order Entry screen.
Include Chinese GB in
Language Toggle
This setting includes the Chinese GB option when using the secondary
language toggle in the Order Entry screen.
Include English in
Language Toggle
This setting includes the English option when using the secondary
language toggle in the Order Entry screen.
Include Spanish in
Language Toggle
This setting includes the Spanish option when using the secondary
language toggle in the Order Entry screen.
Inventory Do Not Enforce
Accuracy Accountability
This setting allows employees to directly edit items in the inventory
item editor screen.
KDS End Signal
This setting is used only for Microplus KDS integration.
LCS IP Address
Enter the IP Address of the system running the Aldelo ® Liquor
Controller Server.
LCS IP Port
Enter the IP Port number that the Aldelo ® Liquor Controller Server
uses to communicate on the network with the POS software.
MapPoint Enabled
This setting enables Microsoft MapPoint® integration.
MapPoint Europe
This setting enables MapPoint European Version integration.
MapPoint Fuel Cost
This setting defines the per gallon cost for fuel.
MapPoint Home Address
Enter the address of the restaurant. This is used by MapPoint.
MapPoint Optimize Way
Points
This setting enables the route optimization feature.
MapPoint Route Start
Minutes After
Enter the number of minutes (for food preparation time) to add to the
route time to arrive at an estimated delivery time.
Master Cashier Station
This setting defines this as the master station in a Master/Slave
scenario.
Media Display IP
Enter the IP Address of the system running the Media Display Server.
Media Display Port
Enter the IP Port number that the Media Display Server uses to
communicate on the network with the POS software.
Modified Kitchen Chit
Alias
This setting allows you to change the word “Modified” on kitchen
chits.
Modifier Builder
Selections Not Sorted
This setting sorts the modifiers in order of entry rather than
alphabetically.
NIT Number
Enter the number assigned to you by the local government. This is
primarily used in Latin countries.
No Cash Tender
This setting disables the “Cash” button in the Settle screen.
No Charge Tender
This setting disables all of the Charge Tender buttons in the Settle
screen such as Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, etc.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
332
Advanced Settings
No Check Tender
This setting disables the “Check” button in the Settle screen.
No Gift Certificate Tender
This setting disables the “Gift Certificate” button in the Settle screen.
No House Account Tender
This setting disables the “House Account” button in the Settle screen.
On Hold until Notified Chit This setting allows you to change the message that prints when the
"On Hold Until Notified" button is used during hold operations.
Alias
On Screen Keyboard
Caption
This setting allows you to change the title bar name of the on-screen
keyboard.
Open Price Security Level
This setting allows a security to be applied to the Open Price Item
feature.
Pizza Most Expensive Half
Toggle Security Level
This setting allows a security to be applied to the toggle to change the
half-topping pricing.
PMS Application Name
This is the IIS application name for the hotel integration program.
PMS Room Charge
This setting enables the hotel integration.
PMS Server Name
This is the IP address or URL of the hotel integration server.
Pole Display Line Chars
This setting adjusts the number of characters that can be displayed per
line on the pole display.
Pole Display Station Closed This setting allows you to enter a message to display when the station
has no cashier signed in.
Message
Print Pickup Chits for Bar
Items
This setting prints chits for individual items after the bar ticket prints.
These can be attached to the bar items for delivery to the customer.
Print Pickup Chits for
Kitchen Items
This setting prints chits for individual items after the kitchen ticket
prints. These can be attached to the prepared items for delivery to the
customer.
Print Pizza Label as Chit
This setting prints the pizza label as a chit instead of as a label.
Print Pizza Label on Dine
In
When using the Pizza Builder feature for a Dine In order, this setting
enables the printing of a pizza label similar to the labels that print for
Delivery orders.
Remove Redeemed GC
Account Number
This enables the system to purge the account numbers of redeemed
gift cards, thus allowing the account numbers to be re-used.
Require MSR End Char
This field is used by the Aldelo Development department for
debugging.
Resource Debug
This shows the resource string number in front of the button string.
Secure Employee File
Access Code Field
To enhance security, this setting changes the Access Codes in the
Employee Files screen to display as a series of asterisks (*****),
rather than displaying the actual Access Codes in a readable format.
Secured Back Office Allow
Edit Employees
When advanced Back Office security is used, enabling this setting
allows employees to still edit the employee files.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Advanced Settings
333
Show Cashier Item Sales
Summary
In the Staff Bank report, this option enables the Item Sales Summary
section of the report.
Show OE Title
This setting displays the title bar in the Order Entry screen.
Show Table Number on
Kitchen Receipt Bottom
Also
This setting enables the printing of the table number on the bottom of
the kitchen receipt, as well as the top of the receipt.
Slave Cashier Drawer Off
This setting disables the ability of the slave station to pop the drawer
of the master station.
Special Z Report
This setting enables the Z Report option in Revenue Center.
Split Security Level
This setting allows a security to be applied to the Split function.
Staff Bank Closing Require This setting requires all checks to be closed before ending a Staff
Bank.
All Checks Closed
Staff Bank No Cash Tender This setting disables the Cash Tender button when using Staff Bank.
Staff Cash Drawer Use
Serial Port
This setting allows a Staff Bank to use the Serial Cash Drawer as the
second cash drawer in a two drawer setup.
Surveillance Server IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the system running the Surveillance server.
Surveillance Server IP Port Enter the IP Port number that the Surveillance system uses to
communicate on the network with the POS software.
This setting enables the customers’ names to appear on the table
buttons of the Select Table Number screen in Dine In.
Table Select Show
Customer Name
This setting makes Tax2 tax exempt but does not affect Tax1. This
Tax Exempt PST
(Provincial Sales Tax) Only setting is used in Canada, but may also be used in other jurisdictions
with complex tax rules.
Tax1 Apply on Auto
Gratuity
This setting applies Tax 1 to gratuities.
Tax2 Apply on Auto
Gratuity
This setting applies Tax 2 to gratuities.
Tax3 Apply on Auto
Gratuity
This setting applies Tax 3 to gratuities.
Time Card 7th Consecutive
Work Day Double Time
This setting enables the option to pay double time on the seventh
consecutive day worked by an employee.
Time Card 7th Consecutive
Work Day Double Time
Hours After
This setting specifies the number of hours that must be worked on the
seventh consecutive day before double time is paid.
Time Card Allow Clock In
as Scheduled Time
This setting allows an employee to clock in before their scheduled
time. The clock in time defaults to the scheduled start time.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
334
Advanced Settings
Time Card Clock In Grace
Minutes
Enter number of minutes an employee is allowed to clock in before
their scheduled start time. The time is paid unless rounding is used.
Time Card Clock
Rounding Minutes
This setting rounds clock in and clock out times to the nearest quarter
hour. The number entered is the break point to round up or down.
Time Card Daily Double
Time Hours After
This setting specifies the number of hours that must be worked before
double time is paid.
Time Card Daily Over
Time Hours After
This setting specifies the number of hours that must be worked before
overtime is paid.
Time Card Holiday Pay
Dates
This setting specifies the days that are considered paid holidays. Enter
the dates using the format MM/DD/YYYY. If there are multiple
dates, separate them with commas.
Time Card Missed Break
Penalty Minutes
This setting specifies the number of minutes paid to the employee if
the employee misses a break due to working through the break.
Time Card Weekly Over
Time Hours After
This setting specifies the number of hours that must be worked before
weekly overtime is paid.
Title Footer
Enter a message to print on the bottom of the customer receipt.
Treat Diners as Diners
Card
This setting changes the name “Diner’s” to “Diner’s Club” on the
charge receipt. This must be used where required by law.
Turn Off E-mail
This setting disables the e-mail system.
Two Step EDC Settle
This setting turns on the Two Step EDC Settle functions.
User Interface Aqua Style
This setting enables rounded corners and a gradient style on the
buttons displayed in Aldelo® POS.
User Interface Button Base
Color
This setting allows the user to select a basic color or a custom color
for the backgrounds of the buttons displayed in Aldelo ® POS.
User Interface Button Fore
Color
This setting allows the user to select a basic color or a custom color
for the label text of the buttons displayed in Aldelo® POS.
User Interface Remove
Default Wallpaper
This setting allows the user to remove the wallpaper that appears in
the background of many of the screens in Aldelo® POS.
View Employee Earning
Report Security Level
This setting restricts the viewing of the Employee Earning Report to
those employees with a security access level greater than or equal to
the one specified here.
VIP1 Discount ID
Enter the Discount ID for this VIP Level. The discount ID may be
found in the discounts screen. These are used as special discounts for
VIP customers to whom you may issue VIP cards.
VIP2 Discount ID
Enter the Discount ID for this VIP Level. The discount ID may be
found in the discounts screen. These are used as special discounts for
VIP customers to whom you may issue VIP cards.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Advanced Settings
VIP3 Discount ID
Visa Alias
Weight Scale Decimals
Weight Scale Display Max
Len.
Weight Scale Hardware
Refresh Interval
Weight Scale Integrated
Weight Scale Query
Interval
Weight Scale Unit Name
Weight Size [1-5] Items
Weight Size [1-5] Tare
Wireless Screen 480 By
640
Wireless Screen Height
Pixels
Wireless Screen Width
Pixels
Yes-Tele Custom
Command
335
Enter the Discount ID for this VIP Level. The discount ID may be
found in the discounts screen. These are used as special discounts for
VIP customers to whom you may issue VIP cards.
This setting specifies another name for the Visa settlement type.
Enter the decimal place capacity of your weight scale (for example,
if your weight scale displays 1.57 lb, enter ‘2.’
Enter your weight scale’s maximum display length, including the
decimal point. For example, if your scale can display a maximum of
9.99 kg, enter ‘4’ (one for each digit plus one for the decimal point).
Enter the number of milliseconds to allow to elapse before the
weight scale displays (or refreshes) its current weight reading. The
industry standard for this setting is 25 milliseconds.
Set this key value to “YES” to enable weight scale integration.
Please note that the Weight Scale Unit Name (below) must also be
set or the weight scale integration will not function.
Enter the number of milliseconds to allow to elapse before the
software checks (or rechecks) the weight scale hardware for the
current weight reading. The industry standard for this setting is 75
milliseconds.
Enter the abbreviation for the units of weight used by your scale (lb,
oz, or kg). This abbreviation must be entered in lower case letters.
For each of the tare weights setup below, enter the item ID numbers
of the items that are sold with the respective tare weights [1-5]. For
multiple items, separate the item ID numbers with commas.
Enter up to five different values for your item tare weights (the
weight of the non-consumable packaging in which your weighed
items are wrapped).
This sets the resolution of the PDA device to 480 x 640 when
displaying the wireless software.
This setting specifies a custom height in pixels for the wireless
software. This allows the wireless software to run on any screen size.
This setting specifies a custom width in pixels for the wireless
software. This allows the wireless software to run on any screen size.
This setting specifies a custom init string for the Yes-Tele caller ID
box.
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
336
Advanced Settings
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
337
Index
2
24 Hour Operation Mode....................... 152
A
Access Denied Tracking Report ............ 246
Active Employees Schedules Report ..... 224
Add a Customer to the Waiting List ........... 93
Add Cash To Bank ................................... 159
Adding a Customer Name to an Order ..... 104
Adding a New Font to Windows 7
Professional ............................................ 35
Adding Items to a Ticket ............................ 97
Adjusting Windows .................................... 31
adRes.lang ................................................ 177
adResHostess.dat ...................................... 177
adResISV.dat ............................................ 177
adResSettings.dat ..................................... 177
Advanced Settings .................................... 328
Alias Name ............................................... 119
All-In-One Terminals ................................... 5
Always Connect To This Database ............ 37
Appendix .................................................. 267
Apply Tax on Delivery Charge ................ 122
Apply Tax on Surcharge........................... 103
Applying Credits ...................................... 103
Applying Discounts .................................. 102
Applying Surcharges ................................ 103
Assembling Your Network ......................... 15
Assign Seats ............................................. 106
Assign Table to Server ....................... 93, 159
Assigning a Delivery Order ...................... 123
Assigning a Pager to a Customer.............. 104
Auto Pay All Open Deliveries .................. 149
Auto Recognize this Station’s Cashier as the
Default Employee without Login ... 95, 116
Auto Start Staff Bank When Clock In ........ 87
B
Backup Database ...................................... 178
Bad Check List ......................................... 152
Bad Check Penalties ................................... 42
Bad Check Reasons .................................... 42
Bad Checks ............................................... 170
Follow Up ............................................. 170
New ...................................................... 170
Bank Card Files .......................................... 42
Bank Deposit ............................................ 151
Bank Deposit Report .............................. 265
Bank Liability Report ............................... 150
Bar Tab Caption ....................................... 115
Bar Tab Orders ......................................... 115
Bar Tab Use Quick Service Order Screen 116
Barcode Readers................................... 11, 23
Keyboard Interface ................................. 11
USB Interface ......................................... 12
Batch Transfer .......................................... 129
Blind Cashier Close Out ........................... 150
Break Missed Report ................................ 152
C
Cabling ....................................................... 13
Caller ID ............................................... 12, 26
Modem ................................................... 26
Multi-Line Caller ID Device .................. 26
Caller ID Log ........................................... 158
Caller ID Switch ....................................... 159
Caller ID Tracking Report .................... 260
Cash Drawers ............................... 10, 21, 148
Printer Driven ................................... 10, 21
Serial ................................................ 11, 21
Cash Trays.................................................. 40
Cashier ..................................................... 319
Cashier Discrepancy Report ................. 264
Cashier In ................................................... 88
Cashier Operations ................................... 133
Cashier Out Report ................................ 263
Cashier Settle Operations ......................... 137
Cashier Sign In/Cashier Sign Out .............. 88
Chained Delivery Charge/Comp Per Trip 122
Change Due Screen Time Out Seconds ... 116
Change Price ............................................ 106
Change Server .......................................... 107
Changing a Reservation ............................. 92
Changing Seat Numbers in Order Entry ... 105
Changing the Number of Guests on the
Check ................................................... 104
Changing the Order Type ......................... 104
Changing the Table Number of the Check 105
Check In the Customer ............................... 93
Checking Gift Card Balances ................... 136
Checking In a Reservation ......................... 92
Clear Order ............................................... 107
Client Computer ....................................... 4, 5
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
338
Index
Clocking In................................................. 85
Clocking Out ............................................ 144
Close EDC Batch ..................................... 153
Closing Procedures .................................. 143
Closing Report ......................................... 150
Closing the Cash Drawer ......................... 143
Closing Your Staff Bank .......................... 144
Code Conversion Chart .............................. 44
Coin Changer ....................................... 12, 26
COM Ports ................................................. 21
Combine Orders ....................................... 101
Compact Database.................................... 178
®
Configuring Windows for Networking .... 17
Connecting to a Database over the Network
............................................................... 38
Converting Control Codes ......................... 43
Create a New Bar Tab .............................. 115
Create a New Blank Database ................. 36
Create Customer Address Labels ............. 168
Create In-House Charge Statements ........ 169
Create In-House Statements ..................... 154
Create Inventory Item Labels ................... 171
Create Menu Item Labels ................. 108, 165
Create PO From Shopping List ................ 171
Creating a Database ................................... 37
Creating a Delivery Order ........................ 122
Creating a New Drive-Thru Order ........... 119
Creating a New Take Out Order .............. 118
Creating a Reservation ............................... 91
Current Inventory On Hand Report .... 241
Cust. Credit List ....................................... 151
Custom Currency Denominations .............. 88
Custom Printer Types................................. 43
Customer Activities.................................. 168
Customer Anniversary Listing Report . 213
Customer Credit List Report ................ 214
Customer Credit Redemption ............... 215
Customer Files ......................................... 155
Customer Incidents .................................. 159
Customer Incidents Report ................... 223
Customer Info Report ............................ 210
Customer Lookup ..................................... 107
Customer Pole Displays ....................... 10, 21
Command Set ......................................... 10
Serial ...................................................... 10
Customer Sales By Range Report ......... 211
D
Daily Receipt Summary ............................152
Daily Sales Analysis Report ...................193
Data
Export ...................................................181
Import ...................................................181
Database ......................................................36
Database & Support Files .........................177
Database Engine .......................................177
Database Maintenance ..............................177
Database Recommended Limits................178
Delete Master Data ...................................173
Delivery Charge ........................................121
Delivery Charge Percent Based ................122
Delivery Charge/Comp Per Menu Item ....122
Delivery Comp ..........................................121
Delivery Comp Percent Based ..................122
Delivery Orders.........................................121
Delivery Procedures ..................................123
Delivery Streets...........................................39
Delivery Timing Report ..........................261
Dine In Orders ............................................95
Dine-In Server Performance Report .....230
Dine-In Table Editor ...................................49
Dine-In Table Groups .................................47
Dine-In Tables ...........................................48
Disable Drive-Thru Timing Feature .........119
Disable FINISH Button in Forced Modifiers
..............................................................111
Disable Reservation Feature .......................91
Disable Waiting List Feature ......................92
Discount Usage Report ...........................253
Do Not Prompt User to Enter Customer
Phone Number for Take-Out on this
Station ...................................................117
Drive Thru Orders .....................................119
Driver Delivery Summary Report .........235
Driver Dispatch Screen Assignment
Procedures .............................................123
Driver Summary .......................................160
Drive-Thru Orders Use Drive-Thru Stations
..............................................................119
Drive-Thru Timing Report ....................262
E
Earnings Report ..........................................86
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
339
Index
Edit Work Schedule ................................. 160
Editing Time Cards .................................. 147
Emp. Still Working .................................. 160
Employee Files Report ........................... 249
Employee Payroll History Report ......... 227
Employee Payroll History Report
(Summary) .......................................... 228
Employee Schedules .................................. 54
Employee Setup.......................................... 50
Employee with Multi Job Selection ........... 85
Employees > Driver ................................... 53
Employees > General ................................. 51
Employees > Notes..................................... 53
Employees > Payroll .................................. 52
Enable Delayed Send Order Feature .......... 98
Enable Driver Money Drop ...................... 121
Enable Popup Streets ................................ 121
Enable Staff Banking.................................. 87
Enforce Exact Telephone Number Digits . 117
Export Data .............................................. 181
Export Menu Item Sales ........................... 167
Export Reports.......................................... 182
Gift Certificate List Report ................... 201
Gift Certificate Redemption Report ..... 202
Global Menu Item Price Change .............. 166
Graphics Display ........................................ 32
Gratuity .................................................... 107
Guest Count Report ............................... 185
F
I
Field Name Descriptions .......................... 269
Store Settings........................................ 270
Fonts ........................................................... 35
Forced Modifier Editor ......................... 72, 73
Forced Modifiers ...................................... 111
Freq. Diner Acct. List ............................... 154
Frequent Diner Accounts Report .......... 216
Frequent Diner Sales Summary Per
Account ................................................ 219
Frequent Diner Section ............................. 153
Frequent Diner Tracking Report .. 217, 218
Import Data .............................................. 181
Import New Resource Database ............... 181
Import/Export ........................................... 181
Information Data Entry .............................. 38
In-House Account List ............................. 155
In-House Charge Accounts Report ....... 220
In-House Charge Payments Report ...... 205
In-House Charge Section ......................... 154
In-House Charge Tracking Report ....... 221
Installing ALDELO® POS ......................... 31
Inv. Prep. Forecast.................................... 156
Inventory Activities .................................. 171
Inventory Activities Section ..................... 155
Inventory Groups ....................................... 74
Inventory Items ............................ 75, 76, 156
Inventory Level Report .......................... 242
Inventory Locations ................................... 74
Inventory Shopping List ........................ 236
Inventory UOM (Units of Measure) ........... 82
Inventory Vendor ....................................... 74
Issuing Gift Cards .................................... 135
Issuing Refunds ........................................ 134
Item Details .............................................. 102
G
General Payout ......................................... 133
General Settings ......................................... 39
Generating Reports ................................... 183
Generic Text Printer Drivers ...................... 20
Gift Card Procedures ................................ 135
Gift Cards
Checking Balances ............................... 136
Issuing .................................................. 135
Recharging ........................................... 136
Gift Certificate List .................................. 151
H
Half Orders ............................................... 102
Half Topping Half Price on EVEN Qty ... 112
Hardware .................................................... 13
Hold Screen ............................................... 99
Hold Time Screen ................................... 100
Holding Items ............................................. 98
Hostess / Paging Setup > General ............ 275
Hostess / Paging Setup > Manager Alerts 277
Hostess / Paging Setup > Pagers .............. 278
Hostess / Paging Setup > Reservations .... 276
Hostess / Paging Setup > Waiting List ..... 276
Hostess Procedures..................................... 91
Hourly Inventory Usage ........................... 156
Hubs ........................................................... 14
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
340
Index
J
Jet Compact Utility .................................. 178
Job Titles .................................................... 50
L
Labor Vs. Sales By Breakfast, Lunch, &
Dinner Report ..................................... 199
Language Settings in Windows® 7
Professional ............................................ 34
Languages .................................................. 34
Lock Screens ............................................ 109
M
Maintain Customer Credits ...................... 170
Maintain Customer Records ..................... 168
Maintain Frequent Diner Accounts .......... 169
Maintain Frequent Diner Tracking ........... 169
Maintain Gift Certificates ........................ 170
Maintain In House Charge Accounts ....... 168
Maintain In-House Accounts ................... 154
Maintain Manager Cash Outs................... 166
Maintain Pay Outs .................................... 166
Maintenance Activities .................... 163, 172
General Activities ................................ 163
Manager Alert Pager Number .................... 86
Manager Cash Out ................................... 134
Manager Cash Out Report .................... 207
Manager Operations ................................. 147
Manual Modifiers ..................................... 111
MapPoint Enabled .................................... 122
MapPoint Fuel Cost ................................. 124
MapPoint Home Address ......................... 124
MapPoint Integration Setup ..................... 124
Mark this Station as a Drive-Thru Station 119
Marking a Drive-Thru Order as Complete 120
Media Clear .............................................. 160
Media Close ............................................. 161
Media Exit ................................................ 161
Media Open .............................................. 160
Media Options .......................................... 160
Menu Categories ........................................ 55
Menu Group Editor .................................... 62
Menu Group Schedule ............................... 63
Menu Group Schedule Editor..................... 64
Menu Groups ............................................. 61
Menu Item Auto Prices .............................. 69
Menu Item Editor ........................................65
Menu Item Editor > Page 1 .........................66
Menu Item Editor > Page 2 ...................67, 68
Menu Item List Report ...................250, 251
Menu Item Price Editor ...............................70
Menu Item Sales By Category ..................161
Menu Item Sales By Server Report .......233
Menu Item Sales By Stations Report .....257
Menu Item Sales Per Station By
Employees ............................................258
Menu Item Tracking By Printer Locations
..............................................................259
Menu Items .................................................64
Menu Modifier Usage Report ................255
Menu Modifiers ..........................................70
Menu Profit Analysis Report .................252
Menu Recipe Editor ........................77, 78, 79
Menu Recipe Editor (Modifiers) .................80
Menu Recipes ...........................................156
Menu Setup .................................................55
MICR Device ........................................11, 22
Keyboard Interface............................11, 22
USB Interface ...................................11, 22
Misc Button...............................................106
Modem ........................................................26
Modifier Builder Editor ..............................60
Modifier Builder Template .......................111
Modifier Builder Template Setup ...............58
Modifier Builder Template Setup > Edit
Category ..................................................59
Modifier Recipe Selector ............................81
Modifier System .......................................109
Modifiers
Forced ...................................................111
Manual ..................................................111
Modifier Builder Template ...................111
Normal ..................................................110
Money Count Screen.................................89
Money Drop ..............................................141
Monitor Client Connections ......................172
Monthly Sales Analysis Report ..............195
MSR Device ............................................9, 22
Keyboard Interface..............................9, 22
Serial Interface ..................................10, 22
USB Interface ...................................10, 22
Multilingual Capabilities ............................34
Multiple Languages ....................................34
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
341
Index
N
Network Hardware ..................................... 13
Network Software ...................................... 17
New Customer Take Out On Hold ........... 117
New Freq. Diner ....................................... 153
New Local E-Mail .................................... 164
New PO (Purchase Order) ........................ 157
New Purchase Order ................................. 171
Next Day Transfer .................................... 152
NIC Cards................................................... 14
No Kitchen / Bar ...................................... 109
No Sale ............................................. 107, 133
No Sale Tracking Report ....................... 245
Normal Modifiers ..................................... 110
Notepad .................... 10, 11, 12, 22, 174, 175
O
Open Order Report ................................... 160
Opening Procedures ................................... 85
Operations Center ..................................... 148
Optimize Way Points ............................... 124
Order Entry......................................... 95, 300
Order Entry for Bar Tab ........................... 115
Order Entry for Delivery .......................... 121
Order Entry for Drive-Thru ...................... 119
Order Entry for Take Out ......................... 117
Order Entry Screen .................................. 96
Order Payments Report ......................... 203
Order Pmt List .......................................... 151
Order Settlement Procedures .................... 137
Ordering a Half......................................... 102
Ordering Multiple Quantity ...................... 102
Orders ....................................................... 147
Other Options ........................................... 321
Other Payments Report ......................... 204
Other Tools Section .................................. 158
Outstanding Bad Checks Report .......... 222
P
Pay Bad Checks ........................................ 149
Pay Employees ......................................... 163
Pay In-House Charges .............................. 149
Pay Out ..................................................... 133
Pay Out Details Report .......................... 206
Phy. Count Sheet ...................................... 155
Phy. Inv. Count......................................... 155
Physical Inventory Count ......................... 172
Physical Inventory Worksheet ...... 243, 244
Physical Network ....................................... 13
Cabling ................................................... 13
Hardware ................................................ 13
Hubs ....................................................... 14
NIC Cards .............................................. 14
Routers ................................................... 14
Switches ................................................. 14
Wireless Access Points........................... 15
Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts ...................... 55
Pizza Builder Setup > Crusts > Add ........... 55
Pizza Builder Setup > Pizzas ...................... 57
Pizza Builder Setup > Pizzas> Add............ 57
Pizza Builder Setup > Sizes ....................... 55
Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings ................. 56
Pizza Builder Setup > Toppings > Add ...... 56
Pizza Builder System ............................... 112
Pizza Size Alias Name 1 – 10 .................. 112
Pizza Size Half Topping Price 1 – 10....... 112
Port Settings ............................................. 325
POS Hardware .............................................. 3
POS Hardware Setup .................................. 19
POS Printers ......................................... 19, 20
Postal Codes ............................................... 39
Print > Customer Receipt ......................... 294
Print > Guest Check ................................. 291
Print > Kitchen / Bar ................................ 292
Print > Multilingual .................................. 293
Print > Other Options ............................... 295
Print > Packager Receipt .......................... 294
Printer > Kitchen / Bar > Kitchen ........... 323
Printer > Label Printer ............................. 324
Printer > Other ........................................ 324
Printer > Packager Printer ....................... 323
Printer > Receipt Printer .......................... 322
Printer > Report Printer ........................... 324
Printer > Kitchen / Bar > Bar ................... 323
Printer Roles ................................................. 8
Bar ............................................................ 9
Kitchen ..................................................... 8
Label......................................................... 9
Receipt ..................................................... 8
Report ....................................................... 9
Printer Types .............................................. 43
Printers ......................................................... 6
Ethernet .................................................... 7
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
342
Index
Interfaces .................................................. 6
Parallel ..................................................... 6
Serial ........................................................ 6
USB .......................................................... 8
Products > Inventory ................................ 299
Products > Modifiers ................................ 298
Products > Other Options ......................... 300
Products > Pizza ....................................... 299
Proportioned Pizza Topping Charge ........ 112
Purchase Order ......................................... 157
Purchase Order Received Status Report
......................................237, 238, 239, 240
Q
Quarterly Sales Analysis Report ........... 196
Quick Service ................................... 127, 320
Quick Service Screen Auto Log Out Seconds
............................................................. 116
Quick Sign Out ........................................ 143
R
RAM ............................................................ 4
Recall Another Check on the Same Table 105
Recall Operations ..................................... 129
Recall Order ............................................. 108
Recall Procedures ..................................... 129
Receipts > Guest Check ........................... 288
Receipts > Kitchen / Bar .......................... 289
Receipts > Other Options ......................... 290
Receive Inventory Items .......................... 172
Receive Items ........................................... 158
Receive Payments Section ....................... 148
Recharging Gift Cards ............................. 136
Recipe Units ............................................... 76
Redemption .............................................. 153
Refresh Cumulative Grand Total ............. 174
Refund Details Report ........................... 208
Register a Pager ......................................... 86
Register Report ........................................ 151
Registry Settings ...................................... 328
Releasing a Hold ...................................... 101
Remove All Access Denied Logs ............ 172
Remove All Caller ID Logs ..................... 173
Remove All Customer Names From Orders
............................................................. 173
Remove All Redeemed Gift Certificate MSR
Card Information .................................. 173
Remove Prior Manager Cash Outs ............173
Remove Prior Reservations .......................173
Re-Open Cashier Out ................................152
Re-Open Deposit.......................................152
Re-Ordering Items ......................................98
Reports ......................................................183
Export ...................................................182
Generating .............................................183
Sample ..................................................183
Reprint Pizza Labels .................................109
Require Phone # For Take Out .................117
Reservations ................................................91
Retail Screen .............................................108
Revenue > Cashier ....................................286
Revenue > Gratuity ...................................285
Revenue > Other Options..........................287
Revenue > Payments ................. 282, 283, 284
Revenue Center Section ............................150
Reverting or Re-Opening a Cash Drawer .148
Reverting or Re-Opening an Order ...........147
Review Local E-Mail ................................164
Review PO ................................................157
Review Purchase Order.............................171
Round Delivery Total To Next Quarter ....121
Route Planning ..........................................124
Routers ........................................................14
Running a Closing Report .........................145
S
Sales By Area Report ..............................200
Sales By Category Report .................161, 186
Sales By Hour (Summary) Report .........187
Sales By Hour Details Report ................188
Sales By Menu Item Report ..............161, 189
Sales By Order Type Report ..................190
Sales By Server Report ...........................191
Sales By Station Report ..........................192
Sales Summary Report ...........................184
Sales Vs. Inventory Usage By Auto
Depletion Report .................................198
Sample Reports .........................................183
Schedule Not Enforced .............................85
Screen Resolution .......................................31
Security Settings .......................................308
Accept Complimentary Payment ..........315
Accept Gift Certificate Redemption......314
Accept In-House Charge Payment ........315
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
343
Index
Access Back Office .............................. 309
Access Daily Closing Report................ 309
Access Delivery Status ......................... 308
Access Driver Tracking ........................ 308
Access Manual Modifier Screen .......... 312
Access Miscellaneous Features in
Operations ........................................ 312
Access No Sale Feature ........................ 313
Access No Sale Require Explanation ... 313
Access No Sale Require Manager ........ 313
Adjust Price in Order Entry .................. 308
Apply Credit Usage Require Manager . 309
Apply Gratuity Require Manager in Order
Entry ................................................. 313
Apply Surcharge Require Manager ...... 314
Approval of Clock In Time Not On
Schedule ........................................... 311
Approve Cash Register Discrepancies . 308
Cash Discount Amount Entry ............... 309
Cashier Sign In/Cashier Sign Out ......... 314
Create New Orders ............................... 310
Discounts Require Manager ................. 310
Do Not Print Duplicate Order to Kitchen
.......................................................... 312
Edit Delivery Compensation Amount .. 310
Edit Unpaid Employee Time Cards ...... 310
Exclusive Cash Register Access ........... 310
Exclusive Server Access ...................... 311
Issue Payout To Vendor ....................... 314
Issue Refund To Customer ................... 311
Maintain Customer Credits................... 311
Maintain Gift Certificates ..................... 312
Recall Existing Order ........................... 314
Select My Own Database ........................... 36
Selecting a Database ................................... 36
Server Computer .......................................... 3
Server Gratuity Report ..................... 161, 232
Services > Delivery .................................. 280
Services > Dine-In .................................... 274
Services > Drive-Thru .............................. 280
Services > Take Out ................................. 279
Setting the Windows Taskbar to Auto Hide33
Setting Up Bar Tab Efficiency ................. 116
Setting Up Caller ID ................................... 26
Setting Up the Barcode Reader .................. 23
Setting Up the Cash Drawer ....................... 21
Setting Up the Coin Changer ...................... 26
Setting Up the Customer Pole Display ....... 21
Setting Up the MICR Device ..................... 22
Setting Up the MSR Device ....................... 22
Setting Up the POS Printers ....................... 19
Windows® 7 Professional ....................... 19
Setting Up the Terminal ............................. 19
Setting Up the Weight Scale ...................... 23
Settlement Procedures .............................. 137
ATM / Debit Card ................................ 139
Cash ...................................................... 138
Check ................................................... 138
Complimentary ..................................... 140
Credit Card ........................................... 138
Gift Certificate ..................................... 139
House Account ..................................... 140
Settling in the Main POS Screen .............. 137
Settling in the Order Entry Screen ........... 140
Settling Using Driver Money Drop .......... 141
Settling Using Staff Bank ......................... 140
Sharing in Windows® 7 Professional ......... 35
Sharing Printers in Windows® 7 Professional
................................................................ 20
Sharing the Database Folder ...................... 35
Shopping List ........................................... 157
Show Driver Dispatch Screen .................. 121
Show Pizza Builder Screen ...................... 112
Skip Table Selection .................................. 95
Skip Table/Bar Tab Selection for Dine-In 115
Software Installation and Configuration .... 29
Software Operation .................................... 83
Software Setup ........................................... 31
Spanish ALT Codes ................................... 35
Special Pizza Topping Charges ................ 112
Specific Customer Purchase Report ..... 212
Specific Employee Time Cards Report 226
Specific Menu Category Sales Report .. 256
Specific Server Sales By Category Report
.............................................................. 234
Splitting an Order ..................................... 101
Staff / CRM .............................................. 295
Staff Bank .......................................... 87, 140
Staff Cash Drawer User Serial Port ............ 87
Staff Paging
Register Pager Security Level ................ 86
Start With Demo Database ......................... 36
Starting Staff Bank ..................................... 87
Starting the Network .................................. 15
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
344
Index
Station Settings > General ........................ 318
Stay ............................................................ 86
Stay in Order Entry Screen after Order is
Finished ................................................ 116
Store Settings ........................................... 270
General ................................................. 270
Store Settings > Other .............................. 301
Surcharge Usage Report ........................ 254
Surcharges .................................................. 40
Switches ..................................................... 14
U
Use Hostess Features ..................................91
Use Staff Bank ............................................87
Using Delivery Directions and Route
Planning ................................................124
Using the Default Delivery Assignment
Procedures .............................................123
Using the Delivery Status Screen..............125
Using the Quick Service Screen................127
T
V
Table Group Editor .................................... 47
Table Group Sales Per Employee Report
............................................................. 231
Table Setup ................................................ 47
Take Out / Delivery Show Search Type ... 117
Take Out Orders ....................................... 117
Tax Exempt .............................................. 109
Tax Report .............................................. 266
Tax Table Setup ......................................... 46
Taxes > Other Options ............................. 273
Taxes > Tax 1........................................... 272
Taxes > Tax 2........................................... 272
Taxes > Tax 3........................................... 273
Telephone Display Format .................... 117
Testing the POS Printers ............................ 20
Testing Your Network ............................... 18
Third Party Add Ins.................................. 174
Calculator ............................................. 175
New ...................................................... 174
Notepad ................................................ 175
Time Card Clock In Grace Minutes ....... 85
Time Card Clock Rounding Minutes ..... 85
Time Card Edit Report .......................... 248
Time Cards ......................................... 85, 147
Time Synchronization .................................. 3
To Secondary Language ........................... 109
To Training Mode .................................... 159
Total Payments Received Summary
Report.................................................. 209
Touch Monitors ............................................ 5
Touch Screens .............................................. 5
Track Guest Count For Dine-In Orders...... 95
Track Order .............................................. 153
Training Mode ......................................... 159
Video Surveillance
Camera Settings ....................................164
Close .....................................................165
Disable Camera .....................................165
Maintenance ..........................................165
Snapshot ................................................165
Video Surveillance Control Center ...........164
Video Surveillance Review Browser ........165
Viewing Delivery Order Status .................124
Viewing Your Schedule ..............................86
Void Operations ........................................131
Void Procedures ........................................131
Voiding Items .............................................97
Voids Report ............................................247
W
Wage Advance ..........................................133
Wage Advance Details Report ...............229
Waiting List ................................................92
Weekly Labor Cost Projection...............225
Weekly Sales Analysis Report ................194
Weight Scale .........................................12, 23
Decimals .................................................24
Hardware Refresh Interval ......................24
Integration ...............................................24
Maximum Display Length ......................24
Query Interval .........................................24
Registry Settings .....................................24
Size Items ................................................25
Size Tare .................................................26
Unit Name ...............................................25
Windows® 7 Professional ...........................17
Wireless Access Points ...............................15
Work Schedule ..........................................160
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
345
Index
Y
Z
Yearly Sales Analysis Report ................ 197
Z Report ................................................... 150
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
346
Index
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Notes
Notes
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
347
348
Notes
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
Notes
Copyright © 1997 – 2015 Aldelo, LP All Rights Reserved.
349
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement